Dec. 2019

TABLECONTENTS
TableOFof Contents

Company Profile.................................................................................4

Integrated Microwave
Assemblies (IMA)

Beam Forming Networks ......................................6
RF Front Ends ........................................................7
Frequency Converters ...........................................8Transmit/Receive Modules ...................................11
Data Links & Smart Munition ...............................14
Transmitter for IFF .................................................16
Receivers and Receiver Subassemblies .............18
Switched Filter Banks ............................................25
DLVA ........................................................................29
Amplitude Control Modules ..................................33

Power Amplifiers

Solid State Power Amplifiers (SSPA) ...................42
Custom SSPAs .......................................................57

Attenuators / Modulators

General and Applications Notes ..........................64
Attenuators Selection Guide ................................71
Switched Bit Attenuators .....................................110

Phase Shifters &I-Q Vector Modulators

General and Applications Notes .........................127
Phase Shifters Selection Guide ...........................139
Bi-Phase Modulator ..............................................140
I-Q Vector Modulator .............................................143
Phase Shifter, Frequency Translator ...................159

Switches

General and Applications Notes ..........................168
Switches Selection Guide ....................................172
SPST thru SP16T ...................................................177
Transfer switch .......................................................274
Hermetically Sealed ...............................................276
High Power .............................................................298

Limiters

General and Applications Notes ..........................322
Limiters Selection Guide ......................................324
Limiters Broadband ..............................................325
Limiters Narrowband ............................................326

2

TABLECONTENTS
TableOFof Contents

Millimeter Wave
Components(18-40 GHz)

General ................................................................330
Attenuators ..........................................................331
Phase Shifters .....................................................336
Switches ..............................................................340
3 dB quadrature coupler ....................................348
MMW Options.......................................................350
Integrated Microwave Assemblies ....................351

Sources

General ................................................................352
Synthesizer .........................................................354
Digitally Tuned (DTO) .........................................378
Frequency Locked (FLO) ..................................394
Voltage Controlled (VCO) ..................................398

AppendixdBm Volts Watts Conversion Table ...................405
VSWR Conversion Table ....................................406
Terms and Conditions of Sales .........................408

3

KRATOS GENERAL MICROWAVECOMPANY PROFILE

Kratos General Microwave is one of the largest international independent microwave companies with over 30
years of proven experience in the market. Our products are used in a variety of demanding environments including
airborne, ground and naval systems.
Kratos General Microwave is a recognized worldwide leader in the design and manufacture of high performance,state-of-the-art Microwave components and subassemblies for the defense as well as non-defense markets. We
are supporting a wide range of requirements with catalog and custom Microwave products for applications suchas:
For the Defense market: Electronic Warfare (EW) systems, Radars, Missiles, UAV, Smart Munition, GPS Immune,
Communications, Data Links, HLS and Simulators
For the Commercial market: In-Flight-Connectivity, IFF, Test Equipment, RF and Fiber Optic Communications,
Industry, Research Laboratories and Medical Instruments.

Microwave Product solutions supporting a wide range of applications
including:Broadband Oscillators and Synthesizers (0.5 to 18GHz and beyond)Fast Indirect Synthesizers with less than 1 microsecond settling time with modulation, Direct Coherent
Synthesizers with 40 nanosecond settling time, Digitally Tuned Oscillators (DTOs) Phase Locked Oscillator (PLOs)
and Voltage Controlled Oscillators (VCOs).

4

KRATOS GENERAL MICROWAVECOMPANY PROFILE
Solid State Power Amplifiers (SSPAs)
Up to 1KW in X and Ku- bands for missiles, airborne Radars and HLS radars, up to 1 KW in VHF, for military andnon-military applications, Pulse Power Amplifiers for IFF systems and Low Noise Amplifiers.

Integrated Microwave Assemblies (IMAs) and Sub-Systems
Beam Forming Modules
A versatile line of complex high-density modules utilizing Surface Mount Technology, for Phase Array Radars.
Transceivers and Receivers.
Superior performance and cost effectiveness. This product line includes both Narrowband and Broadband
products, covering 0.5 – 18 GHz, for various applications such as Direction Finder subsystem for ELINT and ESM
airborne systems, Data Links for Missiles, Smart Munition, UAVs, Centric Network Warfare, JDAM/BDI and more.
Custom IMAs
Integrated Microwave Assemblies built per specific customer’s requirements such as: RF Front Ends, Frequency
Converters, and DLVAs.

Control Components (0.1 – 40 GHz)
Based upon PIN diode and proprietary coupler technology. This product line includes Switches(SPST up to SP26T) for low, medium and high power, Switched Filter Banks, Attenuators,
Limiters, Modulators, Phase Shifters, Frequency Translators and I/Q Vector Modulators. All theseproducts, with either digital or analog control.

ISO 9001:2008 and AS9100 Rev. C
Kratos General Microwave has been registered to ISO 9001:2008 and AS9100 Rev. C. applicableto the design, manufacture and sales of microwave components, super components and sub
systems.

RoHS Compliance
Kratos General Microwave has a policy of continuous environmental improvement and iscommitted to working closely with its suppliers and customers to achieve this goal.
The RoHS Directive stands for “the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances inelectrical and electronic equipment”. Most of Kratos General Microwave’s components areavailable as RoHS compliant, meeting the requirements of the RoHS Directive when indicted
RoHS compliant in our literature and on our web site. If your parts require RoHS compliancy,
please indicate as RoHS compliant when you place your order.

5

Integrated Microwave Assemblies (IMA)
KRATOS General Microwave manufactures both Catalog and Custom Integrated Microwave Assemblies (IMA). This
type of multi-function assembly is sometimes identified as a “Supercomponent” or “Microwave Integrated Circuit”
with the primary objectives of significantly increasing performance while reducing the size and weight of a system.
Applications can range from high environmentally stressed Airborne and Naval Systems to simply size reduction oflarge Ground Systems and Test Systems.
In addition to designing IMAs which incorporate Microwave Control Components and or Signal Sources, KRATOS
General Microwave Engineering has the capability to also include Amplifiers, Filters, Switched Filters, Power
Splitters/Couplers, Gain Equalization Circuits depending on individual Customer specification requirements.
KRATOS General Microwave Engineering carefully reviews the specification requirements of each IMA in order tochoose the optimum integration technology to provide the Customer with a high performance, high reliability andcost effective solution. These integration technologies can include any one or a combination of the following:Standard Chip & Wire Technology (MIC)
Surface Mount Technology (SMT)
Integration of Discrete Control Components
Selection of the appropriate integration technology is typically driven by various factors which can include,
Frequency Range, Bandwidth, available volume and number of IMAs required for production.
KRATOS General Microwave has developed many IMAs including Phase & Amplitude Control Modules for
Simulators, Beam Forming Networks for Phased Array Radars, Broadband Up & Down Converters, Transmit/Receive
Modules and Solid State Power Amplifiers operating in the X to Ku Frequency Ranges. Examples of a few of those
IMAs have been provided.

SMT BEAM FORMING NETWORK - FOR PHASED ARRAY RADARSFEATURES• L and IFF Frequency Bands• SMT Technology• Control of Amplitude and Phase

6

Custom - IMAs
RF FRONT ENDSFEATURES• Broadband• Low Noise Figure• Wide Dynamic Range

FEATURES• Wide Frequency Range• Airborne Application

FEATURES• L to S bands• Multi Channel• Airborne Application• Blind Mating

7

Custom - IMAFREQUENCY CONVERTERS ASSEMBLIESFEATURES• Frequency Range: 6 to 18 GHz• High Out of Band Rejection• High Isolation

Twin Down converter

8Custom - IMAsFREQUENCY CONVERTERS ASSEMBLIES

Twin Up converter

FEATURES• Frequency Range: 2 to 18 GHz• High Out of Band Rejection• High Isolation

9

Custom - IMAFREQUENCY CONVERTERS ASSEMBLIESFEATURES• Frequency Range: 0.5 to 18 GHz• High image Rejection• High Performance• Airborne Applications

Down converter
Up converter

Up converter

FEATURES• L Band to Ku Band
• Output Power P1dB: 28dBm• SMA to WG Connectors

10Custom - IMAs
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE MODULESFEATURES• Frequency Range: X Band
• Power Output: 10W

FEATURES• Frequency Range: 6 to 18 GHz• Power Output: 2 to 4W• Noise Figure: < 6.5 dB• Attenuation Control Range: 15 dB• Phase Control Range: 180o
• Small Size

11

Custom- IMAs
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE MODULESFEATURES• Frequency Range: Ku Band
• Power Output: 8W• Noise Figure: <4 dB• Small Size

12

Custom - IMAs
MILLIMETER WAVE TRANSMIT/RECEIVE MODULES

Millimeter Wave Transmitter Sub Assembly

FEATURES• Operating within Ka Frequency Band
• High Efficiency transmitter• Five channel receiverMillimeter Wave Receiver Sub Assembly13Custom - IMA
TRANSCEIVER FOR DATA-LINKS and SMART MUNITION
KRATOS General Microwave designs and manufactures a variety of customized DATA-LINKS sub-systems,
from small, simple, low cost, low power to complex, high-end, high power. Those Data Links are usedin various platform and applications such as UAV, mini-UAV, Missiles, Smart/Precision Guided Munition,
Network Centric Warfare (NCW) etc. The products combine State Of The Art Microwave technology, mixed
signal processing, System On Chip (SoC) devices, high power FPGAs and other Digital technologies.
Kratos General Microwave is offering Data-Links products in two options, based on the customer’s
preference::• Hardware only – allowing the customer to incorporate their own IP Firmware / Modem etc.
• Full Data link, including Microwave, Hardware and Firmware.
KRATOS General Microwave has successfully delivered hundreds of Data Links systems to its customers
and continues to develop new generations of DATA LINKS with superior capabilities and additional features.

L BAND DATA LINKS

MAIN FEATURES• TX Power >100W• Pulse / Half Duplex Mode
• High Altitude >200Kfeet• High Capacity• Ground Stations• High End

14

Custom - IMAs
COMPACT DATA LINK

MAIN FEATURES• TX Power 50W• Dual Channel Transceiver• Low Profile• Smart Ammunition Applications• SDR• High Capacity• Variety of Frequencies• Low Cost

15

Model PA4095
IFF Transmitter
Military & Civilian Modes of Operation
CT
PRODU
G–
ORDER
L
DERIN
IA
C
SPE
RE OR
O
F
E
B
ORY
T FACT
ONSULHigh Power Output: 600 Watt
Proven Reliability: LD-MOS Based Design
High MTBF­–CAPPLICATIONSThe Model PA4095 was designed to be the transmitter module in an IFF system. It is a state-of-the-art
configuration which incorporates all of the RF and Control elements listed below:
RF Source at 1090 MHz
Driver and Modulator
Power Amplifier
High Power PIN Switch
Control and Monitoring

Block Diagram - Model PA4095 IFF Transmitter

16

Model PA4095
IFF Transmitter
Main specifications - IFF Transmitter Model PA4095
PARAMETERS

SPECIFICATION

1OUTPUT FREQUENCY, MHz

1,090

2

PEAK POWER OUTPUT, Watts, min.

600

3

OUTPUT PORTS

4

SWITCHING TIME, msec, max.
(between output ports)

2 (selectable)
50

5

OUTPUT POWER DIFFERENCE, dB, max.
(between first & last pulse)±1

6

REPLAY PULSES

60 for 8 Sec. Preamble & 55 Sec. Data Block
116 for 8 Sec. Preamble & 112 Sec. Data Block

7

DUTY CYCLE, %, max.

8

TEMPERATURE RANGE, Degrees C

2Operating-40 to +85

Storage-55 to +95

9EMI/EMCAs per MIL-STD-161E

10

ALTITUDE

As per mMIL-E-5000T: 70,000 feet

11

DIMENSIONS12WEIGHT

218 x 150 x 25 mm , 8.58 x 5.90 x 0.98”
1,400 grams, 49.38 ounces

Dimensions and Outline

Weight (approx.) 1.4Kg. (49.38 Oz)

Dimensions in mm (Inches)17Super Heterodyne Wideband Receiver
Model WBR-0518-MOD• Wide Frequency Range: 0.5 to 18 GHz• Three simultaneous IF outputs• AM and FM detectors• Low Phase Noise• Modes of Operation: Scan Mode or Search Mode
• Built-in test functions• Low Power Consumption• Low cost

CT
PRODU
–
RDER
O
L
ERING
IA
E ORD
SPEC
R
O
F
E
ORY B
T FACT
ONSUL­–C

Receiver Model WBR-0518-MOD

APPLICATIONThe Model WBR-0518-MOD Wideband Receiver utilizes cutting edge technology which provides a highperformance and cost effective solution. It has been designed for use as a stand alone receiver or it can be used in
more complex receiving systems for ELINT and ESM applications.

18

Receiver Model WBR-0518-MOD
DESCRIPTION
The Model WBR-0518-MOD Super Heterodyne Wideband Receiver was designed to be a low cost, highperformance, self contained system capable of advanced detection and processing of communicationand non-communication signals. This receiver offers all the features required for high data rate reception
while maintaining high pulse fidelity for interception of radar signals. It is ideally suited for today’scomplex environments.
Signals from the antenna are fed to the WBR receiver input. The input stage consists of a high dynamic
range front end which includes a preselector. The dual down converter sections use synthesized LO
inputs to convert all incoming signals to 1 GHz signal. This 1 GHz signal is then fed to the IF assemblyfor further conversion, gain control and filtering to provide simultaneous outputs of 160 MHz and 380
MHz. The 1 GHz signal is also provided as a third and separate IF output. In addition, the 1 GHz signal
is fed, in parallel, to the demodulator sections which comprise of AM and FM detectors. These can thenextract the respective amplitude and frequency information from the modulated 1 GHz IF signal be it CW
or narrow pulse widths of 50 nanoseconds.
The WBR internal control assembly configures all of the receiver sub-assemblies and collects
their response to generate a global status report. The internal control assembly also includes acommunication link with the external Host computer.
The WBR has built in test (BIT) capability which continuously monitors the operation of the receiver. In
the event of a malfunction, it will issue a failure indication alert to the main system.

19

Receiver Model WBR-0518-MODPERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSPARAMETERSPECIFICATION

1

Operating Input Frequency, min (GHz)2

Noise Figure, max (dB)143

Sensitivity (dBm) @ 500 MHz and SNR of 15dB

-58

4

DCA Range, min (dB)5

DCA Resolution, min (dB)1

6

Measurable Pulse Width

50 ns to CW

7

Input Signal Modulations

8

Instantaneous Dynamic Range (dB)59

9Number of IF outputs

3

10

IF signal # 1

11

IF signal # 2

Centered at 160 MHz with selectable bandwidthsof 1, 10, 20, 50, 100 MHz

12

IF signal # 3

Centered at 1 GHz with bandwidth of 500 MHz

13

Image Rejection, min (dB)14

RF to IF Gain (dB)

15

Input 1dB CP, min (dBm)+116

Input / Output Impedance (Ohms)

50

17

Input / Output VSWR, max

2:1

18

Spurious Level, max (dBm)

-55

19

Survival Input Power, max (dBm)

+20

20

Total Tuning and Settling Speed

Less than 1ms to center frequency

21

Tuning Step Size, min (MHz)22

0.5 to 18

0 to 60

Pulse , AM and FM

Centered at 380 MHz with selectable bandwidthsof 50, 100, 250, 500 MHz

60
5 to 10

1O

Integrated Phase Error, max.

0.8

20

RMS

Receiver Model WBR-0518-MODPERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSPARAMETER
23
24

SPECIFICATION

Phase Noise Performance (SSB), max (dBc/Hz)@ 1kHz offset

- 85

25

@ 10 kHz offset

- 90

26

@ 100 kHz offset

- 100

27

@ 1 MHz offset

- 130

28

Tuner Frequency Stability

29Video Signal Outputs

30

Power Supplies Requirements

Less than 1ppm/year
LOG AM and FM Detectors (at 1 GHz, BW: 100
or 500MHz)

31

5 VDC ± 2.5%

3.2A max

32-5 VDC ± 2.5%

0.1A max

33

12 VDC ± 5%

3.6A max

34-12 VDC ± 5%0.3A max.

35

Receiver Controls

Fast Ethernet (100 Base T)

36

Built In Test (BIT)37

On line38

Off line

39

Operating Temperature Range, min40

Dimensions

41

WeightRuns in the background
Upon request
0°C to + 70° C
440 x 220 x 40 mm (17.3” x 8.66” x 1.57 “)
5.8 Kg (13.8 Lb)

21

Receiver Model WBR-0518-MOD
OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature Range ....0°C to +70°C
Storage Temperature Range .......-40°C to +85°C
Humidity ......................................95% RH non condensing, @35°C
Shock ..........................................22g, Half sine, 20 msec each axis
Vibration ......................................Per MIL-STD-167-1A
EMI/EMC .....................................Per MIL 461C

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings

DIMENSIONS AND OUTLINE
The WBR outline shown below can be modified to meet installation requirements of complex
receiver systems.

Dimensions in mm (inches)

22

Custom Receiver
QUAD RECEIVER CHANNEL (QRC)

FEATURES• 0.5 to 18 GHz• Four Channels• Airborne Environment

23

Custom Receiver
TWIN RECEIVER SUBASSEMBLY (TRS)FEATURES• 0.5 to 18 GHz• Two Channels• Airborne Environment

24

Switched Filter Banks
SWITCHED FILTER BANKSKRATOS General microwave is providing various types of Switched Filters banks. These are customized
products designed to meet specific customers requirements. The main features of this product line are:1. Fast Switching
2. Low Loss
3. Temperature Stability
The following filter technologies are being used by us:
1. Cavity Combline
2. Lumped Elements
3. Printed Filters
The following are samples of switched filter banks supplied by us

SUB-MINIATURE SWITCHED FILTER BANKFEATURES• Miniature Cavity 9 Channel• Very Thin unit: 9 mm, 0.3”

25

Switched Filter Banks
Model SBF-0518-7-LEM
VARIOUS TECHNOLOGIES IMPLEMENTED IN A SWITCHED FILTER BANKFEATURES• Filters Implemented by: Lumped Elements and Printed filters• No. of Channels: 7• Frequency range: 0.5 to 18 GHz

CH

Pass Band(GHz)

Insertion
Loss
(dB)

Rejection (GHz)
30 dB

45 dB

55 dB

60 dB

1

0.472 to 0.808

9.0

14 to 20

1 to 14

DC to 0.22

20.728 to 1.320

9.0

14 to 20

1.5 to 14

DC to 0.431.240 to 2.088

9.0

16 to 20

2.4 to 16

DC to 0.07

410.456 to 18.088

9.0

21 to 30

DC to 8.4

52.000 to 3.500

9.0

21 to 30

DC to 1.4

6

3.400 to 6.100

9.0

DC to 2.975.950 to 10.550

9.0

6.8 to 20
DC to 4.7

26

4 to 1012 to 21

Switched Filter Banks
Model SBF-620-4-MEC
CAVITY TYPE SWITCHED FILTER BANKFEATURES• Filter implemented by: Cavity• No. of Channels: 4• Frequency range: 6 to 20.5 GHz

CH

Pass Band(GHz)

Min. Rejection(GHz)

Insertion
Loss (dB)
max.

50 dB

65 dB

50 dB

1

5.95 to 9.05

7.5

2.2 to 5.2

13.4 to 16.4

11.2

2

8.95 to 12.85

7.5

1.6 to 5.4

16.0 to 19.8

14.4

3

12.75 to 16.05

7.5

1.6 to 4.8

6.4 to 9.6

11.2

4

15.95 to 20.05

7.5

1.6 to 3.6

8.8 to 12.8

14.4

27

Switched Filter Banks
Model SBF-618-6-PRT
PRINTED TYPE SWITCHED FILTER BANKFEATURES• Filter implemented by: Printed filters• No. of Channels: 6• Frequency range: 5.5 to 18 GHz

Freq. Range(GHz)

Ins. Loss(dB)

Stop Band
55 dBc (GHz)

Stop Band
70 dBc (GHz)1

5.5 to 7.9

6.0

2.0 to 4.3

9.2 to 19.0

2

7.7 to 10.0

6.8

2.0 to 6.2

11.3 to 19.0

3

9.6 to 12.0

6.8

2.0 to 8.2

13.3 to 19.0

4

11.7 to 14.0

6.5

2.0 to 10.5

15.5 to 19.0

5

13.7 to 15.7

6.5

2.0 to 12.0

17.0 to 19.0

6

15.6 to 17.8

6.5

2.0 to 13.5

@ 19.0No.

28Detector Logarithmic Video Amplifier
DLVA DL6 Series
To support customers faced with obsolescenceand reliability issues of traditional DLVA suppliers,
General Microwave has initially designed and supplied
Series DL6 DLVA products as Form, Fit and Function
replacements.
Presently, General Microwave offers Series DL6 DLVA as
COTS catalog products. In addition to catalog models,custom DLVA units with user specific requirements canbe offered.

• Wide Frequency Range: 1 to 18 GHz• High Dynamic Range: 70 dB• Fast Rise Time: 25 nSec.
• Airborne Application

A broad band logarithmic detector has been developed,
capable of detecting CW and pulse signals. This broadband Tunnel Diode Detector has a wide dynamic range,high linearity, high sensitivity and high temperaturestability. Special drift compensation circuits havebeen implemented to ensure a low linearity error overtemperature.

DLVA MODEL DL6118

Fig. 1: DLVA Series DL6 Block Diagram
29

DLVA Series DL6TEST DATA30DLVA Series DL6
MAIN SPECIFICATIONSMODEL DL6118
PARAMETER

MODEL DL6218

SPECIFICATION

1Frequency Range, min. (GHz)

1 to 18

2 to 18

2

CW RF I/P POWER(1) AT J1, max. (W)2

3

TSS dBm (20 MHz VIDEO BW), Min. (dBm)-67

4

SP2T RF SWITCH ISOLATION, Min. (dB)60

5SWITCHING TIME, Max. (nS)6

DLVA TYPE

7

LOGGING RANGE (dBm)8

LOG SLOPE (mV/dB)

9

I/P PULSE WIDTH RANGE (mS)

10

RISE TIME, Max. (nS)25

11

SETTLING TIME (FOR 50 nS PULSE), Max. (nS)35

12

FILTER REJECTION AT RF & VIDEO O/P PORTS,
Min. (dB)13

DC POWER (PROTECTED FOR REVERSE POLARITY, OVER VOLTAGE UP TO ±20V,
SHORT CKT PROTECTION & EMI/EMC)

200 (TURN ON & OFF)DC COUPLED EXTENDED DYNAMIC
RANGE-66 TO 0700.050 TO 150

60 @ DC to 850
MHz

60 @ DC to 1,700
MHz+15 V ± 5%, Max. (A)

1.3-15 V ± 5%, Max. (mA)

300(1) Other specifications are available. Please contact Sales.

ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
1

OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE(ºC)-40ºC TO +85ºC

2

STORAGE TEMPERATURE RANGE-54ºC TO +90ºC

3

RANDOM VIBRATION (OPERATIONAL) 0.2 g2/Hz, 20-2000 Hz

4

RELATIVE HUMIDITY

95%

5

ALTITUDE

SEA LEVEL TO 10 Km

6

MECHANICAL SHOCK

75 g, HALF-SINE, 6 mS, 18 SHOCKS

7

EMI/EMCAS PER MIL-STD-461C

8

ACCELERATION (STRUCTURAL)

10.5 g ON ALL FACES

31

DLVA Series DL6
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Model DL6118 and Model DL6218   Wt. 17.6 oz (500gr.) approx.
Dimensional in Inches (mm). Tolerances: unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.005

32Amplitude Control Module Series ACM
Specifications• High Gain
• High Dynamic Range: 95 dB• High Resolution: 0.15 dB• Low Harmonics• Pulse Modulation: 90 dB, 25 nsec
• Phase Control: Option• Monotonicity: Guaranteed

UCT
PROD
R
ING–
E
D
OR
RDER
L
O
A
I
E
C
R
O
SPE
Y BEF
CTOR
A
F
T
NSUL

–­ CO

The Series ACM Integrated Microwave Assemblies(IMAs) were developed for use in high performance
Simulator and ATE Systems. They provide precise
control of signal Amplitude and Pulse Modulation
over a high dynamic range with very fine resolution
and can cover a Frequency Range of 0.5 to 40 GHz
in only three modules.
Model ACM2052 0.5 to 2 GHz Amplitude Control Module

These IMAs were designed using the optimum
construction technology to achieve superior
products and ease of manufacturing. These include
Surface Mount Technology for the 0.5 to 2 GHz
module, Chip & Wire (MIC) technology for the broadband 2 to 18 GHz module and Integrated Discrete
Components for the much lower volume 18 to 40
GHz module.

OPTION
Similar modules, which allow the control of bothPhase and Amplitude, are also available. Consult
the Factory for details.

Model ACM2218 2 to 18 GHz Amplitude Control Module

Model ACM1840 18 to 40 GHz Amplitude Control Module33

Amplitude Control Module Series ACM
Specifications

Figure 1: Amplitude Control Module Block Diagram

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSPARAMETERSPECIFICATIONMODEL NUMBER

ACM2052

ACM2218

ACM1840FREQUENCY RANGE, min (GHz)

0.5 to 2

2 to 18

18 to 40OUTPUT POWER, 1 dB compression (dBm)

15

15

6

GAIN, min (dB)17

HARMONICS, max (dBc)
INPUT VSWR, max@ 2.0 to 3.5 GHz 14@ 3.5 to 6.0 GHz 16@ 6.0 to 10.4 GHz 17@ 10.4 to 18.0 GHz 18
-60

7

2.5:1

OUTPUT VSWR, max

2:1

2.5:1

2.5:1

100

100

90

ATTENUATIONRANGE, min (dB)
CONTROL

10 BITS TTLRESOLUTION, nominal (dB)

0.1

MONOTONICITY

0.1
GUARANTEED
1SWITCHING SPEED, max (m sec)

34

0.2

Amplitude Control Module Series ACM
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS (Cont.)
PARAMETERSPECIFICATIONMODEL NUMBER

ACM2052

ACM2218

ACM1840

360o

360o

360o

ISOLATION, min (dB)

80

90

70

SWITCHING SPEED, max (nsec)

25

25

25

Phase Control (OPTIONAL)
PULSE MODULATIONPULSE CONTROLTTLOPERATING TEMPERATURE+40oC to +50oC

STORAGE TEMPERATURE

0oC to +50oC

POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENT+5V DC, max (mA)

500

600

270

+10V DC, max (mA) *

N/A

800

700

+12V DC, max (mA)

750

N/A

N/A

+15V DC, max (mA)

600

400

300

-15V DC, max (mA)

400

400

310

* +10VDC to +15VDC Optional

MODEL ACM2052 (0.5 to 2 GHz) CONNECTORSCONNECTORS DATA
PORTPORT FUNCTIONQTY.

DESCRIPTION

NOTES

J1

CONTROL & SUPPLY

1

DB25 (PLUG)

PER MIL-C-24308

J2

MODULATOR CONTROL

1

SMC MALEPER MIL-C-39012

J3

RF IN

1

SMA FEMALEPER MIL-C-39012

J4

RF OUT1

SMA FEMALEPER MIL-C-39012

35

Amplitude Control Module Series ACM
Specifications
MODEL ACM2052 (0.5 to 2 GHz) DIMENSIONS

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

36

Amplitude Control Module Series ACM
Specifications
MODEL ACM2052 (0.5 to 2 GHz) CONNECTOR J1 PinoutPIN #FUNCTION

1

+15V

2

+15V

3

GND

4

+5V

5

GND

6

-15V

7

GND

8

+12V

9

GND

10

0.5 - 0.8 GHz band CTRL

11

0.8 - 1.3 GHz band CTRL

12

1.3 - 2 GHz band CTRL

13

Output SP4T Termination CTRL

14

Temp GND

15

Temp OUT

16

A1 (Attenuator LSB) 0.1 dB

17

A2 0.2 dB

18

A3 0.4 dB

19

A4 0.8 dB

20

A5 1.6 dB

21

A6 3.2 dB

22

A7 6.4 dB

23

A8 12.8 dB

24

A9 25.6 dB

25

A10 (Attenuator MSB) 51.2 dB

37

Amplitude Control Module Series ACM
Specifications
MODEL ACM2218 (2 to 18 GHz) DIMENSIONS

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

38

Amplitude Control Module Series ACM
Specifications
MODEL ACM2218 (2 to 18 GHz) CONNECTORS INFORMATIONCONNECTORS DATAFUNCTIONDESCRIPTIONJ1VVA Control &SupplyConn D-Type 15P
Per MIL-C-24308

PIN #FUNCTION

Conn D-Type 25P
Per MIL-C-24308

12-3.5 Band

J2

MODULE Control & Supply

2

N/C

Conn. SMC
Male, Per MILC-39012/77-0002

3

N/C

J3

Pulse Modulation Control

4

3.5-6 Band

5

N/C

J4

RF In

Conn. SMA Male,
Per MIL-C-39012

6

N/C

J5

RF OutConn. SMA Female,
Per MIL-C-39012

76-10.4 Band

8

N/C

9

N/C

10

10.4-18 Band

11

N/C

12

N/C

FUNCTION

13

Park State1.10 dB

14N/C

2.20 dB

15N/C

3.40 dB

16N/C

4.80 dB

17

Temp Monitor

51.60 dB

18

+5 V

6

3.20 dB

19

N/C

7

6.40 dB

20

-15 V

8

12.80 dB

21

+10 V

9

25.6 dB

22

+10 V

10

51.2 dB

23

GND

11

Strobe

24

GND

12

Strobe Enable

25

GND

13

+15 V

14

-15 V

15

GND

J1 PIN FUNCTIONS
PIN #

39

J2 PIN FUNCTIONS

Amplitude Control Module Series ACM
Specifications
MODEL ACM1840 (18 to 40 GHz) DIMENSIONS

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

CONNECTORS DATASYM

FUNCTIONDESCRIPTION

J1

RF Input“K” Conn Female

J2

RF Output“K” Conn Female

J3

Supply & Control

Conn 96 Pin Female(DIN 41612 Type C)

40

Amplitude Control Module Series ACM
Specifications
MODEL ACM1840 (18 to 40 GHz) CONNECTOR (J3)
PIN #

ROW A

ROW B

ROW C

1

RF Enable (pulse)

RF Enable screen GND

GND

2

GND

GND

GND

3

+10V

+10V

+10V

4

N.C.
Filter Bit 0 (18-26.5
GHz)
GND

N.C.

6

N.C.
Filter Bit 1 (26.5-40
GHz)
GND

7

+5V

+5V

+5V

8

-15V

-15V

-15V

9

ATT STROBE LATCH

N.C.

N.C.

10

N.C.

N.C.

A9 (Attenuator MSB) 51.2 dB

11

A8 25.6 dB

A7 12.8 dB

A6 6.4 dB

12

A5 3.2 dB

A4 1.6 dB

A3 0.8 dB

13

A2 0.4 dB

A1 0.2 dB

A0 (Attenuator LSB) 0.1 dB

14

GND

GND

GND

15

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

16

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

17

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

18

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

19

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

20

GND

GND

GND

21

-15V

GND

+15V

22

N.C.

GND

+5V

23

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

24

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

25

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

26

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

27

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

28

GND

Sense GND

GND

29

LED 1 Power (Green)Sense

LED 1/2 GND

30

LED 2 Fault (Red)

N.C.

N.C.

31

Fan +24V

N.C.

Fan 0V32

Fan +24V

N.C.

Fan 0V

5

41

TEMP, MONITOR
GNDSSPA - Power Amplifiers
POWER AMPLIFIERS
KRATOS General Microwave/Eyal offers a broad range of High Power Amplifiers for both Military and Commercial applications extending over the VHF to Ku Band Frequency Range. The KRATOS Engineering staff isavailable to design new products to individual specifications, or provide more cost effective customization ofexisting products, to meet specific Customer requirements. Our Power Amplifiers are typically for used in:
1. RADAR
2. ECM and COMJAM
3. Data-Links for UAVs
4. Test Systems
5. Communication and Cellular Based Stations
6. Special applications
The following is a summary of our capabilities and existing Power Amplifier products

MAIN FEATURES
1. VHF up to Ku bands.
2. Power levels up to 1 Kw, CW or Pulse.
3. Operating in Class A, AB and C.
4. Solid state technology; utilizing transistors such as Bi-Polar, LDMOS and GaAs.
5. Enabling various inputs.
6. Can be integrated as a RF subassembly module, or as 19” Rack mounted.
7. Control:a) Remote control optional of RS 232, RS422 or ETHERNET.
b) Control of Output Power by remote setting and ALC (Automatic Level Control).

PA PROTECTION and MONITORING
Special means and capabilities are implemented to Protect the Power Amplifiers from the following conditions and to monitor them (at the system level):
1. Over Temperature.
2. Forward Power.
3. Reflected Power.
4. Open/Short Load VSWR.

CUSTOM PA AND SSPA PRODUCTS
Examples of KRATOS General Microwave/Eyal Custom PA and Solid State Power Amplifier (SSPA) Products
and listed in the following pages and can be found on pages 57 to 62. Consult the Factory with your specificrequirements

42

Solid State Power Amplifier
SSPA
SOLID STATE POWER AMPLIFIER (SSPA)
The Solid State Power Amplifier (SSPA) product line was designed for use in the most demanding applications, including
Airborne, Missile, Radars and Communications. They are alsoa practical solution for more benign laboratory or field Test
Systems. These diverse applications are made possible by
the use of today’s cutting edge technologies for design andmanufacturing of the SSPAs. As a result, these SSPAs provide
high performance, reliability and cost effective alternatives toapplications currently using Traveling Wave Tube (TWT) Amplifiers. All SSPAs are designed using the Power Summation
concept (Fig1) which provides a graceful degradation capability not found in TWTs and critical to mission completion.
The product line supports both X and Ku Band applications
with band width up to 10% and offers peak power outputs up
to 400 Watts. Successful SSPA designs have utilized Gallium
Arsenide or Gallium Nitride power devices depending uponwhich was better suited for the application. The flexibility of
the SSPA design provides the ability to extend to adjacentfrequency bands requiring only a short development time atvery low risk.
The RF input to the SSPA (see fig. 2), is pre-amplified and split
into several parallel symmetric branches. Each branch includes
a power amplifier section (PA). This distributed design of the
SSPA results in built in redundancy and graceful degradation of
output power should any individual PA section fail. Each branch
includes a current sense alarm indication which is monitored
and fed to the SSPA controller. The amplified outputs of all thesymmetric branches are summed up in a passive combing
network which routes the resultant high power to the output of
the SSPA.

• X and Ku Bands• Power Output: up to 400W
• High Reliability• For Severe Environmental Applications• Low Life Cycle Cost

Custom GaAs SSPA

Custom GaN SSPA Assembly

Fig. 1: POWER SUMMATION

Fig. 2: SSPA 400W BLOCK DIAGRAM

43

SSPA - Power Amplifiers
A compact and highly efficient switching Power Supply Unit (PSU) is built into the SSPA. This state-of-the-art
PSU design ensures that any contribution of phase noise and spurious signals are significantly reduced at
the RF output. The SSPA control section includes a Modulator which switches the DC lines of the individual
PA sections On/Off to achieve the required Pulse Width, Pulse Repetition Interval and Duty Cycle. The
SSPA Monitoring section includes Built-in-Test capability which receives indications from critical internal
subassemblies, including the PA sections, thereby constantly monitoring the condition of the SSPA.
Most all SSPA designs are custom deriving from Customer specifications because of the differing
requirements for specific applications such as Airborne Radars and Missile Seekers. There are, however, many
applications which can be served by more generic SSPAs as summarized in the below table. They are offered
as Special Catalog SSPAs and intended to provide the user with a proven, cost effective solution rather than a
new design.

CATALOG SSPA SELECTION GUIDEMODELFREQUENCY BANDOUTPUT POWER

PAGE

COMMENTS

SGN-K1-7

Ku Band

7W

56

GaN

SPA-X2-100

X BAND

100W

45

GaAs

SPA-X3-200

X BAND

200W

48

GaAs

SGN-X3-400

X BAND

400W

51

GaN

SGN-X4-20

X BAND20W

SGN-X4-50

X BAND50W

CUSTOM SSPA

GaN
54
57

44

GaN

SSPA Model SPA-X2-100
T
ODUC
–
R PR
E
RING
D
R
LO
ORDE
A
I
E
C
R
E
O
F
SP
RY BE
ACTO
F
T
L
U
CONS

­–

• X Band• Band Width: 9%• Output Power: 100W
• Pulse Width: 250 µsec max.
• High Reliability

The Model SPA-X2-100 is a Standard Catalog SSPA designed tofulfill various applications including Radar, Communications andTest Systems. It has been designed for optimum operation in
the pulse mode and utilizes proven GaAs power devices which
provide high performance and reliability at X-Band.
Typical test data are shown below with Fig 1 comparing thecommand and resultant detected RF pulses and Fig 2 illustrating
the minimal droop for a 256 usec pulse at the maximum of 100
Watt RF Power Output.

Fig. 1: PULSE MODULATIONSSPA MODEL SPA-X2-100

Fig. 2: PULSE DROOP
45

SSPA Model SPA-X2-100
MAIN SPECIFICATIONSPARAMETERSPECIFICATIONModel

SPA-X2-100

1Frequency Range, (GHz)X Band1.1

Bandwidth, %9

2

Peak Saturated Output Power, (W) min.

100

2.1

Average Output Power, (W) min.

25

2.2

Amplitude Flatness, (dB) PTP

1.2

2.3

RF Out Amplitude Droop @ Pulse Width of
250 µSec, (dB) max.

1.5

3

Output Load VSWR, max

2:1

4.1

Large Signal Gain, (dB) min. (with 0 dBm,
input)

53 (1)

4.2

Input RF Drive, (dBm)

0 to 5 (1)5RF Pulse Width, (µSec), max.

250 (1)

6

RF Rise/Fall Time, (nSec.) max.

50nSec7

Duty Cycle, (%) max.

25

8

PRF, (kHz)1 – 600 (1)9Input Supply Voltage, (V)+28 (2)

9.1

Average Input Current, (A) max.

7

10

DC Power Consumption, (W) max.

215

11

Switching Power Supply (Provided as part of Ultra quiet, non-synchronized
the SSPA)
architecture

12

Spurious Level between PRF Control Lines,(dBc) min.

70

13

Efficiency, (%) min.

15

14

Operating Temperature Range, (°C)

-40 to +85

15Dimensions L x W x H, (Inch)9.00 x 7.00 x 1.2

16

Dimensions L x W x H, (mm)228.6 x 177.8 x 30.5

(1) Other specifications are available. Please contact Sales.
(2) Option 20V to 60V.

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings46

SSPA Model SPA-X2-100
CONNECTOR
DESIGNATIONFUNCTION

TYPE

COMMENTS

J1

RF In

SMA F

J2

RF OutSMA F

J3MODULATION In

Feed ThroughSolder Pin 0.8Ø

VDC IN

Input Voltage In

Feed ThroughSolder Pin 1.0ØVDC IN RET.

Input Voltage Return

Feed ThroughSolder Pin 1.0Ø

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Dimensions in mm (Inches) Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.005

Wt: 70.5 oz ( 2Kg.) approx.

47

SSPA Model SGN-X3-200
Model SGN-X3-200 is part of our Catalog SGN series
Solid State Power Amplifiers (SSPA). The SGN SSPA
series is based on GaN technology. Utilizing the GaN
technology enables us to provide our customers a lower
cost SSPA, with high efficiency and higher packaging,while maintaining all of the advantages of the SSPA, such
as High Reliability and Power Redundancy.

T
ODUC
–
R PR
E
RING
D
R
LO
ORDE
A
I
E
C
R
E
O
F
SP
RY BE
ACTO
F
T
L
U
CONS

­–

The SSPA consists of an input section with preamplifier
stages and an power amplifier output section. The output
section consists of summation of 6 amplifiers. In addition
to the microwave section, there is a proprietary designed
asynchronous low-noise power supply and pulsemodulator.

• GaN Technology• X Band• Band Width: 9%• Output Power: 200W
• Pulse Width: 256 µSec. max.
• High Efficiency

The application of this series of GaN based SSPA, isto fulfill various requirements of high reliable products
at lower cost. Typical applications of this SSPA are forRadar, Data Links, Communications and Test Systems.

SSPA Model SGN-X3-200

48

SSPA Model SGN-X3-200
MAIN SPECIFICATIONPARAMETERSPECIFICATION

MODEL

SGN-X3-200

1Frequency Range (GHz)

X band1.1

Bandwidth %, max.

92

Peak Saturated Output Power, min. (W)

250

2.1

Amplitude Flatness, PTP, dB max.

1

2.2

RF Out Amplitude Droop @ Pulse Widthof 100 µSec, (dB), max.

1

3

Output Load VSWR

3.1

For Max. Output Power, max.

1.2:1

3.2

No Damage

2:1

4.1

Large Signal Gain, typ. (dB)

55

4.2

Small Signal Gain, typ. (dB)

70

4.3

Input RF Drive (dBm)-1 to +5

5

Pulse Width (µs) max.

256

6

Duty Cycle, max (%)

15

7

PRF (kHz), max.

40

8Input Supply Voltage (V)8.1

Average Input Current @ 28V, max (A)

10

8.2

Reverse Voltage ProtectionYes

9

DC Power Consumption, typ. (W)

280

10

Efficiency, typ. (%)

20

11

Tx enable external control (TTL)

11.1

Rise/Fall Time, typ. (nsec.)

11.2

Time Delay, typ. (nsec.)

12

Operating Temperature Range (°C)

-40 to +70

13

Other Typical Environmental
Specifications

Airborne

14

Dimensions L x W x H (in)9.0 x 7.0 x 1.6

14.1

Dimensions L x W xH (mm)228.6 x 177.8 x 40.2

15Weight, max. (Kg.)

16

Connectors

16.1

RF In

SMA Female

16.2

RF OutWaveguide WR90

16.3

Power Supply

16.4

Control

22 to 36

1

50
200

3.5

D-SUB 7W2
Micro-D 15 pin female

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings49

Note
1. Drain switching.

SSPA Model SGN-X3-200
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Dimensions in mm (Inches) Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

Wt: 7.7 Lb. ( 3.5Kg.) approx.

50

SSPA Model SGN-X3-400
The Model SGN-X3-400 is part of our Catalog SGN series
Solid State Power Amplifiers (SSPA). The SGN SSPA
series is based on the GaN technology. Utilizing the GaN
technology enables us to provide our customers a lower
cost SSPA, with high efficiency and higher packaging,while maintaining all of the advantages of the SSPA, such
as High Reliability and Power Redundancy.

UCT
PROD
R
NG–
E
DERI
ORD
R
L
O
A
I
E
R
SPEC
BEFO
TORY
C
A
F
ULT
CONS

­–

The application of this series of GaN based SSPA, isto fulfill various requirements of high reliable products
at lower cost. Typical applications of this SSPA are forRadar, Data Links, Communications and Test Systems.

• GaN Technology• X Band• Band Width: up to 1.0 GHz• Output Power: 400W
• Pulse Width: 0.2 to 150 µSec.
• High Efficiency

Following please find the basic block diagram of the
microwave section. It consists of an input section withpreamplifier stages and an power amplifier output
section. The output section consists of summation of 12
amplifiers.
In addition to the microwave section, there is a
proprietary designed asynchronous low-noise power
supply and pulse-modulator.

SSPA Model SGN-X3-400

SSPA Model SGN-X3-400 - Microwave Section

51

SSPA Model SGN-X3-400
MAIN SPECIFICATIONPARAMETERSPECIFICATION

MODEL

SGN-X3-400

1Frequency Range (GHz)

X band1.1

Bandwidth %, max.

92

Peak Saturated Output Power, min. (W)

400

2.1

Amplitude Flatness, PTP, dB max.

1

2.2

RF Out Amplitude Droop @ Pulse Widthof 100 µSec, (dB), max.

1

3

Output Load VSWR

3.1

For Max. Output Power, max.

1.2:1

3.2

No Damage

2:1

4.1

Large Signal Gain, typ. (dB)

55

4.2

Small Signal Gain, typ. (dB)

70

4.3

Input RF Drive (dBm)-1 to +5

5

Pulse Width (µs) max.

256

6

Duty Cycle, max (%)

20

7

PRF (kHz), max.

40

8Input Supply Voltage (V)8.1

Average Input Current @ 28V, max (A)

15

8.2

Reverse Voltage ProtectionYes

9

DC Power Consumption, typ. (W)

420

10

Efficiency, typ. (%)

20

11

Tx enable external control (TTL)

11.1

Rise/Fall Time, typ. (nsec.)

11.2

Time Delay, typ. (nsec.)

12

Operating Temperature Range (°C)

-40 to +70

13

Other Typical Environmental
Specifications

Airborne

14

Dimensions L x W x H (in)9.0 x 7.0 x 1.6

14.1

Dimensions L x W xH (mm)228.6 x 177.8 x 40.2

15Weight, max. (Kg.)

16

Connectors

16.1

RF In

SMA Female

16.2

RF OutWaveguide WR90

16.3

Power Supply

16.4

Control

22 to 36

1

50
200

3.5

D-SUB 7W2
Micro-D 15 pin female

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings52

Note
1. Drain switching.

SSPA Model SGN-X3-400
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Dimensions in mm (Inches) Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

Wt: 7.7 Lb. ( 3.5Kg.) approx.

53

SSPA Model SGN-X4-20/50
The Model SGN-X4-50 is part of our Catalog SGN series
Solid State Power Amplifiers (SSPA). The SGN SSPA
series is based on the GaN technology. Utilizing the GaN
technology enables us to provide our customers a lower
cost SSPA, with high efficiency and higher packaging,while maintaining all of the advantages of the SSPA, such
as High Reliability and Power Redundancy.
The application of this series of GaN based SSPA, isto fulfill various requirements of high reliable products
at lower cost. Typical applications of this SSPA are forRadar, Data Links, Communications and Test Systems.

UCT
PROD
R
ING–
E
D
OR
RDER
L
O
A
I
E
C
R
O
SPE
Y BEF
CTOR
A
F
T
NSUL

–­ CO

• GaN Technology• C or X Band
• Band Width: up to 1,000 MHz• Output Power: up to 50W, CW• High Efficiency

SSPA Model SGN-X3-50

54

SSPA Model SGN-X4-20/50
MAIN SPECIFICATIONPARAMETERSPECIFICATION

MODEL

SGN-X4-20

SGN-X4-50*

1Frequency Range (GHz)X Band2

Bandwidth, (9%),

3Output Power, (W)

3.1

Peak Saturated, Typ.

20

50

3.2

Peak Saturated, Min. (W)

16

40

3.3

Average

3.4

Amplitude Flatness, PTP, dB typ.

4

Output Load VSWR

5

Large Signal Gain, min. (dB)

6

Input RF Drive (dBm)

7

Pulse Width8

Input Supply Voltage (V)

8.1

32V, max (A)

2.5

8.0

8.2

12V, max. (A)

1.0

1.0

9

Same as Peak
1
Any Load46

50
0 to 5Up to CW

9DC Power Consumption, max (W)

92

268

10

Efficiency, (%) typ.

25

25

11

Operating Temperature Range (°C)

12

Dimensions L x W x H (inc)3.6 X 3.4 X 0.67

7.25 X 4.75 X 1

12.1

Dimensions L x W xH (mm)91.44 X 86.36 X
17.02

184.15 X 120.65 X
25.4-30 to +70* Special Product, Minimum order applies

55

SSPA Model SGN-K1-07
Kratos’s Ku-band Solid State Power Amplifier (SSPA)
is the lightest, most efficient and compact productfor embedding into airborne and micro-flyaway
SATCOM terminals. The Ku-band SSPA is basedon GaN technology to provide high output power
efficiency with significant reductions in heat sink
and airflow requirements to meet the size, weightand performance requirements for integration into
any flyable or mobile SATCOM terminal. The Kuband SSPA outline can be accommodated to meetcustomer’s specific requirements. Antenna interface
is based on a WR62 to minimize transmission loss.

T
ODUC
R PR
NG–
E
D
R
DERI
O
R
L
O
A
I
E
R
SPEC
BEFO
TORY
C
A
F
ULT
CONS

­–

• GaN Technology• Ku Band• Band Width: 500 MHz• Output Power: 7W, CW• High Efficiency

SSPA Model SGN-K1-07

56

Custom SSPA
Most of the Solid State Power Amplifiers (SSPA) supplied by General Microwave have beencustom designed to meet specific system requirements. These SSPAs have been fully tested andqualified to meet severe environmental requirements. The following examples represent some of
the typical applications of General Microwave’s SSPA product line:a) Airborne RADARSb) Weather RADARSc) RADARS for Home Land Security (HLS)d) Seekers for short range missilese) Test Equipment

Certified and fully qualified forairborne application.

57

Custom SSPA

Certified and fully qualified for
missile application.

Airborne GaN SSPA
TRANSCEIVER

58

Custom SSPA
SPECIAL SSPAs
In addition to the Catalog SSPAs, we are offering the following SSPAs as special catalog products.

Model

SPA-X1-400(1)Frequency Range(GHz)

8.5 to 10.9

13.5 to 17.0

13.5 to 17.0

Bandwidth, max
(MHz)

400

500

500

Peak Saturated
Output Power, min
(W)

400

350

100

Average Output
Power (W)

100

87.5

25

Pulse Width (µs)

0.2 - 60

0.5 – 250

0.5 – 250

25

25

25

PRF (kHz)1 - 600

1 – 600

1 – 600

Input Supply
Voltage (V)22 to 60

22 to 32

22 to 60

Duty Cycle, max (%)

OperatingTemperature Range(°C)
Dimensions,approx. mm(inches)

SPA-KU1-400(1) SPA-KU2-100(1)-40 to +85
280 x 140 x75(11 x 5.5 x 2.9)

280 x 140 x 75 229 x 178 x 30.5
(11 x 5.5 x 2.9)(9 x 7 x 1.2)

(1) Minimum Order Applies

59

Custom - Power Amplifiers
POWER AMPLIFIER FOR COMMUNICATIONFEATURES• Radio Telephone Applications• Band-Width - One Octave• Class AB (Pulse and Amplitude Linearity)

FEATURES• Frequency Range: 1350-2700 MHz• Output power at P1dB: 45dBm• Gain: 44 dB• DC power Consumption: 110W

60

Custom - Power Amplifiers
POWER AMPLIFIER FOR COMJAMFEATURES• Up to 1 kW
• VHF, UHF, L and Cellular frequency bands

POWER AMPLIFIER FOR COMMUNICATIONFEATURES• Frequency Range: 450-530 MHz• Output power at P1dB: 48.5dBm• Gain: 40 dB• DC power Consumption: 80W

61

Custom - Power Amplifiers
POWER AMPLIFIER FOR UAV DATA-LINKFEATURES• VHF, UHF, L and S frequency bands• Option for Integrated Power Supply (MIL-704 and 461)
• Designed For Frequency Hopping• Digital Modulation Input• ALC Power Control• High Efficiency(1) The reader interested in more information on this subject should consult one or more of the following references:“Microwave Semiconductor Engineering”, J.F. White, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company, 1982.
“Microwave Semiconductor Control Devices”, K.E. Mortenson, Microwave Journal, May 1964, pp. 49-57.
“Fundamental Limitations in RF Switching and Phase Shifting Using Semiconductor Diodes”, M.E. Hines, Proceedings of the IEEE, vol. 52,
pp. 697-708.
“Biasing and Driving Considerations for PIN Diode RF Switches and Modulators”, Hewlett-Packard Applications Note 914, Jan. 1967.

62

Solid State Control
Components
The introduction of the PIN diode more than 45 years
ago has led to the development of a large family of
RF and microwave control components, including
switches, attenuators, modulators, and phase shifters
that have become essential elements of most modern
microwave systems. Today, the types of PIN diodes
available to the component designer is quite extensive
and permits a choice of electrical characteristics
such as junction capacitance, minority carrier lifetime,
reverse voltage breakdown, saturation resistance andresistance vs. current law as well as mechanical format
when selecting a diode for a particular application.
While a complete treatment of the PIN diode will
not be presented here, some of the more important
relationships in diode characteristics are described
below.
The unique property of the PIN diode that makes it
particularly suitable for control component use is that,in its useful operating frequency range, it behaves asa current variable resistor in its forward biased state.
Depending upon the diode construction, this resistancecan vary from as low as a few tenths of an ohm when
the diode is fully ON to as high as 10,000 ohms withzero bias current applied. The PIN diode displays thisbehavior because, unlike P-N junction diodes, a thinlayer of Intrinsic material is inserted between heavily
doped layers of P and N material. When DC current
flows through the diode, a stored charge is created in
the I layer which establishes the conductance of thediode. The charge is in the form of holes and electrons
which have a finite recombination time. As long as theperiod of any time-varying current is sufficiently shortcompared to this recombination time, there is effectively
no modulation of the diode conductance and, ignoringparasitic reactances, the diode behaves as a pureresistor.
If we define a transition frequency f0 as

When one uses a PIN diode in the microwave
frequency range, parasitic reactances will have firstorder effects. The most important of these is the diodejunction capacitance which limits the diode impedancein its back biased state. For low frequency diodes inchip format, employing relatively large junction areas,
the junction capacitance is of the order of 0.2 to 1.0
pF. At the other extreme, beam lead diodes exhibit thelowest available junction capacity, ranging from 0.02 to
0.08 pF. For high frequency multi-throw switches, beamlead diodes are frequently employed at the common
junction because of their small physical size and low
junction capacity. Even with a capacitance as low as
0.02 pF, at a frequency of 18 GHz, the diode will havean impedance of only about 450 ohms in its backbiased state due to this reactance. In similar manner,
the intrinsic diode inductance as well as that of theconnecting ribbons have a significant effect upon thefrequency related behavior of the PIN diode.
The diode saturation resistance presents a loss
mechanism in the RF and microwave circuit. This
resistance can vary from a few tenths of an ohm in achip diode, to as high as 5 ohms in a low-capacity
beam lead diode. In general, there is an inverse
relationship between diode junction capacity andsaturation resistance. Therefore, in high frequency
applications, where low capacity is generally requiredfor best isolation and/or impedance match, higher
insertion loss generally arises due to the loss attributed
to the diodes.
In the sections that follow more detailed discussions
are presented of the circuit topologies, design tradeoffs and performance characteristics of GMC’s families
of control components. GMC’s large number of custom
designs, which have evolved from these products,
have not been included because of space limitations.
Consultation with the factory is recommended for suchrequirements.

1
f0 = 2πt ,Where t is the minority carrier lifetime, then forfrequencies significantly below f0 the PIN diode will
behave as a P-N junction, rectifying the applied a-c
signal. For frequencies well above f0 the diode will
behave as a linear resistor. The range of t varies
from as low as 10 nsec to as high as 5 µsec, andcorrespondingly f0 varies from about 16 MHz to 32 kHz.
The degree to which the PIN diode will rectify the a-c
signal and thereby generate harmonic power depends
not only on the minority carrier lifetime but upon theratio of the a-c current to the applied d-c current. In
general, as the applied signal power rises and theoperating frequency decreases, diodes with longminority carrier lifetimes and high bias current are
required for satisfactory operation. Unfortunately, such
diodes exhibit relatively long switching time and low
modulation rates.
63

Attenuators
General Microwave PIN diode attenuators cover thefrequency range from 200 MHz to 40 GHz and areavailable in numerous configurations to permit theuser to optimize system performance. Most designs
are available with either analog or digital control,
operating over octave or multi-octave bands with highor moderate switching speed characteristics.

ATTENUATOR TOPOLOGYGMC PIN diode attenuators are designed with several
different topologies, each of which has been selected
to optimize certain performance characteristics. A brief
discussion of these various topologies is presented
below including a treatment of performance trade-offs.

ARRAY ATTENUATOR
With the addition of terminating diode elements tothe shunt-mounted reflective attenuators of Fig. 1, an
attenuator can be realized with low VSWR that canoperate over an octave band (see Fig. 3). By tapering
the diode and transmission line impedance and adding
multiple transformer sections it is possible to obtain
good VSWR and attenuation characteristics over
several octaves.
GMC employs array attenuators in a number of custom
designs.

SHUNT-MOUNTED REFLECTIVE
ATTENUATOR
The simplest version of a PIN diode attenuator consistsof one or more PIN diodes in shunt with a transmission
line as shown in Fig. 1. This design provides abroadband reflective attenuator that can reach very
high levels of attenuation, depending upon the number
and electrical spacing of the diodes. While it generally
has very low insertion loss and can operate at highswitching rates, its usefulness is limited by the verylarge mismatch it presents in the attenuation state.

T-PAD AND π-PAD ATTENUATORSThe broadest frequency coverage available is obtainedwith some form of T-pad or π-pad attenuator. These
are lumped element circuits which function in the
microwave frequency range in essentially the samemanner as they do at DC. Attenuation variation is
obtained by simultaneously changing the bias currentof the series and shunt diodes comprising the pads
in a manner that assures constant impedance at alllevels. Fig. 4 shows the basic configurations of both
circuits. Only the T-pad configuration is used by GMC
due to the difficulties in realizing sufficiently low strayreactances and short transmission line lengths in π-pad
circuits for operation at higher microwave frequencies.
Models of these attenuators cover the full frequency
range from 0.2 to 18.0 GHz with excellent attenuation
flatness and moderate switching speed.

BALANCED ATTENUATOR
By placing identical shunt-mounted reflective
attenuators between an appropriately connected pair of
3 dB quadrature hybrid couplers, a balanced attenuatoris realized (see Fig. 2). The balanced attenuator has all
the simplicity of the shunt-mounted reflective attenuatorwith the added feature of providing low VSWR under all
conditions of attenuation. In addition, power handlingis improved by 3 dB due to the power split of the
input hybrid. This style of PIN diode attenuator offers
simplicity, up to 3 to 1 bandwidth, moderately fast
speed, and excellent linearity. Balanced attenuators
are available from General Microwave covering thefrequency range of 0.5 to 40.0 GHz.

64

Attenuators

SWITCHED BIT ATTENUATORS
When an attenuator with a fast switching speed andhigh power handling capacity is required, the only
option is to utilize a switched-bit attenuator. Thisattenuator combines one or more tandem pairs of SP2T
switches with a zero loss connection between one pairof outputs and a fixed attenuator inserted in the other(see Fig. 5). In this configuration the PIN diodes are notused as variable resistors, but are switched between
their forward and reversed biased states. This allows
for much faster switching speed since high speed PIN
diodes and drive circuitry can be used. In addition,
it offers higher power handling capacity since the RF
power is absorbed in the fixed attenuator(s), and not in
the PIN diodes.
There are some disadvantages to this approach that
may limit its usefulness. First, the minimum practicalattenuation step size at microwave frequencies isabout 0.5 dB due to interacting VSWR’s as the bits
are switched. These interactions may lead to a nonmonotonic response as the attenuation is changed
in increments of one LSB, i.e., the attenuation level
may actually decrease when an increasing attenuation
step is called for. Second, because of the RF circuit
complexity, the cost of this attenuator is usually higher
than other approaches. Finally, the incorporation of highspeed switches may lead to excess video leakage.

PHASE INVARIANT ATTENUATORSThis specialized class of attenuators has the property
that the insertion phase variation is minimized as theattenuation level is changed. A unique topology is
employed by GMC to obtain this performance which is
described in detail in a separate technical paper.(1) In allother respects they perform in a manner similar to thebalanced attenuators described above.

DRIVER CONSIDERATIONS
All attenuators except for the switched bit variety
are available with linearizing driver circuits witheither analog or digital control inputs. In addition,
many attenuators are available without the driver for
those who choose to provide their own. Most digitalattenuators are available with eight-bit TTL control
which, for an attenuator with a nominal attenuation
range of 60 dB, will provide a resolution of 0.25 dB.
Some attenuators are available with a resolution of as
low as 0.05 dB. Except for switched-bit designs, all PIN
diode attenuators are analog in nature and thus theirresolution is essentially limited by the DAC used in thedriver circuit.
The driver circuit includes compensating elements tominimize the variation of attenuator with temperature.
It also provides the proper source impedance andswitching waveforms to optimize switching speed.
(1) “Broadband Phase Invariant Attenuator”, D. Adler and P. Maritato; 1988 IEEE MTT-S Digest, pp. 673-676.
To obtain a copy of this paper, please write to
SALES, KRATOS GENERAL MICROWAVE65

Attenuators
STROBE/LATCH FEATURE - OPTION 4

POWER HANDLING

lt is recommended that when operating the Series
349/H Attenuators with the Strobe/Latch Option -4
feature, the digital control inputs should be in place,with the Latch set to a low “(0)” level, before theAttenuator is powered up.

The power handling of a PIN diode attenuator isdependent on its topology, biasing levels, andswitching speed. The faster the attenuator, the lower
the power handling capability. This catalog specifies
both the maximum operating and the maximum survival
levels. Maximum operating level is defined as thatwhich will cause an out of specification condition. The
survival levels are generally dependent on the maximum
ratings of the semiconductors in the attenuator. Please
consult the factory for special applications requiring
higher operational power levels than those listed in thiscatalog.

MONOTONICITY
In most applications it is imperative that the attenuator
displays monotonic behavior as a function of thecontrol input. Non-monotonic performance can occur
in switched bit attenuators when interacting VSWR’s
are not properly compensated, or in digitally controlled
analog attenuators when a non-monotonic condition
exists in the MSB of the DAC. All GMC’s attenuators aremonotonic guaranteed.

HARMONICS AND INTERMODULATIONPRODUCTS
All PIN diode control devices (i.e. attenuators,
switches and phase shifters) will generate harmonics
and intermodulation products to some degree since
PIN diodes are non-linear devices. When compared
to digital switched-bit designs, analog PIN diodeattenuators are more prone to generate spurious
signals since the diodes function as current variable
resistors and are typically operated at resistance levels
where significant RF power is absorbed by the diode.
The levels of harmonic and intermodulation products
generated by an attenuator are greatly dependent
upon its design, the operating frequency, attenuation
setting and input power level. Typical performance fora moderately fast attenuator, i.e., 500 nsec switching
speed, follows:

TYPICAL ATTENUATOR INTERCEPTPOINTSFREQUENCY

2nd ORDER
INTERCEPT

3rd ORDER
INTERCEPT

2.0 GHz
8.0 GHz+35 dBm+40 dBm+30 dBm+35 dBm

66

Attenuators
PHASE SHIFT vs. ATTENUATION
All attenuators exhibit a variation in phase shift with attenuation level (AM/PM modulation). Fig. 6 shows typical
phase shift variation as a function of attenuation for a number of GMC attenuator models. The phase shift is
attributable to both the stray reactance of the PIN diodes as well as the lengths of transmission line interconnecting
the diodes. While it is possible to minimize the AM/PM by careful design, it is not possible to eliminate it entirely.
Where minimum change of phase with attenuation is a critical parameter, the use of GMC’s line of Phase Invariant
Attenuators described above should be considered.
Typical Phase vs. Attenuation & Frequency

Frequency (GHz)

MODELS 1952, D1952 & 3492-64

Frequency (GHz)

MODELS 1954, D1954 & 3494-64

Frequency (GHz)

MODELS 1958, D1958 & 3498-64
67

Attenuators
Typical Phase vs. Attenuation & Frequency

Frequency (GHz)

MODELS D1960 & 3460C

Frequency (GHz)

MODELS D1968B, 1761 & 3468C

Frequency (GHz)

MODELS 1959, D1959 & 3499
68

Attenuators
Typical Phase vs. Attenuation & Frequency

MODEL 3482

MODEL 3488

69

Attenuators
DEFINITION OF PARAMETERS

Small Signal Bandwidth: With reference to amodulation frequency of 100 Hz and a modulation
depth of ±3 dB at a quiescent level of −6 dB, thefrequency at which the modulation depth decreases by
50% as measured with a square-law detector.
Large Signal Bandwidth: With reference to amodulation frequency of 100 Hz and a 100%modulation depth at a quiescent level of −6 dB, thefrequency at which the modulation depth decreases by
50% as measured with a square-law detector.
TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT is defined as theaverage rate of change of attenuation over the fulloperating temperature range of the unit under fixedbias conditions. It is expressed in dB/°C. Note that theattenuator temperature coefficient may vary with bothtemperature and programmed attenuation level.

MEAN ATTENUATION is the average of the maximum
and minimum values of the attenuation over the
specified frequency range for a given control signal.
ATTENUATION FLATNESS is the variation from themean attenuation level over the specified frequency
range. This is usually a function of the attenuation level,
and is expressed in ± dB.
ATTENUATION ACCURACY is the maximum deviationof the mean attenuation from the programmed
attenuation value expressed in dB when measured at +23 ± 5°C.
TOTAL ACCURACY is the sum of all the effects which
contribute to the deviation from the programmed
attenuation value. It includes the effects of attenuation
accuracy, frequency variation and temperature, as
shown in Fig. 7

SWITCHING SPEED(2)The following are the standard definitions of switching
speed, as shown in Fig. 8:
Rise Time is the transition time between the 10% and
90% points of the square-law detected RF power when
the unit is switched from full OFF to full ON.
Fall Time is the transition between the 90% and 10%
points of the square-law detected RF power when theunit is switched from full ON to full OFF.
On Time is the transition time between 50% of the
input control signal to the 90% point of the square-law
detected RF power when the unit is switched from full
OFF to full ON.
Off Time is the transition time between 50% of the
input control signal to the 10% point of the square-law
detected RF power when the unit is switched from full
ON to full OFF.
Note: D epending on the attenuator topology,
there are differences in the behavior of theswitching characteristics that may affect system
performance. Switching speed is only specified
to the 90% or 10% points of the detected RF
signal, but the time the attenuator takes to reach
final attenuation value or switch between different
attenuation levels may be significantly longer.

(2) For units without integrated drivers, the specifications apply toconditions when the attenuator is driven by an appropriately
shaped switching waveform.

MODULATION BANDWIDTH

70

Attenuator
Selection Guide
ATTENUATORS AND MODULATORSFREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)
0.2

0.5

1.0

0.5

1

2.0

4.0

8.0

12.4

18

40

ATTENUATIONRANGE (dB)

MODEL

PAGE

COMMENTSCONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE, CURRENT CONTROLLED, ABSORPTIVE ATTENUATORS
1

80
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
50

2
2

4

2.6

5.2
4

8
5

10
6

12
8

18
18

40

1950A
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1958
1959

76

Single control

327

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE, VOLTAGE CONTROLLED, LINEARIZED ABSORPTIVE ATTENUATORS
0.5

60
60
60
60
80
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
50

4

0.5

8
2

8

2
0.5

18

1
1

2
2

4
2.6

5.2
4

8
5

10
6

12
8

18
18

40

D1960B
D1961B
D1962B
D1968B
D1950A
D1951
D1952
D1953
D1954
D1955
D1956
D1958
D1959

84

Integrated driverand RF section
80

329

VOLTAGE CONTROLLED, PHASE INVARIANT, LINEARIZED ATTENUATORS
2

32
32
32

6
4

11
6

18

D1972
D1974
D1978

87

Integrated driverand RF section

73

Integrated driverand RF section

HIGH SPEED ABSORPTIVE PULSE MODULATORS
0.2

80

18

71

F192A

Attenuator
Selection Guide (Cont.)
ATTENUATORS AND MODULATORS (cont.)
FREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)
0.2

0.5

1.0

2.0

4.0

8.0

12.4

18

ATTENUATION
40 RANGE (dB)

MIN
STEP
SIZE (dB)

MODEL

PAGE

COMMENTSDIGITALLY PROGRAMMABLE ABSORPTIVE ATTENUATORS, ULTRA-BROADBAND
0.2

60

18

1

3250A

90

Integrated driverand RF section

DIGITALLY PROGRAMMABLE ABSORPTIVE ATTENUATORS, MULTI-OCTAVE BAND
0.5

60
60
60
60

4

0.5

8
2

8

2

18

0.06
0.06
0.06
0.06

3460C
3461C
3462C
3468C

93

Integrated driverand RF section

DIGITALLY PROGRAMMABLE, PHASE INVARIANT ATTENUATORS, MULTI-OCTAVE BAND
2

32
32
32

6
4

11
6

18

0.125
0.125
0.125

3472
3474
3478

96

Integrated driverand RF section

DIGITALLY PROGRAMMABLE MINIATURIZED, ABSORPTIVE ATTENUATORS, OCTAVE BAND
2

60
60
60
60
60

4

2.6

5.2
4

8
6

12
8

18

0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25

3482, 3482H
3483, 3483H
3484, 3484H
3486, 3486H
3488, 3488H

99

Integrated driverand RF section

120

Integrated driverand RF section

MINIATURE, DIGITALLY CONTROLLED, PIN DIODE ATTENUATORS
2

60

18

0.5

1761

DIGITALLY PROGRAMMABLE ABSORPTIVE ATTENUATORS, OCTAVE BAND
1

80
80
80
80
80
80
64
50

2
2

4

2.6

5.2
4

8
5

10
6

12
8

18
18

40

72

0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03

3491, 3491H
3492, 3492H
3493, 3493H
3494, 3494H
3495, 3495H
3496, 3496H
3498, 3498H
3499

104

331

Integrated driverand RF sectionModel F192A Non-Reflective
Ultra-Broadband High-Speed Pulse Modulator• High speed• 0.2 to 18 GHz frequency range• 80 dB isolation• Low VSWR and insertion loss
• Small size, light weight

The Model F192A is a high-speed non-reflective PIN
diode pulse modulator with integrated driver. Operatingover the instantaneous frequency range from 0.2 to 18
GHz, it provides a minimum isolation of 80 dB from 0.5
to 18 GHz, and 70 dB below 0.5 GHz. The RF design
consists of an arrangement of shunt and series diodes
in a microstrip integrated circuit transmission line asshown in the schematic diagram below.

Pulse Modulator Model F192A

The currents required to switch the unit ON or OFF andsimultaneously maintain a bilateral 50-ohm impedance
match in both states are provided by the integrated
driver, which is controlled by an external logic signal.

73

Model F192A
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

CHARACTERISTICMin Isolation (dB)Max Insertion Loss (dB)
VSWR (ON and OFF)

0.2
to
0.5
70
2.0
1.5

0.5
to
2.0
80
2.0
1.5

FREQUENCY (GHz)
2.0
8.0
to
to
8.0
12.4
80
80
2.5
3.0
1.75
2.0

12.4
to
18.0
80
3.5
2.0

Control Characteristics
Control Input
	 Impedance............ TTL, advanced Schottky, oneunit load. (A unit load is 0.6 mA
sink current and 20 µA source
current).
Control Logic............ Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V) for
switch ON and logic “1” (+2.0
to +5.0V) for switch OFF.

Switching Speed
Rise Time.................. 10 nsec. max.
Fall Time.................... 10 nsec. max.
ON Time.................... 30 nsec. max.
OFF Time.................. 15 nsec. max.
Power Handling Capability
	Without Performance
Degradation.......... 500 mW cw or peak
Survival Power.......... 1W average, 10W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)Power Supply Requirements	+5V ±5%, 90 mA–12V ±5%, 75 mA

74Model F192A
Specifications
OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTALRATINGSAVAILABLE OPTIONS

Operating Temperature
Range.......................... ­–55° to +110°C
Non-Operating Temperature
Range.......................... –65° to +125°C
Humidity......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock.............................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06" double
amplitude or 15G, whicheveris less)
Altitude........................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, 5 cycles

Option No.	  Description
3
SMA female control connectors
7
Two SMA male RF connectors
9	Inverse control logic; logic “1” for switch
ON and logic “0” for switch OFF
10	One SMA male (J1) and one SMA female(J2) RF connector
33
EMI filter solder-type control terminal48	+5, –15V operation
64A
SMB male control connector
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

MODEL F192A
Wt: 0/7 oz (20 gr.) approx.

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX±.02; .XXX ±.008

75Series 195 Octave-BandPIN Diode Attenuator/Modulators
SERIES 195
Series 195 current-controlled attenuator/modulators
provide small size with greater than octave-bandwidth
performance at low cost. All models except the 1950A*
provide a minimum of 60 dB of attenuation with falltimes of 20 nsec max, and rise times ranging from 25
nsec for the 1951 and 1952 to 125 nsec max for the1956 and 1958. The 1950A* provides a minimum of 80
dB of attenuation with a fall time of 50 nsec max and arise time of 250 nsec max. These characteristics makethis series suitable for a wide range of applications
including level setting, complex amplitude modulation,pulse modulation and high-speed switching. The eightmodels in the Series 195 encompass a frequency range
from 0.5 to 18 GHz. All models except the 1950A* arecapable of extended bandwidth operation, typically 3:1,
with only moderate degradation in performance at theband edges.
As shown in figures 1 and 2 below, the RF circuit
employed in all models except the Model 1950A* uses
two shunt arrays of PIN diodes and two quadrature
hybrid couplers. The quadrature hybrids are of a unique
GMC microstrip design which are integrated with thediode arrays to yield a minimal package size. The RF
circuit employed in the Model 1950A* uses one shuntarray of PIN diodes with input and output impedance
matching circuits.

• Absorptive• Current controlled• 0.5 to 18 GHz frequency range• High performance MIC
quadrature hybrid design• High speed

Attenuator Model 1958

Attenuator Model 1952

Fig. 1–Models 1951-1958, RF schematic diagram.

Attenuator Model 1954

Fig. 2–Model 1950A*, RF schematic diagram.

*Model 1950A is a special-order product. Consult factory before ordering.

76Series 195
SpecificationsMAX.
FREQUENCY INSERTION
RANGE
LOSS
MODEL
(GHz)
(dB)
0.5 – 1.0
1.4
1950A*
1.0 – 2.0
1.3
1951
1.4
0.75 – 2.25 (1)2.0 – 4.0
1.5
1952
1.5 – 4.5 (1)
1.6
2.6 – 5.2
1.7
1953
1.95 – 5.85 (1)1.8
4.0 – 8.0
2.0
1954
(1)
3.0 – 9.0
2.1
5.0 – 10.0
2.2
1955
3.75 – 11.25 (1)
2.3
6.0 – 12.0
2.3
1956
(1)
4.5 – 13.5
2.4
8.0 – 18.0
2.5(2)
1958
6.0 – 18.0 (1)2.5(2)

MAX. FLATNESS (±dB)
AT MEAN ATTENUATION LEVELS UP TO

MAX.
VSWR
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.6
2.1
1.7
2.2
1.7
2.2
1.8
2.2
1.8(2)
1.8(2)

10 dB
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.7
0.7
0.9
0.7
0.9

20 dB
0.8
0.8
1.4
0.8
1.4
0.8
1.4
0.8
1.4
0.9
1.4
1.0
1.5
1.0
1.5

40 dB
1.7
1.5
3.0
1.5
3.0
1.5
3.0
1.5
3.0
1.5
3.0
1.5
3.0
1.5
3.0

60 dB
2.2
1.6
3.5
1.6
3.5
1.6
3.5
1.6
3.5
1.6
3.5
1.6
3.5
1.6
3.5

80 dB
3.2

(1) Specifications for the extended frequency ranges are typical.
(2) Except from 16-18 GHz where insertion loss is 3.5 dB max and VSWR is 2.0 max.

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Switching Speed
Fall Time
		1950A*....................... 50 nsec max(3)		All other units............ 20 nsec max(3)Rise Time
		1950A*....................... 250 nsec max(3)		All other units............ 125 nsec max(3)Bias Current for Maximum Attenuation
		1950A*....................... 5 to 35 mA		All other units............ 15 to 70 mA

Mean Attenuation Range
1950A*.............................. 80 dB
All other units................... 60 dB
Monotonicity......................... Guaranteed
Phase Shift........................... See page 67
Temperature Effects........... See Fig. 3Power Handling Capability
Without Performance Degradation
		1950A*, 1951............. 10 mW cw or peak		All other units............ 100 mW cw or peak
Survival Power (from........–65° to +125°C;
see Fig. 4 for higher temperatures)
		All units..................... 1 W average,
25W peak (1 µsec max
pulse width)(3) For attenuation steps of 10 dB or more.

*Model 1950A is a special-order product. Consult factory before ordering.

Fig. 4-Series 195 power derating factor

77Series 195
Specifications

Fig 3–Series 195, typical effects of temperature on attenuation

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGSAVAILABLE OPTIONS

Operating Temperature
Range..................................­–54°C to +110°C
Non-Operating
Temperature Range..........–65° to +125°C
Humidity.................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at
95%)
Shock......................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
213B, Cond. B (75G, 6
msec)
Vibration.................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06"double amplitude or 15G,
whichever is less)Altitude...................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling........................MIL-STD-202F, Method
107D, Cond. A, 5 cycles

Option No.	  Description
3
SMA female bias connector
7
Two SMA male RF connectors
10	One SMA male (J1) and one SMA female(J2) RF connector
64	SMC male bias connector
64A
SMB male bias connector
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

78

Series 195
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX±.02; .XXX ±.008

79Series D195 Octave-BandPIN Diode Attenuator/Modulators
SERIES D195
The Series D195 voltage-controlled linearized
attenuator/modulators are integrated assemblies
consisting of a Series 195 unit and a hybridized drivercircuit which provides a nominal transfer function of 10dB per volt. (See figure 1 below.)• Absorptive• Linearized• Frequency range: 0.5 to 18 GHz• High performance MIC quadrature
hybrid design• High speed

Attenuator Model D1955

All of the Series D195 units except the D1950A* exhibit
fall times of 20 nsec max and rise times of 1.5 µsec
max for attenuation steps of 10 dB or more. For smaller
excursions, the fall times can increase to several
hundred nsec, while the rise times remain essentiallyunchanged. In applications where a rapid return toinsertion loss from any level of attenuation is required,
Option 59 is available. With this option, an external
pulse is applied to trigger a high-speed reset circuit,and recovery times of 200 nsec max are obtained.
Where use of an external reset pulse as describedabove is not feasible, an internal reset option (Option58) is available which will automatically reset the unit
to insertion loss within 200 nsec for a step of 50 dB or
more.
The fall and rise time specifications for the D1950A* are
500 nsec max and 10 µsec max, respectively. Options
58 and 59 are not available for this model.

Attenuator Model D1954

Attenuator Model D1958
ALL UNITS
IN THIS SERIESARE EQUIPPEDWITH INTEGRATED DRIVERS*Model D1950A is a special-order product. Consult factory before
ordering.

80Series D195
SpecificationsMAX.
FREQUENCY INSERTION
RANGE
LOSS
MODEL
(GHz)
(dB)
D1950A*
0.5 – 1.0
1.5
1.0 – 2.0
1.7
D1951
0.75 – 2.25 (1)1.8
2.0 – 4.0
2.0
D1952
(1)
2.1
1.5 – 4.5
2.6 – 5.2
2.2
D1953
1.95 – 5.85 (1)2.3
4.0 – 8.0
2.6
D1954
3.0 – 9.0 (1)2.7
5.0 – 10.0
2.8
D1955
3.75 – 11.25 (1)
2.9
6.0 – 12.0
2.9
D1956
3.0
4.5 – 13.5 (1)8.0 – 18.0
3.0 (2)D1958
6.0 – 18.0 (1)3.0 (2)MAX. FLATNESS (±dB)
AT MEAN ATTENUATION LEVELS UP TO

MAX.
VSWR

10 dB

20 dB

40 dB

60 dB

80 dB

2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.6
2.1
1.7
2.2
1.7
2.2
1.8
2.2
1.8 (2)
1.8 (2)

0.3
0.3
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.7
0.7
0.9
0.7
0.9

0.8
0.8
1.4
0.8
1.4
0.8
1.4
0.8
1.4
0.9
1.4
1.0
1.5
1.0
1.5

1.7
1.5
3.0
1.5
3.0
1.5
3.0
1.5
3.0
1.5
3.0
1.5
3.0
1.5
3.0

3.0
1.6
3.5
1.6
3.5
1.8
3.5
1.6
3.5
1.6
3.5
1.6
3.5
1.6
3.5

3.6

(1) Specifications for the extended frequency ranges are typical.
(2) Except from 16-18 Ghz where insertion loss is 4.0 dB max and VSWR is 2.0 max.

ON Time	 D1950A*........................... 10 µsec max
	  All other units................... 1.6 µsec max
Fall Time	 D1950A*........................... 500 nsec max
	  All other units................... 30 nsec max
Rise Time	 D1950A*........................... 10 µsec max
	  All other units................... 1.5 µsec max
Nominal Control Voltage Characteristics
Range
Operating
Maximum	  D1950A*
0 to +8V±15V
	  All other units
0 to +6V±15V
Transfer Function................. 10 dB/volt
Input Impedance................. 10 kW
Modulation Bandwidth	  Small Signal
	  D1950A*....................... 25 kHz
	   All other units............... 500 kHz
	  Large Signal
	  D1950A*....................... 5 kHz
	   All other units............... 50 kHz
Power Supply
Requirements...................... +12V ±5%, 100 mA–12V ±5%, 50 mA
Power Supply
Rejection.............................. Less than 0.1 dB/voltchange in either supply

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Mean Attenuation Range
D1950A*............................... 80 dB
All other units....................... 60 dB
Accuracy of Attenuation
0-30 dB................................ ±0.5 dB>30 to 50 dB........................ ±1.0 dB>50 to 60 dB........................ ±1.5 dB>60 to 80 dB........................ ±2.0 dB(D1950A* only)
Monotonicity............................. Guaranteed
Phase Shift............................... See page 67
Temperature Coefficient........ ±0.025 dB/°CPower Handling Capability
Without Performance Degradation
	  D1950A*, D1951.............. 10 mW cw or peak
	  All other units................... 100 mW cw or peak	Survival Power (from ..........–65°C to +25°C;
see figure 2 for higher temperatures)	  All Units............................ 1W average
25W peak (1 µsec max
pulse width)
Switching Characteristics
OFF Time
	 D1950A*........................... 600 nsec max
	  All other units................... 100 nsec max*Model 1950A is a special-order product. Consult factory before ordering.

81Series D195
Specifications
OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGSAVAILABLE OPTIONS

Operating Temperature
Range..........................­–54° to +110°C
Non-Operating Temperature
Range..........................–65° to +125°C
Humidity............................MIL-STD-202F, Method
103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at
95%)
Shock.................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
213B, Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration............................MIL-STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06" double
amplitude or 15G, whicheveris less)
Altitude..............................MIL-STD-202F, Method
105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling...................MIL-STD-202F, Method
107D, Cond. A, 5 cycles

Option No.	  Description
3
SMA female control connector
7
Two SMA male RF connectors
10	One SMA male (J1) and one SMA female(J2) RF connector
58	Internally-generated reset to insertion
loss (not available on D1950A)(1)
59	Externally-triggered reset to insertion loss
(not available on D1950A)(2) (3)61	20 dB/volt transfer function with0 to +3V control signal input(+4V for the D1950A*)
62±15 volt operation
64	SMC male control connector
64A
SMB male control connector
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant(1) Where use of an Option 59 external reset pulse (see note 2 below) is not feasible, this option is available which will automaticallysense the slope and magnitude of the control signal and reset the unit to the insertion loss state within 200 nsec for a step of 50
dB or more.
(2) An external terminal is provided for the user to apply a fast (10 nsec max rise time) positive-going 3-volt pulse at least 0.5 µsec
wide to accelerate the return of the attenuator to the insertion loss state with the simultaneous lowering of the control signal to
the zero voltage level. This reset can be accomplished within 200 nsec.
(3) The input impedance of units equipped with Option 59 is a circuit equivalent to approximately 50 pF in series with a parallel
combination of 100 pF and 1000 ohms.

% OF
RATING100

AT +25oC

40

-65oC

+25oC

+110oCTEMPERATURE

Fig. 2-Series D195, power derating factor*Model D1950A is a special-order product. Consult factory before ordering.

82Series D195
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTSMODEL

DIM “A”

D1950AD1951.70 (17,8).50 (12,7)

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

83D196 Series Multi-Octave
PIN Diode Attenuators
The D196 Series is a family of Non-reflective voltage
variable 60 dB PIN Diode Attenuators covering thefrequency range from 0.5 GHz to 18 GHz in four
overlapping multi-octave bands.
Each model in the Series is equipped with an integrated
driver which controls the attenuation level at the rate of
10 dB/volt.
The RF circuit consists of two wide-band, T-pad
attenuator sections connected in tandem. The drivercircuit, which consists of a voltage-to-current converterand linearizing network, furnishes the proper series
and shunt currents to control the attenuation value atthe specified rate while simultaneously maintaining abilateral match. See figs. 1 and 2.

• Frequency range: 0.5 GHz-18 GHz
in four overlapping bands• Attenuation range: 60 dB• Linear control: 10 dB/volt• Low insertion loss
• Non-reflective

Attenuator Model D1968B

All units in thisseries are equippedwith integrated drivers

84

D196 SeriesSpecifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL
D1960B*

MODEL
D1961B

MODEL
D1962B*

MODEL
D1968B

Frequency Range (GHz)

0.5-4

0.5-8

2-8

2-18

Mean Attenuation Range (dB)

60

60

60

60

Insertion Loss (dB) (max)2.7

2.5 (0.5-4 GHz)
3.2 (4-8 GHz)

3..2

4.5

VSWR (max)

1.8

1.8

1.8

2.0

± 0.5 dB
± 0.75 dB± 1.0 dB

± 0.75 dB± 1.0 dB
± 1.5 dB

± 0.75 dB± 1.0 dB
± 1.5 dB

± 1.0 dB
± 1.25 dB± 3.0 dB

CHARACTERISTIC

Flatness Up to 2
 0 dB
40 dB
60 dB

Nominal Control Voltage Characteristics
Range
	 Operating......................... 0 to +6V
	 Maximum......................... ±15V
Transfer Function................. 10 dB/volt
Input Impedance................. 10 kW
Modulation Bandwidth	  Small Signal..................... 20 kHz
	  Large Signal..................... 5 kHz
Power Supply
Requirements.................... +12V ±5%, 80 mA–12V ±5%, 50 mA
Power Supply
Rejection............................ Less than 0.1 dB/voltchange in either
supplyMean Attenuation Range....... 60 dB
Accuracy of Attenuation
0-20 dB................................ ±1.0 dB
20 to 40 dB.......................... ±1.5 dB
40 to 60 dB.......................... ±2.0 dB
Monotonicity...........................Guaranteed
Phase Shift..............................See page 68
Temperature Coefficient........±0.02 dB/°CPower Handling Capability
Without Performance Degradation
	  All Units............................ Up to 50 mW cw or
peak (see Fig. 3)
	Survival Power	  All Units............................ 2 W average or peak,from –65°C to +25°C(see Fig. 4 for higher
temperatures)
Switching Characteristics
ON Time............................... 1.0 µsec max
OFF Time............................. 0.5 µsec max% OF
RATING

100o

AT +25 C
40

-65oC

+25oC

TEMPERATURE

Fig. 3- Series D196, maximum peak and average
operating power without performance degradation

Fig. 4- power derating factor*Special-order product. Consult factory before ordering.

85+110oCSeries D196
Specifications
OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS

3
SMA female control connectors
7
Two SMA male RF connectors
10	One SMA male (J1) and one SMA female(J2) RF connector
33
EMI filter solder-type control terminal61	20 dB/volt transfer function with 0 to +3V
control signal input
62±15V Operation
64A
SMB male control connector
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

Operating Temperature
Range.............................­–54°C to +110°C
Non-Operating
Temperature Range.....–65°C to +125°C
Humidity............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock.................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
213B, Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration............................MIL-STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06" double
amplitude or 15G, whicheveris less)
Altitude..............................MIL-STD-202F, Method
105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling...................MIL-STD-202F, Method
107D, Cond. A, 5 cycles

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

86Series D197 Voltage Controlled
Phase Invariant Attenuators
The Series D197 voltage controlled PIN diodeattenuators offer essentially phase free operation overa wide dynamic range in multi-octave frequency bands
between 2 and 18 GHz. The attenuators utilize a unique
double balanced arrangement of diodes and quadrature
couplers to achieve the phase independent attenuation
characteristic. Excellent temperature stability is
maintained by employing a self-compensating biasing
scheme. See Fig. 1.

• Low phase shift• Frequency range: 2-18 GHz• Non-reflective• Attenuator range: to 45 dB• Linearized control: 10 dB/V
• High Speed

UCT
–
PROD
R
E
RING
D
L OR
ORDE
A
I
E
C
R
E
FO
SP
RY BE
ACTO
F
T
L
ONSU

­–C

Attenuator Model D1972

TYPICAL PERFORMANCE

87

Series D197
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL
Frequency Range (GHz)

D1972

D1974

D1978

2-6

4-11

6-18

32 dB

Mean Attenuation Range
4 dB

Insertion Loss (Max)

5 dB
2.0

VSWR (Max)
Accuracy of Attenuation
Amplitude Flatness

3.0± 0.5 dB

0 to 20 dB> 20 to 32 dB± 0.4 dB
± 0.6 dB

± 0.4 dB
± 0.8 dB

0 to 20 dB> 20 to 32 dB

± 4°
± 8°

± 4°
± 8°

Control Voltage

0-3.2 V

Control Input Impedance

10 kW

Transfer Function

10 dB/VOn Time, Off Time

250 nsec

Temperature Coefficient± 0.8 dB(1)± 1.3 dB(1)Guaranteed

Monotonicity
Phase Shift

7 dB.01 dB/°C.03 dB/°C

0 - 20 dB> 20 - 32 dB

Max. RF Power Input (Operating)

100 mW

Max. RF Power Input (Survival)

0.5 W

Harmonic Distortion @ Pin = +10 dBm

± 5°
± 10°

– 40 dBc– 50 dBc– 50 dBc+15V ± 5% @ 200 mA– 15V ± 5% @ 120 mA

Power Supply Requirements

SPECIFICATIONS WITH EXTENDED RANGE OPTION (OPTION 45)
Mean Attenuation Range
Accuracy of Attenuation

45 dB± 1.0 dB
± 2.0 dB
± 3.5 dB

0-20 dB> 20-32 dB> 32 dB

Amplitude Flatness

0 to 20 dB> 20 to 32 dB> 32 dB± 0.4 dB
± 0.6 dB
± 1.5 dB

± 0.4 dB
± 0.8 dB
± 1.5 dB

± 0.8 dB(1)± 1.3 dB(1)± 2.0 dB

Phase Variation

0 to 20 dB> 20 to 32 dB> 32 dB

± 4°
± 8°
± 15°

± 4°
± 8°
± 20°

± 5°
± 10°
± 30°

(1) Except from 8-18 GHz, flatness is ±0.5 dB up to 20 dB, ±1.0 dB up to 32 dB.

88

Series D197
Specifications
OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature
Range..................................­–54° to +110°C
Non-Operating
Temperature Range..........–65° to +125°C
Humidity.................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at
95%)
Shock......................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
213B, Cond. B (75G, 6
msec)
Vibration.................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06"double amplitude or 15G,
whichever is less)Altitude...................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling........................MIL-STD-202F, Method
107D, Cond. A, 5 cycles

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
7
Two SMA male RF connectors
10	One SMA male (J1) and one SMA female(J2) RF connector
45
Extended attenuation range to 45 dB
65	±12V operation
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

MODEL

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

D1972

2.5 (63,5)

2.26 (57,4)

2.28 (57,9)0.22 (5,6)

0.91 (23,1)

1.25 (31,7)

1.5 (38,1)

1.7 (43,2)D1974

2.0 (50,8)

1.76 (44,7)

2.43 (61,7)

0.18 (4,6)

0.66 (16,8)

1.0 (25,4)

1.25 (31,7)

1.45 (36,8)D1978

2.0 (50,8)

1.76 (44,7)

2.58 (65,5)0.18 (4,6)

0.66 (16,8)

1.0 (25,4)

1.25 (31,7)

1.50 (38,1)

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

89Model 3250A Ultra-Broadband
6 Bit Digital PIN Diode Attenuator
The Model 3250A digitally programmable attenuator
provides excellent performance characteristics over thefrequency range of 0.2 to 18 GHz. Attenuation levels up
to 60 dB are programmable in increments of 1 dB.
The unit is an integrated assembly of a dual T-pad PIN
diode attenuator and a driver consisting of a D/A andan I/V Converter. See figures 1 and 2.
The Model 3250A operates as a bilaterally-matcheddevice at all attenuation levels. It is supplied in acompact rugged package.

• Frequency range: 0.2 to 18 GHz• Attenuation range: Up to 60 dB• 6 Bit Binary or BCD programming• Absorptive• Guaranteed Monotonicity

Attenuator Model 3250A

90

Model 3250A
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency Range..................... 0.2 to 18 GHz
Mean Attenuation Range
0.2 to 18 GHz........................ 60 dB
Insertion Loss (max.)
0.2 to 8 GHz.......................... 3.5 dB>8 to 12.4 GHz...................... 4.0 dB>12.4 to 18 GHz.................... 5.0 dB
VSWR (max.)
0.2 to 8 GHz.......................... 1.75
>8 to 18 GHz......................... 2.0
Accuracy of Attenuation
0 to 30 dB............................. ±0.5 dB>30 to 50 dB......................... ±0.75 dB>50 to 60 dB......................... ±1.5 dB
Flatness of Attenuation
0 to 30 dB............................. ±1.0 dB>30 to 40 dB......................... ±1.5 dB>40 to 50 dB......................... ±2.0 dB>50 to 60 dB......................... ±3.0 dB
Temperature Coefficient......... 0.02 dB/°C max

Power Handling Capability
Without Performance
Degradation.......................... Up to 50 mW cw or
peak (see Figure 3)
Survival Power...................... 2W average or peak	(from –65°C to +25°C; see
Figure 4 for higher temperatures)
Switching Time.......................... 2 µsec max.
Programming............................. Positive true binary
standard or BCD(Option 1). For
complementary code,
specify Option 2.
Minimum Attenuation Step..... 1.0 dB
Logic Input
Logic “0” (Bit Off).................. –0.3 to +0.8 V@500 µA max
Logic “1” (Bit On)................. +2.0 to +5.0 V@100 µA max
Power Supply
Requirements....................... +5V ±5%, 250 mA+15V ±5%, 75 mA–15V ±5%, 75 mARATINGAT +250C
40






100
% OF



  

-65oC





 

+25oC+110oCTEMPERATURE

  

Fig. 3-Model 3250A, maximum peak and average
operating power without performance degradation

91

Fig. 4-Model 3250A, survival power
derating factor

Model 3250A
Specifications
OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature
Range...........................­–54°C to +110°C
Non-Operating Temperature
Range...........................–65°C to +125°C
Humidity..........................MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock...............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration..........................MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D,
Cond. B (.06" double amplitude
or 15G, whichever is less)Altitude............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling.................MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, 5 cycles

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description1	BDC programming(Binary is standard)2	Complementary programming(positive true is standard)
7
Two SMA male RF connectors
10	One SMA male (J1) and one SMA female(J2) RF connector
5002*
8-Bit Resolution, 1 µsec switching time
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant*Special order product. Consult factory before ordering.
In addition, consult factory for impact on
specifications; i.e., VSWR and insertion loss andavailability.

ACCESSORY FURNISHED
Mating power/logic connector

PIN FUNCTIONSPIN NO.

BINARYBCD (Opt. 1)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

SPARE
SPARE
+ 5V
DIGITAL &POWER GND
GND
GND
1 dB
2 dB
4 dB
8 dB
16 dB
32 dB

13
14
15

+ 15V
– 15V
SPARE

SPARE
SPARE
+ 5V
DIGITAL &POWER GND
1 dB
2 dB
4 dB
8 dB
10 dB
20 dB
40 dB
OPEN (NOCONNECTION)
+ 15V
– 15V
SPARE

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

92346C Series Multi-Octave
10 Bit Digital PIN Diode Attenuators
The 346C Series is a family of Non-reflective PIN diodeattenuators, each programmable to 60 dB in attenuation
steps as low as 0.06 dB, and covering the frequency
range from 0.5 GHz to 18 GHz in four overlapping multioctave bands.
Each model in the Series comprises of an integrated
assembly of a dual (current-controlled) PIN diodeattenuator, and a driver circuit consisting of a D/Aconverter and a voltage-to-current converter (see Figure
1 below).
The RF circuit consists of two wide-band, T-pad
attenuator sections in tandem. The levels of series andshunt currents required to maintain a bilateral match at
all attenuation levels are provided by the driver.
This arrangement assures monotonicity over theoperating band at all levels of attenuation and for any
programmed attenuation step.

• Frequency range: 0.5 GHz-18GHz
in four overlapping ranges• Attenuation range: 60 dB• Programming: 10-Bit binary• LSB: 0.06 dB• Monotonicity: guaranteed

Attenuator Model 3460C

93

Series 346C
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
CHARACTERISTIC
Frequency Range (GHz)
Mean Attenuation Range (dB)
Insertion Loss (dB) (max)

MODEL
3460C*
0.5-4
60

MODEL
3461C
0.5-8
60

MODEL
3462C*
2-8
60

MODEL
3468C
2-18
60

2.5

2.5 (0.5-4 GHz)
3.2 (4-8 GHz)

3.2

4.5

1.8
± 0.75 dB± 1.0 dB
± 1.5 dB

1.8
± 0.75 dB± 1.0 dB
± 1.5 dB

2.0
± 1.0 dB
± 1.25 dB± 3.0 dB

VSWR (max)1.8± 0.5 dB
Flatness up to 20 dB± 0.75 dB
40 dB± 1.0 dB
60 dB
*Special-order product. Consult factory before ordering.
Accuracy of Attenuation
0-20 dB................................ ±1.0 dB
20-40 dB.............................. ±1.5 dB
40-60 dB.............................. ±2.0 dB
Monotonicity............................. Guaranteed
Phase Shift............................... See Page 68
Temperature Coefficient........ ±0.02 dB/°CPower Handling Capability
Without Performance
Degradation......................... Up to 50 mW cw or peak(see figure 3)
Survival Power.....................  	2 W averageor peak, from
–65°C to +25°C(see figure
4 for higher
temperatures)
Switching TimeON Time............................... 1.0 µsec. max.
OFF Time............................. 0.5 µsec. max.
Programming............................ Positive true binary. For
complementary code,
specify Option 2. To
interface with other logic
families, please contact
factory.

Minimum Attenuation Step.... 0.06 dB(1)Logic Input
Logic “0” (Bit OFF).............. –0.3 to +0.8 V
Logic “1” (Bit ON)................ +2.0 to +5.0 V
Input Current....................... 10 µA max.
Nominal Control Voltage Characteristics
Range................................... 0 to 3 mA
Transfer Function................. 20 dB/mA
Input Impedance................. 3 kW
Power Supply
Requirements.................... +12V ±5% , 90 mA–12V ±5%, 60 mA
Power Supply
Rejection............................ Less than 0.1 dB/voltchange in either supply(1) The Series 346C attenuators are 10-bit digital attenuators. In order
to use this device with a lesser number of bits (lower resolution),
the user may simply ground the logic pins for the lowest orderunused bits. For example, a Series 346C unit operated as an 8-bit
unit would have Pin 15 and Pin 3 connected to ground. All otherparameters remain unchanged.

100
% OF
RATINGAT +250C
40-65oC

Fig. 2- Series 346C, maximum peak and average
operating power without performance degradation+25oC+110oCTEMPERATURE

Fig. 3-Model 346C, survival power derating factor

94

Series 346C
Specifications
OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGSAVAILABLE OPTIONS

Operating Temperature
Range..................................­–54°C to +110°C
Non-Operating
Temperature Range..........–65°C to +125°C
Humidity.................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at
95%)
Shock......................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
213B, Cond. B (75G, 6
msec)
Vibration.................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06"double amplitude or 15G,
whichever is less)Altitude...................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling........................MIL-STD-202F, Method
107D, Cond. A, 5 cycles

Option No.	  Description
2	Complementary programming(logic “0” is bit on)
7
Two SMA male RF connectors
10	One SMA male (J1) and one SMA female(J2) RF connector
62±15 Volt operation
C38
30 dB attenuation range. Consult
factory for impact on specifications.
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant
G12
1 to 18 GHz operation. I.L. 4.8 dB max.
(model 3468C)

ACCESSORY FURNISHED
Mating power/logic connector

PIN

J3 PIN FUNCTIONS (1) (4)1
2GND (Note 2)
ANALOG INPUT(Note 3)0.13 dB
GND
0.25 dB
0.5 dB
1 dB
2 dB
4 dB
8 dB
16 dB
32 dB (MSB)+V–V
0.06 dB (LSB)

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

(1) All unused logic inputs must be grounded.
(2) For normal programming control Pin 1 must be groundedor at logic “0”. Application of logic “1” to Pin 1 overrides thedigital input and sets the unit to insertion loss. For units withcomplementary programming (Option 2), the application of a logic“1” to Pin 1 sets the unit to high isolation (60 dB or greater).
(3) Pin 2 is available to (a) monitor the D/A converter output, (b)apply a modulation signal from a current source, or (c) apply
an independent analog signal for turn-on, turn-off or vernierattenuation levels. If not used as described in (a), (b) or (c), Pin 2
must be open.
(4) The Series 346C attenuators are 10-bit digital attenuators. In order
to use this device with a lesser number of bits (lower resolution),
the user may simply ground the logic pins for the lowest orderunused bits. For example, a Series 346C unit operated as an 8-bit
unit would have Pin 15 and Pin 3 connected to ground. All otherparameters remain unchanged.

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX±.02; .XXX ±.008

95Series 347, 8 Bit Digital
Phase Invariant Attenuators
The Series 347 digitally controlled PIN diodeattenuators offer essentially phase free operation overa wide dynamic range in multi-octave frequency bands
between 2 and 18 GHz. The attenuators utilize a unique
double balanced arrangement of diodes and quadrature
couplers to achieve the phase independent attenuation
characteristic. Excellent temperature stability is
maintained by employing a self-compensating biasing
scheme. See Fig. 1.

• Low phase shift• Frequency range: 2-18 GHz• Non-reflective• Attenuator range: to 45 dB• LSB 0.125 dB• High Speed

UCT
PROD
R
ING–
E
ORD
RDER
L
O
A
I
E
C
R
SPE
BEFO
TORY
C
A
F
T
NSUL

­–CO

Attenuator Model 3474

TYPICAL PERFORMANCE

96

Series 347
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL

3472

3474

3478

Frequency Range (GHz)

2-6

4-11

6-18

32 dB

Mean Attenuation Range
4 dB

Insertion Loss (Max)

5 dB
2.0

VSWR (Max)

0 to 20 dB> 20 to 32 dB± 0.4 dB
± 0.6 dB

± 0.4 dB
± 0.8 dB

± 0.8 dB(1)± 1.3 dB(1)Guaranteed

Monotonicity
Phase Shift

3.0± 0.5 dB

Accuracy of Attenuation
Amplitude Flatness

7 dB

0 to 20 dB> 20 to 32 dB

± 4°
± 8°

± 4°
± 8°

ON Time, OFF Time

350 nsec

Temperature Coefficient.02 dB/°C

Max. RF Power Input (Operating)

100 mW

Max. RF Power Input (Survival)

0.5 W

Harmonic Distortion @ Pin = +10 dBm– 40 dBc– 50 dBc

± 5°
± 10°

– 50 dBc

8 bit TTL, 0.125 dB LSB

Control
Control Input Impedance@ Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8 V), 500 µA max.
@ Logic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0 V), 100 µA max.

Logic Input

Logic “0” = Bit OFF; Logic “1” = Bit ON+5V ± 5% @ 325 mA+15V ± 5% @ 15 mA–15V ± 5% @ 70 mA

Power Supply Requirements

SPECIFICATIONS WITH EXTENDED RANGE OPTION (OPTION 45)
Mean Attenuation Range

45 dB

Accuracy of Attenuation± 1.0 dB

Amplitude Flatness

0 to 20 dB> 20 to 32 dB> 32 dB± 0.4 dB
± 0.6 dB
± 1.5 dB

± 0.4 dB
± 0.8 dB
± 1.5 dB

± 0.8 dB(1)± 1.3 dB(1)± 2.0 dB

Phase Variation

0 to 20 dB> 20 to 32 dB> 32 dB

± 4°
± 8°
± 15°

± 4°
± 8°
± 20°

± 5°
± 10°
± 30°

Control

8 bit TTL, 0.176 dB LSB(1) Except from 8-18 GHz, flatness is ±0.5 dB up to 20 dB, ±1.0 dB up to 32 dB.

97

Series 347
Specifications
OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGSAVAILABLE OPTIONS

Operating Temperature
Range..................................­–54°C to +110°C
Non-Operating
Temperature Range..........–65°C to +125°C
Humidity.................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at
95%)
Shock......................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
213B, Cond. B (75G, 6
msec)
Vibration.................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06"double amplitude or 15G,
whichever is less)Altitude...................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling........................MIL-STD-202F, Method
107D, Cond. A, 5 cycles

Option No.	  Description
7
Two SMA male RF connectors
10	One SMA male (J1) and one SMA female(J2) RF connector
45	Extended attenuation range to 45 dB
65±12V operation
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

PIN NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

J3 PIN FUNCTIONSBINARYOPTION 45
–15V
–15V
+15V
+15V
Do NotConnect
0.125 dB
(LSB)
0.5 dB
4 dB
16 dB (MSB)
8 dB
GROUNDNOT USED
2 dB
0.25 sB
1 dB
NOT USED+5V

Do NotConnect

ACCESSORY FURNISHED
Mating power/logic connector

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT.38 (9, 7) FOR SMA FEMALE (TYP).50 (12, 7) FOR SMA MALE (TYP)

0.18 dB
0.70 dB
5.62 dB
22.5 dB
11.25 dB
GROUNDNOT USED
2.81 dB
0.35 dB
1.41 dBNOT USED
+5V

MODEL

A

3472

2.5 (63,5)

3474
3478

B

C

D

E

2.26 (57,4) 2.28 (57,9)0.22 (5,6)

1.25 (31,7)

2.0 (50,8)

1.76 (44,7) 2.43 (61,7)

0.18 (4,6)

1.0 (25,4)

2.0 (50,8)

1.76 (44,7) 2.58 (65,5)0.18 (4,6)

1.0 (25,4)

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

98Series 348 and 348H
8 Bit Digital/Analog Attenuators
Series 348 and 348H

• 2 to 18 GHz

The Series 348 and 348H Digitally Programmable
Attenuators provide greater than octave band
performance in small hermetic packages ideally suitedfor high reliability applications. The Series 348 offers
moderate power handling capability (100 mW) at
switching speeds less than 500 nsec while the 348H
Series offers 200 nsec switching speed at lower power.
Attenuation of all units is 60 dB with monotonic 0.25 dB
step resolution.
The attenuator is an integrated assembly of a sealed
RF Microwave Integrated Circuit assembly and a sealed
hybrid driver. Attenuation is controlled via a miniature 14
pin connector. See Fig. 1.
Although these units are primarily intended for use as
digital attenuators, they can also be used as analog(voltage driven) attenuators or as combination analog/
digital attenuators.

• Digital/Analog• 8 Bit TTL• Hermetically sealed• Miniature

Attenuator Model 3484

% OF
RATING 100

AT +25oC

40
-65oC

+25oC
TEMPERATURE

99+110oCSeries 348 and 348H
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSMODELFREQUENCY
RANGE
(GHz)

MAX. INSERTION
LOSS
(dB)

MAX.
VSWR

2.0-4.0
1.8
1.5
1.5-4.5 (1)
1.9
2.0
2.6-5.2
2.0
1.63483*/H*
1.95-5.85 (1)
2.1
2.1
4.0-8.0
2.4
1.73484/H
(1)
2.5
2.2
3.0-9.0
6.0-12.0
2.7
1.8
3486/H(1)
4.5-13.5
2.8
2.2
8.0-18.0
3.0 (2)
1.8 (3)3488/H
6.0-18.0 (1)3.0 (2)
1.8 (3)*Special-order product. Consult factory before ordering.

3482/H*FLATNESS (±dB)
AT MEAN ATTENUATION LEVELS
UP TO
10 dB

20 dB

40 dB

60 dB

0.5
0.7
0.5
0.7
0.5
0.7
0.7
0.9
0.7
0.9

1.0
1.6
1.0
1.6
1.0
1.6
1.0
1.6
1.0
1.6

1.5
3.0
1.5
3.0
1.5
3.0
1.5
3.0
1.5
3.0

1.6
3.5
1.6
3.5
1.6
3.5
1.6
3.5
1.6
3.5

(1) Specifications for the extended frequency ranges are typical.
(2) For 3488, 4.0 dB from 16-18 GHz. For 3488H, 3.5 dB from 12-16 GHz and 4.0 dB from 16-18 GHz.
(3) VSWR is 2.0 from 16-18 GHz.

Mean Attenuation Range....... 60 dB
Accuracy of Attenuation
0-30 dB................................ ±0.5 dB>30-50 dB............................ ±1.0 dB>50-60 dB............................ ±1.5 dB
Monotonicity............................. Guaranteed
Phase Shift............................... See page 69
Temperature Coefficient........ ±0.02 dB/°CPower Handling Capability
	Without Performance
Degradation ...................(348) 100 mW cw or
peak (348H) 10 mW cw
or peak
Survival Power	(from –65°C to +25°C.
See Figure 3 forHigher Temperatures).......... 1W average, 25W peak
Switching Time......................... (348) 500 nsec max(348H) 200 nsec max
Programming: 8 Bit TTL......... Positive true binary
Minimum Attenuation Step.... 0.25 dB
Logic Input
Logic “0” ............................. 0.3 to +0.8 V
Logic “1”.............................. +2.0 to +5.0 V
Logic Input Current............. 10 µA max
Analog Input Characteristics(4)Range.................................. 0 to 6VTransfer Function................. 10 dB/V
Input Resistance................. 6 kWPower Supply
Requirements.................... +12 to +15V, 120 mA–12 to –15V, 50 mA

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature  Range ........................–54°C to +110°C
Non-Operating Temperature  Range ........................–65°C to +125°C

ACCESSORY FURNISHED
Mating power/logic connector

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
7
Two SMA male RF connectors
10	One SMA male (J1) and one SMA female(J2) RF connector
49	High Rel screening
G09
G12

100

Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
RoHS Compliant

Series 348 and 348H
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTSERIES 348/H
wt: 2.4 oz. (68 gr) approx.
Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008
J3 POWER/LOGIC CONNECTIONSPINFUNCTIONS

A
B
C
D
E
F
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R

Digital/Power GND
Logic Control (Note 2)–12 to –15V
0.25 dB (LSB)
0.5 dB
1 dB
4 dB
2 dB
16 dB
32 dB (MSB)+12 to +15V
8 dB
GND
Analog Input (Notes 3&4)

NOTES:
1. All unused logic inputs must be grounded.
2. For normal TTL programming control, PIN B must be grounded or at Logic 0.
Application of Logic 1 to PIN B overrides the digital input and sets the unit toinsertion loss. To interface with other logic families (e.g., CMOS, MTL, NMOS,etc.) contact factory.
3. If Analog input is not to be used, then connect PIN R to PIN P.
4. To use the unit as a voltage controlled attenuator, apply a control voltageof 0 to +6V at PIN R. The slope of attenuation will be nominally 10 dB/V.
For a non-zero source resistance (RO) of up to 500 ohms, the attenuation
error is approximately –.0017 • RO • VIN dB and the slope will decrease byapproximately 0.17 dB/V per 100 ohms of source resistance.
   Using the 348/H Series attenuator as both a digital and analog control
attenuator, the total attenuation ATT = 10 • VIN + programmed digitalattenuation. The maximum attainable mean attenuation is 60 dB.

101

Model 1761 Multi-Octave Digitally Controlled
Miniature PIN Diode Attenuator
Model 1761 is a miniaturized, digitally controlled PIN
diode attenuator covering the instantaneous frequency
range of 2 GHz to 18 GHz. This model, measuring only
1.34” square and 0.5” thick, provides a monotonic
attenuation range of 60 dB with 7-bit (0.5 dB LSB)
resolution and 1 microsecond switching speed.
The Model 1761 is an integrated assembly of a dual PIN
diode attenuator and a driver circuit consisting of a D/Aconverter and voltage-to-current converter. The unit isfully temperature compensated. The RF circuit consistsof two wide band, T-pad attenuator sections in tandem.
The levels of series and shunt currents required tomaintain bilateral match at all frequencies is provided
by the driver. This arrangement assures monotonicity
over the full 2 to 18 GHz operating band at all levels of
attenuation and for any programmed attenuation step.
The Model 1761 weighs approximately 1.5 oz. It is
configured with SMA female RF connectors and amultipin connector for logic and power. The unit ispowered by ±12 to 15V DC and the logic input is TTL
compatible.

• Miniature• 2 to 18 GHz• 7 Bit TTL• Hermetically sealed

Attenuator Model 1761

102

Model 1761
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

Power Supply
Requirements.................... +12 to +15V, 100 mA–12 to –15V, 100 mA
Power Supply
Rejection............................ Less than 0.1 dB/voltchange in either supply

Frequency Range.................... 2 to 18 GHz
Mean Attenuation Range....... 60 dB
Insertion Loss, max................ 4.5 dB
VSWR, max.
2.0:1
Flatness
Up to 20 dB......................... ±1.0 dB
Up to 40 dB......................... ±1.25 dB
Up to 60 dB......................... ±3.0 dB
Accuracy of Attenuation
0 to 20 dB............................ ±1.0 dB
20 to 40 dB.......................... ±1.5 dB
40 to 60 dB.......................... ±2.0 dB
Monotonicity............................. Guaranteed
Temperature Coefficient........ ±0.02 dB/°C
Phase Shift............................... See page 68
Power Handling Capability
	Without Performance	 Degradation..................... Up to 50 mW cw orpeak	Survival Power..................... 2 W average or peakfrom –65°C to +25°C;
derate linearly to 800mW at 110°C
Switching Speed
50% TTL to 90% RF............ 1.0 µsec
Programming............................ 7-Bit TTL Binary
Minimum Attenuation Step.... 0.5 dB
Logic Input
Logic “0” (Bit OFF).............. –0.3 to +0.8 V
Logic “1” (Bit ON)................ +2.0 to +5.0 V
Input Current....................... 10 µA max.

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature
Range.......................... ­–54°C to +110°C
Non-Operating Temperature
Range.......................... –65°C to +125°C
Humidity......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock.............................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D,
Cond. B (.06” double amplitude or
15G, whichever is less)Altitude........................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, 5 cycles

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

ACCESSORY FURNISHED
Mating power/logic connector

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT7<3    ;    

;60$)(0$/(

    
-

-



 

-

02817,1*685)$&(

  
648$5(

 

     

3,1$   

-$&.62&.(7MODEL 1761
Wt: 1.5 oz. (42.5 gr.) approx.

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

103

PIN
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R

PIN Function
FUNCTIONGND
LSB 0.5 dB
+V
N.C.
1dB
–V
N.C.
4 dB
2 dB
N.C.
16 dB
8 dB
GND
32 dB

Series 349 and 349H Octave-Band
11 Bit Digital PIN Diode Attenuators
The Series 349 and 349H programmable attenuators
provide greater than octave-band performance andwide programming flexibility in compact rugged
packages. Attenuation ranges up to 80 dB are available
with attenuation increments as low as 0.03 dB.
Each Series 349 and 349H unit is an integrated
assembly of a balanced PIN diode attenuator and adriver circuit consisting of a PROM, a D/A converter
and a current-to-voltage converter. See Figure 1. This
arrangement provides a high degree of accuracy andrepeatability and preserves the inherent monotonicity of
the attenuator.

• Absorptive• 64 or 80 dB range• .03 dB resolution• Binary or BCD programming• Guaranteed monotonicity• Frequency range: 0.75 to 18 GHz

SERIES 349
The maximum programmable attenuation range inevery band except the 8.0–18.0 GHz frequency range
is 80 dB. Attenuators limited in range to 64 dB exhibit
switching times less than 500 nsec while the 80 dB
units switch in less than 2 µsec.
SERIES 349H
If even faster switching of 64 dB units is required,
GMC offers its Series 349H attenuators. These units
switch in less than 300 nsec with essentially the same
performance specifications as the 64 dB Series 349
units.
All the attenuators are available with either a strobe/
latch or a non-linear current or voltage controlledattenuation capability. Refer to the Available Options
table and the Notes following the Pin Functions table.

Attenuator Model 3498

104

Series 349 and 349H
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS: SERIES 349
MODEL
3491-643491-803492-643492-803493-643493-803494-643494-803495-643495-803496-643496-803498-64

MAX.
INSERTION
LOSS (dB)

MAX.
VSWR

1.6

1.5

MAX. FLATNESS (±dB)
AT MEAN ATTENUATION LEVELS
UP TO
10 dB
20 dB
40 dB
60 dB(4) 80 dB(1)
0.3
0.8
1.5
1.6
1.9

1.7

2.0

0.5

1.4

3.0

3.5

3.8

2.0-4.0
1.5-4.5(2)2.6-5.2

1.8
1.9
2.0

1.5
2.0
1.6

0.3
0.5
0.3

0.8
1.4
0.8

1.5
3.0
1.5

1.6
3.5
1.6

1.9
3.8
1.9

1.95-5.85(2)

2.1

2.1

0.5

1.4

3.0

3.5

3.8

4.0-8.0

2.4

1.7

0.3

0.8

1.5

1.6

1.9

3.0-9.0(2)

2.5

2.2

0.5

1.4

3.0

3.5

3.8

5.0-10.0

2.6

1.7

0.5

0.9

1.5

1.6

1.9

3.75-11.25(2)

2.7

2.2

0.7

1.4

3.0

3.5

3.8

6.0-12.0

2.7

1.8

0.7

1.0

1.5

1.6

1.9

4.5-13.5(2)

2.8

2.2

0.9

1.5

3.0

3.5

3.8

8.0-18.0

3.0(3)

1.8(3)

0.7

1.0

1.5

1.6

—

6.0-18.0(2)3.0(3)

1.8(3)

0.9

1.5

3.0

3.5

—

FREQUENCY
RANGE
GHz
1.0-2.0
0.75-2.25(2)

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS: SERIES 349H
MODEL

3491H-64
3492H-64
3493H-64
3494H-64
3495H-64
3496H-64
3498H-64

FREQUENCY
RANGE
GHz
1.0-2.0
0.75-2.25(2)

2.0-4.0
1.5-4.5(2)

2.6-5.2
1.95-5.85(2)

4.0-8.0
3.0-9.0(2)

5.0-10.0
3.75-11.25
6.0-12.0
4.5-13.5(2)

8.0-18.0
6.0-18.0(2)

MAX.
INSERTION
LOSS (dB)

MAX.
VSWR

1.6

1.5

MAX. FLATNESS (±dB)
AT MEAN ATTENUATION LEVELS
UP TO
10 dB
20 dB
40 dB
60 dB(4)
0.5
1.0
1.5
1.6

1.7

2.0

0.7

1.6

3.0

3.5

1.8

1.5

0.5

1.0

1.5

1.6

1.9

2.0

0.7

1.6

3.0

3.5

2.0

1.6

0.5

1.0

1.5

1.6

2.1

2.1

0.7

1.6

3.0

3.5

2.4

1.7

0.5

1.0

1.5

1.6

2.5

2.2

0.7

1.6

3.0

3.5

2.6

1.7

0.7

1.0

1.5

1.6

2.7

2.2

0.9

1.6

3.0

3.5

2.7

1.8

0.7

1.0

1.5

1.6

2.8
3.0

(2)

2.2
(3)

3.0

(3)

0.9

1.6

3.0

3.5

1.8

(3)

0.7

1.0

1.5

1.6

1.8

(3)

0.9

1.6

3.0

3.5

(1) Applicable only to 80 dB versions.
(2) Specifications for the extended frequency ranges are typical.
(3) Except from 16-18 GHz where insertion loss is 4.2 dB max. and VSWR is 2.2.
(4) Flatness specification at 64 dB level is ±0.2 dB higher than at 60 dB.

105

Series 349 and 349H
Specifications(5) The Series 349 attenuators are 11-bit digital attenuators. In order to use this device with a lesser number of bits (lower
resolution), the user may simply ground the logic pins for the lowest order unused bits. For example, a Series 349 unit operated
as an 8-bit unit would have Pin 15, Pin 1 and Pin 2 connected to ground. All other parameters remain unchanged.
(6) Switching speed for analog input is 100 µsec. typical. With Option G06 it is not
greater than with digital input.
(7) For average attenuation of 80 dB the analog voltage is in the range of 4 to 8 V.
(8) For average attenuation of 80 dB the analog voltage is in the range of 6 to 10 V.

Mean Attenuation Range
349(x)-64, 349(x)H-64.................. 64 dB
349(x)-80...................................... 80 dB
Accuracy of Attenuation
	  0-30 dB...................................... ±0.5 dB>30-50 dB.................................... ±1.0 dB>50-64 dB.................................... ±1.5 dB>64-80 dB.................................... ±2.0 dB
Monotonicity..................................... Guaranteed
Phase Shift ...................................See page 67

Logic Input
Logic “0” (Bit OFF)...................... –0.3 to +0.8 V
Logic “1” (Bit ON)........................ +2.0 to +5.0 V
Logic Input Sink Current............. 0.3 mA max.
Logic Input Source Current........ 3 µA max.
Analog Input (6)349(x)-64, 349(x)H-64.................. 0 to 6.4 V (7)349(x)-80...................................... 0 to 8 V (8)Input Resistance......................... 10k ±20% W
Power Supply
Requirements............................ +12 to +15V, 120 mA–12 to –15V, 50 mA
Power Supply
Rejection.................................... Less than 0.1 dB/voltchange in either supply

Temperature Coefficient................ ±0.025 dB/°CPower Handling Capability
Without Performance Degradation
		3491, 3492H thru 3498H...... 10 mW cw or peak		3491H.................................... 1 mW cw or peak		All other units........................ 100 mW cw or peak	Survival Power (from –40°C to +25°C;
see figure 2 for higher temperatures)
		All units................................. 1 W average 25 W
peak (1 µsec max
pulse width)
Switching Time349(x)H-64................................... 300 nsec max.
349(x)-64...................................... 550 nsec max.
349(x)-80...................................... 2 µsec max
Programming.................................... Positive true binary(standard) or BCD(Option 1). For
complementarycode, specify
Option 2.
(5)
Minimum Attenuation Step
Binary Units		349(x)-64, 349(x)H-64........... 0.03 dB
		349(x)-80............................... 0.04 dB
BCD Units.................................... 0.10 dB

106

Series 349 and 349H
Specifications
OPTION (G09)ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature
Range..................................­–40°C to +85°C
Non-Operating
Temperature Range..........–54°C to +100°C
Humidity.................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at
95%)
Shock......................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
213B, Cond. B (75G, 6
msec)
Vibration.................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06"double amplitude or 15G,
whichever is less)Altitude...................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling........................MIL-STD-202F, Method
107D, Cond. A, 5 cycles

ACCESSORIES FURNISHED
Mating power/logic connector

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description1	BDC programming (Binary is standard)2	Complementary programming(logic “0” is Bit ON)
4	Strobe latch for data input. Attenuator
responds to data input when logic “0” isapplied. Attenuator latched to data input
when logic “1” is applied - See fig. 3
G06
Switching speed for analog input is nolonger than with a digital input.
7
Two SMA male RF connectors
10	One SMA male RF connector (J1) and one
SMA female RF connector (J2)
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

107

Fig. 3 - Timing DiagramSeries 349 and 349H
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

108Series 349 and 349H
Specifications

MODEL

DIM “A”

DIM “B”

DIM “C”

DIM “D”

DIM “E”

DIM “F”

3491,
3491H

.58
(14,7).42(10,7)

2.56 ± .03(65,0).56(14,2)

1.53(38,9).34(8,6)

3492, 93,3492H, 93H

.30
(7,6)

.14
(3,6)

2.00 ± .03(50,8).50(12,7)

1.29(32,8).34(8,6)

3494, 95, 96
3494H, 95H, 96H

.30
(7,6)

.14
(3,6)

2.00 ± .03(50,8).75(19,1)

1.19(30,2)

.34
(8,6)

3498,
3498H

.30
(7,6)

.14
(3,6)

2.00 ± .03(50,8).75(19,1)

1.00(25.4)

.34
(8,6)

PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

J3 PIN FUNCTIONS(1)BINARY
64 dB
80 dB

BCD

0.06 dB
0.08 dB
0.2 dB
0.13 dB
0.16 dB
0.4 dB
Analog Input / Strobe Latch(2)(3)(4)GND
0.25 dB
0.31 dB
0.8 dB
0.5dB
0.63 dB
1 dB
1 dB
1.25 dB
2 dB
2 dB
2.5 dB
4 dB
4 dB
5 dB
8 dB
8 dB
10 dB
10 dB
16 dB
20 dB
20 dB
32 dB
40 dB
40 dB
+12 to +15V
–12 to –15V
0.03 dB
0.04 dB
0.1 dB

NOTES
1. The Series 349 attenuators are 11-bit digital attenuators. In order to use this device with a lesser number of bits (lower
resolution), the user may simply ground the logic pins for the lowest order unused bits. For example, a Series 349
unit operated as an 8-bit unit would have Pin 15, Pin 1 and Pin 2 connected to ground. All other parameters remainunchanged.
2. Normally supplied as an Analog input. Leave pin open if analog input is not used. Optionally available as a strobe latch
function for input data.
3. Pin 3 is available to apply a current or voltage to control the attenuator in a non-linear fashion.
4. lt is recommended that when operating the Series 349/H Attenuators with the Strobe/Latch Option -4 feature, thedigital control inputs should be in place, with the Latch set to a low “(0)” level, before the Attenuator is powered up.

109

Switched-Bit Attenuators
Digitally-Controlled Switched-Bit
Attenuators• 100 Hz to 18 Hz

When broadband, ultra-fast-switching performance isneeded, the digitally-controlled switched-bit attenuatoris the only solution. It excels in attenuation accuracy andflatness over broad frequency ranges, and its switching
speed is equivalent to a high-speed PIN diode switch (25nsec or better). Its only disadvantages are higher insertion
loss and higher cost.
As stated earlier, attenuators are designed to matchthe requirements of specific applications. When theapplication requires fast switching speed (as in electronic
warfare systems, for example), the switched-bit attenuatoris the optimum choice (figure 1). It employs one or morepairs of SP2T switches, with a low-loss connection
between one pair of outputs, and a fixed attenuator
between the other outputs. The diodes are switchedbetween their forward-biased and reverse-biased states,
which gives the attenuator higher switching speed..

• 100 •Hz
to 18 GHz Guaranteed
Monotonicity• Monotonicity
Guaranteed• High Attenuation
Range (up to 81 dB)• High• High
Attenuation
Speed Range (up to 81 dB)• High Speed

Figure 1 - One Bit

Figure 1
Switch Bit Attenuator

110Switched Bit Attenuators
Selection Guide
SWITCHED BIT ATTENUATORSFREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)
0.1

0.5

1.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

18

40

ATTENUATIONRANGE (dB)MODEL

No. of BITSPAGE

DIGITALLY CONTROLLED SWITCHED BIT ATTENUATORS
0.1  

63.5

1

SA-011-7-05

7
112

0.1

1

63.75

SA-011-8-025

8

2

6

25

SA-26-1-25

1

2

6

15

SA-26-2-5

2

2

6

7

SA-26-3-1

3

2

6

63

SA-26-6-1

6

2

6

81

SA-26-7-1

7

2

6

6.5

SA-26-8-0.25

8

2
3

6

18

63.75

SA-618-2-5

2

6

18

7.0

SA-618-3-1

3

6

18

63

SA-618-6-1

6

18

25

SA-218-1-25

131

SA-335-5-1-60

5

3.5

113

114

115

116

OPTION G09 - ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Operating Temperature-54ºC to 95ºC

Storage Temperature-65ºC to 125ºC

Humidity

Per MIL-STD 202F, Method 103B, Cond. B (96 Hours at 95% R.H)

Shock

Per MIL-STD 202F, Method 213B, Cond. C (75g/6mSec)

Altitude

Per MIL-STD 202F, Method 105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)

Vibration

Per MIL-STD 202F, Method 204D, Cond. B(06’ double amplitude or 15G - which ever is less)

Thermal ShockPer MIL-STD 202F, Method 107D, Cond. A (5Cycles)

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings111

Series SA-011 Switched-Bit Attenuators
100-1000 MHz Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
SA-011-7- 05

SA-011-8- 025

Frequency Range, min (MHz)100-1000 (1)100-1000 (1)Attenuation Range, min (dB)

63.5 (2)63.75 (2)Insertion Loss, max (dB)

6.0

6.0

VSWR, max

1.4:1

1.8:1

Number of Bits

7

8

LSB, max (dB)

0.5

0.25

Monotonicity

Guaranteed

Guaranteed± 0.125 dB @0.5 dB± 2% @1 to 63.5 dB± 0.125 dB @0.5 dB± 2% @1 to 63.5 dB

Attenuation Flatness, max (dB)

± 1.5

± 1.5

Power Handling, max (dBm)20

20

Switching Time, max (nsec)

20

500

Switch Rate, max (MHz)

0.5

0.5

Control Logic‘1’ = I.Loss‘0’ = Att.

‘1’ = I.Loss‘0’ = Att.

Control Input

TRUE TTL GATETRUE TTL GATEPower Supply Requirements+5V ± 2% @ 400 mA+5V ± 2% @ 450 mA

Environmental Conditions

See page 111

See page 109

DC 2-11

DC 18

MODEL

Accuracy of Attenuation

Package TypeNOTES
1. Performance can be optimized for a narrower bandwidth
2. Attenuation range can be customized.

PIN FUNCTIONSPINDesignations

SA-011-7- 05

SA-011-8-025

E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
+V
G

0.5 dB
1.0 dB
2.0 dB
4.0 dB
8.0 dB
16.0 dB
32.0 dB+ 5V
GND

0.25 dB
0.5 dB
1.0 dB
2.0 dB
4.0 dB
8.0 dB
16.0 dB
32.0 dB+ 5V
GND

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings112

Series SA-26 Switched-Bit Attenuators
2-6 GHz Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL

SA-26-1-25

SA-26-2-5

SA-26-3-1

Frequency Range, min (GHz)

2-6 (1)

2-6 (1)

2-6 (1)

Attenuation Range, min (dB)

25 (2)

15 (2)

7 (2)Insertion Loss, max (dB)

2.0

2.5

3.2

VSWR, max

1.8:1

1.8:1

1.8:1

Number of Bits

1

2

3

LSB, (dB)

25

5

1

Guaranteed

Monotonicity
Accuracy of Mean
Attenuation, max (dB)

± 0.5

±3

±3

± 1.0 dB

± 0.3 @ 0 dB to 10 dB± 0.9 @ >10 dB to 15 dB± 0.3

Power Handling, max (dBm)

+ 23

+ 23

+ 23

Switching Time, max (nsec)

30

30

30

Switch Rate, max (MHz)

4.0

4.0

4.0

Attenuation Flatness, max (dB)Control Logic‘1’ = I.Loss‘0’ = Att.

Control Input

True TTL Gate

Power Supply Requirements+5V ± 2% @ 60 mA-12V ± 2% @ 60 mA+5V ± 2% @ 110 mA-12V ± 2% @ 75 mA
See page 111

Environmental Conditions
Package Type+5V ± 2% @ 180 mA-12V ± 2% @ 130 mA

DC 11

NOTES
1. Performance can be optimized for a narrower bandwidth
2. Attenuation range can be customized.

DC 12

DC 13

PIN FUNCTIONS
PIN
SA-26-2-5
SA-26-1-25
Designations
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
+V
-V
G

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings

113

25 dB
+ 5V
- 12V
GND

5 dB
10 dB
+ 5V
- 12V
GND

SA-26-3-1
1 dB
2 dB
4 dB
+ 5V
- 12V
GND

Series SA-26 Switched-Bit Attenuators
2-6 GHz Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL

SA-26-6-1

SA-26-7-1

SA-26-8-0.25

Frequency Range, min (GHz)

2-6 (1)

2-6 (1)

2-6 (1)

Attenuation Range, min (dB)

63 (2)

81 (2)

63.75 (2)Insertion Loss, max (dB)

5.0

5.5

6.5

VSWR, max

2.0:1

2.0:1

2.0:1

Number of Bits

6

7

8

LSB, max (dB)

1

1

0.25

Guaranteed

Monotonicity
Accuracy of Mean
Attenuation, max (dB)

± 0.5 @ 0dB to 15 dB± 0.5 @ 0dB to 21dB
± 0.75 @>15dB to 31dB ± 1.0 @ >21dB to 41dB
± 1.0 > 31dB to 63 dB ± 1.5 @ >41dB to 81dB

± 0.5 @ 0dB to 21dB
± 1.0 @ >21dB to 41dB
± 1.5 @ >41 to 63.75dB

Attenuation Flatness, max(dB)± 0.5 @ 0dB to 15dB
± 0.5 @ 0dB to 21dB
± 0.5 @ 0dB to 21dB
± 0.75 @ >15dB to 32dB ± 0.75 @ >21dB to 41dB ± 0.75 @ >21dB to 41dB
± 1.0 @ >32dB to 63 dB ± 1.25 @ >41dB to 81dB ± 1.25 @ >41 to 63.75dB

Power Handling, max (dBm)

+ 23

+ 23

+ 23

Switching Time, max (nsec)

30

100

100

Switch Rate, max (MHz)

4.0

4.0

4.0

‘1’ = I.Loss‘0’ = Att.

‘1’ = I.Loss‘0’ = Att.

‘1’ = I.Loss‘0’ = Att.

Control Logic

TRUE TTL GATE

Control Input
Power Supply Requirements+5V ± 2% @ 300 mA+5V ± 2% @ 450 mA

See page 111

Environmental Conditions
Package Type+5V ± 2% @ 400 mA

DC 2

NOTES
1. Performance can be optimized for a narrower bandwidth
2. Attenuation range can be customized.

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings

DC 17

DC 18

PIN FUNCTIONS
PIN
SA-26-6-1
Designations
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
+V
-V
G

114

1 dB
2 dB
4 dB
8 dB
16 dB
32 dB
+ 5V
GND

SA-26-7-1

SA-26-8-0.25

1 dB
2 dB
4 dB
8 dB
10 dB
20 dB
40 dB
+ 5V
GND

0.25 dB
0.5 dB
1.0 dB
2.0 dB
4.0 dB
8.0 dB
16.0 dB
32.0 dB+ 5V
GND

Series SA-618 Switched-Bit Attenuators
6-18 GHz Specification
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL

SA-618-2-5

SA-618-3-1

SA-618-6-1

Frequency Range, min (GHz)

6-18 (1)

6-18 (1)

6-18 (1)Attenuation Range, min (dB)

15.0 (2)7.0 (2)63 (2)

Insertion Loss, max (dB)

4.5

6.5

13

VSWR, max

2.0:1

2.0:1

2.0:1

Number of Bits

2

3

6

LSB, max (dB)

5

1

1

Guaranteed

Monotonicity
Accuracy of Mean
Attenuation, max (dB)
Attenuation Flatness, max (dB)

± 1.0

± 0.5

± 0.6 @ 0dB to 15dB
± 1.0 @ >15dB to 32dB
± 1.5 @ >32dB to 63dB

± 0.6 @ 5 dB
± 1.0 @ 10 dB± 1.5 @ 15 dB± 0.75± 1.5Power Handling, max (dBm)+ 23

Switching Time, max (nsec)

30

Rise and Fall Time, max (nsec)

20

Switching Rate, max (MHz)4.0

Control Logic‘1’ = I.Loss‘0’ = Att.

Control Input

True TTL Gate

Power Supply Requirements+5V ± 2% @ 110 mA-12V ± 2% @ 75 mA

DC 12

Package TypeDC 13

PIN FUNCTIONS

E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
+V
-V
G

5 dB
10 dB
+ 5V
- 12V
GND

+5V ± 2% @ 450 mA-12V ± 2% @ 250 mA

See page 111

Environmental Conditions

PIN
SA- 618-2-5
Designations+5V ±2% @ 200 mA-12V ± 5% @ 150 mASA- 618-3-1 SA- 618-6-1
1 dB
2 dB
4 dB
+ 5V
- 12V
GND

1 dB
2 dB
4 dB
8 dB
16 dB
32 dB
+ 5V
- 12V
GND

DC 22

NOTES
1. Performance can be optimized for a narrower bandwidth
2. Attenuation range can be customized.

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings

115

Series SA-218 Switched-Bit Attenuators
2-18 GHz Specification
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL

SA-218-1-25

Frequency Range, min (GHz)

2-18 (1)Attenuation Range, min )dB)

25 (2)

Insertion Loss, max (dB)

2.6

VSWR, max

2.0:1

Number of Bits

1

LSB, max (dB)25

Monotonicity

Guaranteed

Accuracy of Mean Attenuation, max (dB)

± 0.5

Attenuation Flatness, max (dB)

± 1.5

Power Handling, max (dBm)+ 23

Switching Time, max (nsec)

30

Rise and Fall Time, max (nsec)

20

Switching Rate, max (MHz)4.0

Control Logic‘1’ = I.Loss‘0’ = Att.

Control Input

True TTL Gate

Power Supply Requirements+5V ± 2% @ 60 mA-12V ± 2% @ 60 mA

Environmental Conditions

See page 111
DC 11

Package TypePIN FUNCTIONSPINDesignations
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
+V
-V
G

NOTES
1. Performance can be optimized for a narrower bandwidth
2. Attenuation range can be customized.

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings

116

25 dB
+ 5V
- 12V
GND

Switched-Bit Attenuators
Outline Drawings
PACKAGE TYPE & DIMENSIONS

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

117

Series SA-335 Switched-Bit Attenuators
3.0-3.5 GHz Specification
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL

SA-335-5-1-60

Frequency Range, min (GHz)

3.0 to 3.5 (1)Attenuation Range, min )dB)

31 (2)

Insertion Loss, max (dB)

3.8

VSWR, max

2.0:1

Number of Bits

5

LSB, max (dB)1

Monotonicity

Guaranteed

Accuracy of Mean Attenuation, max (dB)

± 0.3 @0 to 31 dB

Attenuation Flatness, max (dB)
Power Handling, max (dBm)± 0.5 @0 to 15 dB± 0.75 @15 to 31 dB+ 23

Switching Time, max (nsec)

100

Rise and Fall Time, max (nsec)

30

Switching Rate, max (MHz)2.0

Control Logic‘1’ = I.Loss‘0’ = Att.

Control Input

True TTL Gate
+5V ± 2% @ 300 mA

Power Supply Requirements

See page 111

Environmental Conditions

DC 2

Package TypeNOTES
1. Performance can be optimized for a narrower bandwidth
2. Attenuation range can be customized.

118

AVAILABLE OPTIONSPIN FUNCTIONS

Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings

PIN
Designations

119

E1

1.0 dBE2

2.0 dB-E3

4.0 dB-E4

8.0 dB-E5

16.0 dB

+V

+ 5V

-V

- 12V

G

GND

Switched-Bit Attenuators
Outline Drawings
PACKAGE TYPE & DIMENSIONS

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

120

Switched-Bit Attenuators
Outline Drawings
PACKAGE TYPE & DIMENSIONS

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

121Switched-Bit Attenuators
Outline Drawings
PACKAGE TYPE & DIMENSIONS

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

122Switched-Bit Attenuators
Outline Drawings
PACKAGE TYPE & DIMENSIONS

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

123Switched-Bit Attenuators
Outline Drawings
PACKAGE TYPE & DIMENSIONS

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

124

Switched-Bit Attenuators
Outline Drawings
PACKAGE TYPE & DIMENSIONS

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

125Switched-Bit Attenuators
Outline Drawings

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

126Phase Shifters Frequency Translators and
I-Q Vector Modulators
General Microwave Corporation has been a leader inthe field of microwave PIN diode control components
for more than 35 years. The design and manufacture ofhigh performance, broadband phase shifters, frequency
translators and I-Q Modulators have made General
Microwave the undisputed leader for these devices.
Today’s more demanding systems require the ability
to control the phase and amplitude of RF/microwave
signals with a repeatable, high degree of accuracy.
General Microwave intends this section to not only
inform you of our most popular products but also toprovide insight into theory of operation, calibration andpractical applications where they can be utilized.
General Microwave offers a complete line of broadband
phase shifters and I-Q modulators which span thefrequency range from 0.05 to 24.0 GHz. These devices
are available in several different topologies that allow
the designer to choose among various performance
characteristics that best suit his system needs. Thissection describes only our standard line of broadband
phase shifter and I-Q modulator models. In addition tothese, there are numerous special designs, employing
a variety of phase shifter circuits, which General
Microwave has utilized in custom applications.

PIN, Schottky and varactor diodes, whereas for highpower requirements, when slower switching speed canbe tolerated, ferrites are frequently employed. The final
choice of a phase shifter network and control element
will depend on the required bandwidth, insertion
loss, switching speed, power handling, accuracy andresolution. In addition, a choice between analog anddigital control must also be made.
Analog phase shifters are devices whose phaseshift changes continuously as the control input isvaried and therefore offer almost unlimited resolution
with monotonic performance. The most commonlyused semiconductor control devices used in analog
microwave phase shifters are varactor diodes, which act
as current controlled variable resistors. Schottky diodes
and ferrite devices are also used as variable elements inanalog phase shifters but the former suffer from limited
power handling capability and matching difficulty inbroadband networks whereas the latter are generally
larger, require more bias power, and are relatively slow
compared to semiconductor designs.
Among the more useful topologies for analog phaseshifters are the loaded line design using lumped
or distributed elements and the reflective design
employing quadrature hybrids. One of the variants of
the reflective phase shifter is the vector modulator,
which in the particular embodiment used by General
Microwave shows excellent performance over 3:1
bandwidths. This capability is especially useful in thedesign of frequency translators(1) and high resolution
phase shifters for EW systems as well as in broadband
simulators as I-Q modulators, where separate controlof the quadrature components of the signal allow forindependent adjustment of both phase and amplitude.
Analog phase shifters are readily convertible to digital
control by the addition of suitable D/A converters andappropriate linearizing circuits.

PHASE SHIFTER FUNDAMENTALS
A variable phase shifter can be characterized as a linear
two port device which alters the phase of its output
signal in response to an external electrical command.
(Mechanical phase shifters are not considered here.)
Expressing this mathematically, with an input signalsin (ωt), the output will be A(n)*sin[(ωt)+Θ(n)], where
n is the programmed phase and A(n) is the insertion
loss. The difference between the input phase and theoutput phase is the sum of the phase shift due tothe propagation through the phase shifter plus the
programmed phase shift.
The relative simplicity of the idea that any reactanceplaced in series or shunt with a transmission line willproduce a phase shift has given rise to many different
circuits over the years for use as phase shifters at
microwave frequencies.
Usually, for high speed applications, the controlling
elements have been semiconductor devices such as(1) Phase shifters can be used to translate the frequency of an RF
carrier by subjecting it to a linear time varying phase shift.

127Phase Shifters Frequency Translators &I-Q Vector Modulators
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE
CHARACTERISTICS

DEFINITION OF PARAMETERS
Phase Shift:
The difference in phase angle of the existing RF signal
at a given frequency and phase shift setting referenced
to the exiting signal at the same frequency with thephase shifter set to zero degree phase shift.

HARMONICS AND INTERMODULATIONPRODUCTS
All PIN diode control devices will generate harmonics
and intermodulation products to some degree since
PIN diodes are non‑linear devices. When compared todigital switched‑bit designs, analog PIN diode phaseshifters are more prone to generate spurious signals
since the diodes function as current‑variable resistors
and are typically operated at resistance levels where
significant RF power is absorbed by the diode.
The levels of harmonic and intermodulation products
generated by a phase shifter or I‑Q modulator are
greatly dependent upon its design, the operating
frequency, attenuation setting and input power level.
Typical 2nd and 3rd order intercept performance for amoderately fast phase shifter, i.e. 500 nsec switching
speed follows:

Accuracy:
The maximum deviation in phase shift from theprogrammed phase shift over the operating frequency
range when measured at room temperature.
Temperature Coefficient:
The average rate of change in phase shift, as referenced
to the zero degree phase state, over the full operating
temperature range of the unit. Expressed in degrees
phase shift/degrees C.
PM/AM:The maximum peak‑to‑peak change in insertion loss ofthe phase shifter at any phase state over the full 360°
phase range.

TYPICAL INTERCEPT POINTS

Switching Speed:
The time interval from the 50% point of the TTL control
signal to within 10° of final phase shift. This applies toa change in either direction between any two phasestates which differ by more than 22.5°.
Carrier Suppression:
When the phase shifter is operated as a frequency
translator, the minimum ratio of carrier output power tothe translated carrier output power.

Frequency

2nd Order
Intercept

3rd Order
Intercept

2.0 GHz
8.0 Ghz+35 dBm+40 dBm+30 dBm+35 dBm

PHASE NOISE
The phase shifters and I‑Q modulators offered byGeneral Microwave minimize the contribution of phasenoise to system performance. This is accomplishedby utilizing PIN diodes which are less sensitive to highfrequency noise than Schottky diodes, limiting thenoise bandwidth in driver control elements and the useof low noise buffer amplifiers to drive the PIN diodes.

Sideband Suppression:
When the phase shifter is operated as a frequency
translator, the minimum ratio of any sideband output
power to the translated carrier output power.
Translation Rate:
When the phase shifter is used as a frequency
translator, the translation rate is determined by dividing
the clock rate by the number of steps. Number of steps
is equal to 2n where n equals number of bits.

128

Theory of Operation &Practical Applications
WHAT IS AN IQ VECTOR MODULATOR?
An IQ Vector Modulator is an RF or microwave circuit
which has the ability to control both the amplitude
and phase of the transmitted signal simultaneously.
Any sinusoidal signal can be expressed as a vector
having the properties of both amplitude and phase withrespect to a reference signal. If a signal is thought of asa vector in a polar coordinate system with coordinatesof amplitude and phase, it can also be defined in arectangular coordinate system with coordinates of “I”
and “Q”. The term “IQ” does not represent anything
about the intelligence of the design engineer, but rather
that the user can control both the “In‑Phase” and“Quadrature‑Phase” components of the output signal.

WHAT ARE SOME OF THE USES OF IQ VECTOR
MODULATORS?
• Amplitude and Phase control for RF simulator
systems• Quadrature Amplitude Modulation• Cancellation of unwanted jamming signals• Cancellation of crosstalk between co‑locatedcommunication systems• Cross‑Polarization Cancellation• Doppler Simulation• Nulling of antenna reflections in monostatic radarsystems• Complex weights for Phased Array Antennas• Linear Filter Equalizer

WHAT IS A TYPICAL IQ MODULATOR CIRCUIT?
The circuit typically includes an input power divider
which splits the incident signal into two paths, anamplitude and/or phase control element in each path,and an output signal summing circuit. In the simplest
embodiment, the input signal is divided into two equal
signals with a 90° phase difference; controlled by aphase invariant bi‑phase attenuator in each path; andcombined by an in phase power combiner as shown infigure 1.
WHAT ACTIVE CONTROL COMPONENTS AREUSED IN IQ MODULATORS?
The control components in an IQ vector modulator
are circuits that employ PIN diode, Schottky diodeor FET devices. The simplest circuit uses a PIN
diode attenuator in series with a PIN‑diode bi‑phasemodulator, or a combination of the two devices ina single bi‑phase attenuator. This device has theproperty of providing a continuous function which firstattenuates the input signal with no phase shift, thenshifts phase 180° at maximum attenuation, and thendecreases attenuation while holding a constant 180°
phase shift. Balanced or double balanced Schottky
diode or FET mixers exhibit a similar function, but
are limited in dynamic range of attenuation. PIN
diode devices usually exhibit higher power handling,
lower insertion loss and higher intercept points than
Schottkydiode or FET based devices. Schottky diodeor FET devices are preferred for modulation rates higher
than a few megahertz.

HOW ARE IQ VECTOR MODULATORSCALIBRATED?
Calibration of the IQ vector modulator for controlled
amplitude and phase response is often performed bygenerating a “look‑up” table using a vector network
analyzer. To obtain the highest degree of accuracy, thecalibration should be performed in-situ. A discussionof calibration techniques is provided on page 58. When
IQ vector modulators are used in a nulling systeman algorithm can readily be developed to adjust thevalues of I and Q in a closed loop fashion to achieve thedesired system performance.
CAN THE I‑Q VECTOR MODULATOR BE
CUSTOMIZED FOR SPECIAL APPLICATIONS?
General Microwave has customized many variationsof the IQ vector modulator for numerous applications
ranging from low cost designs to nuclear hardened
radar systems. Our sales and engineering staff
are available to help you maximize your system
performance by incorporating IQ vector modulators tomeet challenging system requirements      

 !"#    
$

 ,  "#  
$+$

FIGURE 1
I-Q Vector Modulator Block diagram129

&%' ( *) 

Theory of Operation &Practical Applicationsof each of the signals, which are combined in phase toyield the resultant vector. This vector will lie anywhere
within the bounded area shown in Figure 2. Thus,
any signal applied to the l-Q vector modulator can beshifted in phase and adjusted in amplitude by assuming
the desired attenuation level = x dB and the desired
phase shift = Θ degrees. The normalized output voltage
magnitude is then given by:
R = 10–(x/20)
The attenuation values of the I and Q attenuators arethen given by:
I attenuator (dB) = 20 log (R cos Θ)Q attenuator (dB) = 20 log (R sin Θ)

I-Q VECTOR MODULATOR­—
THE IDEAL CONTROL COMPONENT!
Microwave control components are used to vary signal
amplitude and phase. Typically, they consist of twoport devices including amplifiers, attenuators, phaseshifters, and switches. The I-Q vector modulator is aunique combination of active and passive devices thatis, in theory, ideally suited for the simultaneous controlof amplitude and phase.
THEORY OF OPERATION

      

 !"#    
$



&%' ( *) 

 ,  "#  
$+$
FIGURE 1
I-Q Vector Modulator Block diagram

The block diagram of the I-Q vector modulator is shownin Figure 1. An RF signal incident on a 3 dB quadrature
hybrid is divided into two equal outputs, with a 90
degree phase difference between them. The in-phaseor 0 degree channel is designated the I channel andthe quadrature or 90 degree channel is designatedthe Q channel. Each signal passes through a biphasemodulator which selects the 0 or 180 degree state forboth the I and the Q paths. This defines the quadrant
in which the resultant output signal resides (Figure 2).
The attenuator in each path then varies the magnitude

130

Theory of Operation &Practical Applications
To achieve the desired phase shift, bi-phase modulator
states must also be selected as shown in Table 1. In
this way, the phase and amplitude of the output signal
can be varied simultaneously in a controlled fashion.

AMPLITUDE BALANCE
The amplitude balance of the I and Q paths is a secondsource of performance limitation. Unequal power
levels in these paths also produce errors in both theamplitude and phase of the transmitted signal. To
minimize this source of error, the quadrature-hybrid
coupling must be adjusted to provide minimum
deviation from the nominal 3 dB across the frequency
band. For an ideal hybrid, the amplitude unbalance
will be ±0.31 dB over an octave band. The effect ofamplitude and balance error on phase is shown in
Figure 3.

TABLE 1Bi-phase Modulator States
I    Q

Desired Phase Shift0°0°0°-90°

180°

0°90°-180°

180°

180°

180°-270°

0°

180°

270°-360°

The theoretical model presupposes perfect amplitude
and phase balance in the two signal paths, andideal quadrature coupling in the 3 dB hybrid. To theextent that the conditions are not met in practice, theperformance of the I-Q vector modulator will be limited.
PHASE BALANCE
The key element in determining the useful frequency
range of the I-Q vector modulator is the 3 dB
quadrature hybrid. Its most important characteristic
is very low quadrature phase error (such as small
deviation from 90 degree phase shift between outputs).
To achieve this over a broad frequency range, we
employ the Hopffer quadrature hybrid(2), which exhibits
extremely wideband quadrature-phase properties(typically greater than 3 to 1 bandwidth with ±2 degree
phase balance).
In addition to using an in-phase Wilkinson combiner(which, with proper design, exhibits excellent phasebalance) the transmission-line length for the I and Q
paths must also be carefully phase-matched.

FIGURE 3
Phase Error Due to Amplitude Imbalance

NON-IDEAL BI-PHASE MODULATOR AND
ATTENUATOR
Errors in amplitude and phase will occur if the bi-phasemodulator deviates from the ideal, eg: changes statefrom 0 to 180 degrees with constant amplitude or if theattenuator has an associated phase shift as attenuation(2) S. Hoofer, “A Hybrid Coupler for Microstrip Configuration,” IEEE
MTT-S International Microwave Symposium Digest, 1979.

131

Theory of Operation &Practical Applications
The relationship between the I and Q drive circuitry canbe generated in either analog or digital fashion. The
analog circuit employs a broadband quadrature hybrid
to generate the drive signals. In the digital drive circuit,
PROMS are used to provide the required relationships
between I and Q. See the Selection Guide on page
61 for the General Microwave phase shifter model
numbers.

iis varied. Not only do these components in practice
exhibit such deviations, but their interacting reflections
may increase the resultant errors significantly. The
arrangement in Figure 4 minimizes the errors. As
indicated, the tandem combination of a biphasemodulator and attenuator in each path is replaced bya doubly-balanced biphase modulator. The doublybalanced biphase modulator developed by General
Microwave(3) has the ability to attenuate a signal bymore than 20 dB with constant phase, then change thephase 180 degrees and return to the low-loss state. At
insertion loss, it exhibits a maximum phase error of lessthan ±6 degrees and an amplitude balance of ±0.5 dBover a 3 to 1 bandwidth.

FREQUENCY TRANSLATORS
A signal-processing technique using a linear timevarying phase shifter is one method of frequency
translation. One principal use is in velocity deception for
ECM systems by providing false Doppler radar returns.
In a true Doppler radar situation, the reflected signal
is translated in frequency in an amount proportional
to the radial velocity of the target. As a rule, there areno harmonics or spurious signals accompanying thereflection. However, if the target is using velocitydeception techniques, spurious signals may bepresent in the radar return because of the non ideal
performance of the frequency translator. The presenceof these spurious signals will reveal that the Doppler
radar is being jammed. Therefore, it is critical for
optimum ECM system performance that the frequency
translator suppress the carrier, harmonics and all
unwanted sidebands to the greatest extent possible.
For the linear phase shifter, the principal factorsthat contribute to imperfect carrier suppression andsideband generation are:Symbolπ errorThis is the deviation from 360 degrees when maximum
phase shift is programmed.
PM/AM error
The amplitude change (AM) is a function of the phasechange (PM).
Phase nonlinearity
It is the deviation from linear phase shift vs. time.
Quantization error
This term is usually negligible for phase resolution
greater than 6 bits. It arises in a digital phase shifter,
which only approximates linear phase shift with discrete
phase steps.
Flyback time
This arises from the finite time required by the phaseshifter to return from 360 to 0 degrees.

FIGURE 4
Series 71/71 Block Diagram

PRACTICAL APPLICATIONSPHASE SHIFTERS
If the doubly-balanced biphase-modulator conditions
are adjusted so that the magnitude of the resultant
vector remains fixed, the I-Q vector modulator canbehave as a constant-amplitude phase shifter. The
relationships between the desired phase shift and the I
and Q attenuation levels are given by:│I │2 + │ Q │2 = 1
I = cos Θ
Q = sin Θ
where I and Q are normalized voltages.

(3) Z. Adler and B. Smilowitz, “Octave-Band High-Precision Balanced
Modulator,” IEEE MTT-S International Microwave Symposium
Digest, 1984.

132

Theory of Operation &Practical Applications
In the I-Q modulator, since the network operates asa constant-velocity rotating vector, the 0 and 360
degree phase states are exactly the same, and the 2πerror and flyback error are eliminated. In addition, theGeneral Microwave Series 77 provides 10 bits of digitalphase control (sufficient to eliminate the quantization
error), while phase linearity is optimized by the useof PROM correction in the drive circuitry. Finally, thePM/AM error is minimized by using matched doublybalanced biphase modulators, thereby reducing thiserror essentially to the difference in amplitude of the
3 dB quadrature hybrid output ports. This amplitude
imbalance varies with frequency and generates aunique spurious sideband during frequency translation.
An additional PROM correction using RF operating
frequency information can be employed to reduce thisspurious sideband for customer requirements.

COMPLEX I-Q VECTOR MODULATORS
System requirements often call for a tandem
connection of phase shifters and attenuators toprovide independent control of magnitude and phaseof an RF signal. If tight tolerances are required for theamplitude and phase accuracy, a look-up table isusually incorporated in the system software to calibrate
the phase shift and attenuation across the frequency
range. This is a tedious job that entails the generation ofan extensive amount of error correction data, obtainedby alternately varying the phase shifter and attenuator
over the dynamic range for each narrow frequency
band where optimization is required. The inclusionof an I-Q vector modulator in the system in place ofa discrete phase shifter and attenuator offers several
distinct advantages. A single RF component replaces
two separate units, thus reducing cost and eliminatinginteracting VSWR. The relationship between the I andQ inputs and the desired amplitude and phase permits
a tremendous reduction in the amount of data required
for a look-up table. This is because the I and Q inputs
are independent variables for the I-Q vector modulator,
whereas the tandem connection of attenuator andphase shifter exhibit large AM to PM and PM to AM
pushing, creating dependency between the amplitude
and phase inputs. Depending on the frequency range
and accuracy specifications, the RF circuitry of the I-Q
vector modulator can be optimized to eliminate theneed for a look-up table entirely.
The I-Q Vector Modulator is ideally suited for use in
EW Simulators, Adaptive Equalizers or Automatic Test/
Calibration Systems where extremely high accuracy
and repeatability are essential.
See the Selection Guide on page 61 for the General
Microwave I-Q Vector Modulator model numbers.

FIGURE 5–Typical Carrier and Sideband Suppression
General Microwave Model 7728A
Frequency Translator

The specifications of the General Microwave Series
77 Digitally Controlled and Series 78 Voltage
Controlled Frequency Translators include 25 dB carrier
suppression and 20 dB sideband suppression overa three-to-one frequency range. Typical performancedata for carrier and sideband suppression, of the 6 to
18 GHz Model 7728A, are shown in Figure 5. Carrierand sideband suppression of greater than 34 dB for afrequency translator covering a 15-percent bandwidthat X band over the operating temperature range of–54°C to +100°C have been achieved in production
quantities.

133

Frequency Translator
WHAT IS FREQUENCY TRANSLATION?
Translation is shifting the frequency of a signal by a user controlled delta. This frequency delta, also known as
Translation Rate, is usually notated by “Fm”.
When the user wants to translate the signal by 1 Hz he needs to apply a ramp (counter) that sweeps the phase
control of the phase shifter (translator) starting from zero phase shift and ending at 360°. in a cyclic manner.
Each cycle should take exactly 1 second in order to achieve a shift of 1 Hz. Using 10 bit counter, the clock of
the counter would be 1/1024 Hz. Using only 5 bit counter, the clock of the counter would be 1/32 Hz. So using
less bits will enable lower clock rates. However, too low number of bits will cause poor sidebands and carrier
suppression.
Let us assume that we have a pure sine-wave signal as a carrier at Fc that appears at the output of the phaseshifter with a nominal amplitude of 0 dBm.
Now, when introducing an Fm [Hz] translation (covering the 360º once every 1/Fm [seconds]) using the 5 Most
Significant Bits.
With a perfect phase shifter we expect that the spectrum will look like this:Ideal Frequency Translation of CW Signal

134

Frequency Translator
However, with a practical phase shifter the spectrum will look like this:Practical Frequency Translation of CW Signal

Where:
Carrier Suppression: The amplitude difference between the translated signal and the original carrier.
Sideband Suppression: The amplitude difference between the translated signal and the strongest sideband(could be at Fc-n*Fm or Fc+n*Fm, but usually is the Fc+2*Fm product).
IL Variation: Reduction of the Translated Carrier amplitude relative to an amplitude at low translation rate (50kHz).”
Ideal Frequency Translation of a Wide-Band Signal

135

Amplitude andPhase Calibration
may require an excessive amount of calibration timeand data storage. It is recommended that a calibrationinterval of 100 to 200 MHz be used in the center ofthe frequency range of the vector modulator and 25
to 50 MHz be used at the band edges. The optimum
calibration interval for any user must be determined
empirically by insuring that the maximum phase andamplitude error over the frequency calibration interval iswithin the desired limits.
2.0 Once the calibration interval and the calibration
frequency have been chosen, the next step is todefine the I and Q axes and the magnitude of the unit
circle. For this example, the I axis is defined to be thehorizontal axis on the I-Q plane with control word
000 (hex) being equivalent to a vector of approximate
magnitude 1.0 at an angle of zero degrees. In the same
fashion the Q axis is defined to be the vertical axis on
the I-Q plane with control word 000 (hex) equivalent toa vector of approximately magnitude 1.0 at an angle of
90 degrees. Note that for both I and Q, the magnitude
zero vector is approximately 7FF (hex) and themagnitude –1.0 vector occurs as FFF (hex). Following
this procedure the definition of the I-Q plane is arrived
at per the table below:

General Microwave I-Q Vector modulators can becalibrated to provide precision control on both
amplitude and phase over their full rated dynamic
range. The calibration is performed using a vector
network analyzer and a customer generated test
program to achieve the utmost in accuracy. The mostfrequently used algorithm to accomplish this calibration
is described herein. This algorithm involves defining aunity circle and then employing an iterative technique tolocate precise calibration values.
Many factors contribute to the overall accuracy thatis achievable using any calibration routine for theI-Q vector modulator. It is important that the user
fully understand the limitations of measurements incalibrating these units at microwave frequencies. For
example, it is imperative that the desired calibration
accuracy not exceed the accuracy and repeatabilityof the microwave test equipment. Another factor
which must be included in the overall calibration
accuracy is the effects of temperature on the I-Q
modulator and the test equipment. Given that theuser has a thorough understanding of vector network
analyzer measurements, the following will be usefulfor generating a calibration program for a digitallycontrolled I-Q vector modulator. (Note that an analog
controlled unit can be calibrated in the same fashionusing the relationship that 000 hex equals zero voltsand FFF hex equals ten volts on the I and Q controls.)
1.0 The calibration routine is performed at discrete
frequencies in the band of interest. The calibration
will be valid over an interval of frequencies centeredat the calibration frequency and will be limited by the
amplitude and phase errors that occur as frequency
is varied. The highest calibration accuracy will occur
with minimum frequency interval size. However thisTABLE 2136

I CONTROL(hex)

Q CONTROL(hex)

APPROX.
VECTOR

000

7FF

1.0 ANG 0°

FFF

7FF

1.0 ANG 180°

7FF

000

1.0 ANG 90°

7FF

FFF

1.0 ANG 270°

Amplitude andPhase Calibration
3.0 The magnitude of the unit circle is determined byfinding the maximum insertion loss at the calibration
frequency in each of the four states in table 2 above.
Since by nature the I‑Q plane is a square and not acircle (see figure 6), the maximum insertion loss will
occur at one of these four states. Once the maximum
insertion loss is determined, the I or Q values of theother three states in table 2 are adjusted to meet thesame maximum insertion loss level. Note that only
either I or Q should be adjusted to increase insertion
loss at any state, not both. The I or Q value that is
initially set to 7FF (which is approximately the centerof the IQ plane) is not varied during this part of thecalibration since the amplitude of the unit circle is notaffected by small changes in the control input.
4.0 Having thus defined the unit circle, the next stepis to scale the I and Q axes to allow for computationof I and Q values given the desired amplitude andphase. If the I and Q axes were perfectly linear and eachconsisted of 4096 equal increments (for a 12 bit control),it would be possible to achieve the desired amplitude
and phase shift using only the sine and cosine
relationships given in figure 6. In order to approach theideal case, the I and Q values for each of the four states
given in table 2 must be scaled if they differ from 000
or FFF (note that the control input at 7FF is not variedin this step). The scaling entails taking the difference
between 2048 digital counts (equal to one half of the
12 bit control) and the number of counts required toequalize the insertion loss of each of the four statesrequired for the unit circle derived from step 3.0. For
example, assume that the I value at zero degrees(I=000, Q=7FF), is the maximum insertion loss of thefour states and that in order to achieve the same levelof insertion loss at 180° (nominal value I=FFF, Q=7FF), I
must be lowered by 127 counts such that the new value
for 180° on the unity circle is I=F80, Q=7FF. In this case
the I axis for I<0 (in the second and third quadrants)
is limited to 1921 counts instead of 2048. Thus, when
the algorithm is determining the equivalent I value fora desired amplitude and phase occurring in the first or
fourth quadrants, the calculated value for I=R*cos Θis multiplied by 2048 and the result subtracted from2048 (1=7FF, the origin). When, in the same example,
this calculation is done for a vector that occurs in thesecond or third quadrants, the calculated value for I=

137

R*cos Θ will be multiplied by 1921 and the result added
to 2048 (I=7FF) to find the desired I value (reference theI scale at the bottom of figure 6). The scale value will becalled SCALE in calculations given in step 5.2. While
this scaling is not precise, it is sufficient to enable thealgorithm to establish the boundary of the I‑Q planesuch that any desired amplitude and phase calibration
point can be achieved with a minimum of iterations.

FIGURE 6
I-Q Vector Model

5.0 Once the scaling of the axes has beenaccomplished, the zero degree point on the unity
circle is stored and normalized on the vector analyzer.
The control word for this point will be approximately
I=000, Q=7FF and all succeeding phase and amplitude
values will be referenced to this point. Note that the I
control word will differ from 000 if it is not the maximum
insertion loss state of the four states listed in table 2.
The Q control word will be equal to 7FF. An algorithm
to find any desired amplitude and phase with respect
to the normalized unit circle zero degree point can beconstructed from the following procedure:Amplitude andPhase Calibration
5.1 Convert the desired amplitude to a ratio such thatthe desired amplitude and phase can be expressed
as a magnitude (R) and phase (Θ). This is the desired
phase and amplitude change with respect to thenormalized point obtained in step 5.0.
5.2 Solve for the required values of I and Q and
multiply by appropriate scaling factor as outlined instep 4.0. I = (R*cos Θ)*SCALE, Q = (R*sin Θ)*SCALE.
This process is essentially changing from polar
coordinates (amplitude and phase) to rectangularcoordinates I and Q.
5.3 Change I-Q modulator control word to the value
obtained above and measure the resultant amplitude
and phase. Compare the difference between thedesired vector (at the calibration frequency) andthe measured vector. This difference vector will be
adjusted by successive iterations until its amplitude
and phase error from the desired value is less than thedesired calibration accuracy value. From experience,
accuracy values of 0.1 dB and 1 degree are reasonablecalibration limits for attenuation levels below 20 dB.
However higher accuracy is achievable with carefulmeasurements.
5.4 If the measured vector is within the error limits,
store the I-Q value in the calibration table that is being
set up. If the error is larger than the limit, calculate the
I and Q change that is necessary to reach the desired
vector. This is performed by changing both the desired
vector and the error vector back into rectangular I-Q
coordinates and calculating the difference in I and Q
control word required to reach the desired vector. It is
recommended that the I-Q steps taken be limited to
one half of the calculated value in order to minimize

hunting time. Repeat this process until the desired
point is reached within the accuracy limits.
6.0 Complete calibration is usually performed bygenerating sets of constant amplitude circles on the
I-Q plane. Data points can readily be interpolated overthe plane and therefore only a limited number of actual
calibration points are required. Our experience showsthat calibration points taken every 22.5 degrees arounda constant amplitude circle with a linear interpolationof I and Q values to find intermediate phase angles issufficient to achieve high accuracy. Constant amplitude
circles should be calibrated every 0.5 dB for the first twodB above insertion loss and 1.0 dB increments beyond
that level. Interpolation between constant amplitude
circles is also useful in minimizing data collection.
For applications that require high speed (<1.0 µsec)
variations between amplitude and phase states, theentire I-Q plane can be calibrated, interpolated and theresults stored for each frequency interval. Where speed
is not critical, an interpolation routine can be run inreal time and thus the data storage can be minimized.
Typical calibrations using this technique should provide
amplitude accuracy of ±0.2 dB and phase accuracyof ±2.0 degrees over a 10 dB dynamic range for eachfrequency calibration interval.
Further improvements in accuracy can be obtained by
the following:• Tightening up the error limits at each calibration point• Reducing the frequency interval• Maintaining tight control of temperature (less than
±3 degrees C)

138

Phase Shifters and I-Q Modulators
Selection Guide
PHASE SHIFTERS/FREQUENCY TRANSLATORS
BI-PHASE MODULATORS
I.Q. VECTOR MODULATORSFREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)
0.5

2.0

0.5

2.0

4.0

2.0

6.0

8.0

12.0

24

MODEL

40

6.0
4.0

Phase shifter / Frequency translator

7722A/7822

Phase shifter / Frequency translator,
159

Phase shifter / Frequency translator,
Phase shifter / Frequency translator

7728-NB-0812

Narrow Band Phase Shifter

14.5

7728-NB-1214

Narrow Band Phase Shifter

6.0

18.0

7928A

165

Miniature Phase shifter / Frequency translator

6.0

18.0

F1938

140

Bi-Phase modulator

12.4
12

7120/7220

2.0
2.0

COMMENTS

7728A/7828

18.0
8.0

7124/7224

12.0
6.0

2.0

18.0

7128/7228

18.0

7218

I.Q. Vector modulator, digital/analog
143

6.0

7328/7428

18.0
16.0

148

7328H

18.0
18.0

152

I.Q. Vector modulator, High Dynamic Range

157

I.Q. Vector modulator, High speed HighDynamic Range

I.Q. Vector modulator, High Dynamic Range

7929

40.0

MMW Phase Shifter

7929-NB-1821

18.0 21.4

I.Q. Vector modulator, digitally controlled
I.Q. Vector modulator, High Dynamic Range

7329/7429

24.0

I.Q. Vector modulator, digital/analog
I.Q. Vector modulator, digital/analog

7322/7422

6.0

6.0

I.Q. Vector modulator, digital/analog

7122/7222

6.0
4.0

2.0

PAGE

7720A/7820

7724A/7824

12.0
6.0

0.5

18.0

Narrow Band Phase Shifter
336

27.0

31.0

7929-NB-2731

33.0

36.0

7929-NB-3336

Narrow Band Phase Shifter

37.0

40.0

7929-NB-3740

Narrow Band Phase Shifter

139

Narrow Band Phase ShifterModel F1938
Bi-Phase Modulator
The Model F1938 is a high-speed 0° or 180° phaseshifter that operates over the 6 to 18 GHz frequency
range. It features a double-balanced design thatprovides excellent phase accuracy over its entire
frequency range.
The RF design is shown below. The currents required
to switch the unit between states are provided by the
integrated driver, which is controlled by an external
logic signal.

• Frequency range: 6-18 GHz• Differential phase shift: 180° ±10°
• High speed: 5 nsec (10-90% RF)• Low VSWR and insertion loss
• Small size, light weight

Model F1938

140

Model F1938
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency Range................................ 6 to 18 GHz
Differential Phase Shift(1).................... 180° ±10°
Switching Characteristics(2)ON Time........................................... 20 nsec max
OFF Time......................................... 20 nsec max
Rise Time......................................... 5 nsec max
Fall Time........................................... 5 nsec max
Insertion Loss(1)................................... 6 to 16 GHz, 3 dB max>16 to 18 GHz, 3.5 dB max(1)
VSWR .................................................. 2.0 max
Change of Insertion Loss
with Phase Shift............................ 1.0 dB max
Carrier Suppression........................... 20 dB min
Modulation Rate................................... 10 MHz max
Power Handling Capability
	Without Performance
Degradation...............................1W cw or peak
Survival Power................................. 2W average, 25W peak (1µsec max
pulse width)Power Supply Requirements............ +5V ±5%, 65mA
–12 to –15V, 20 mA

Control Characteristics
Control Input Impedance................... Schottky TTL, two-unit load. (A unitload is 2 mA sink current and 50 µA
source current.)
Control Logic........................................ Alternate applications of logic “0” (–0.3
to +0.8V) and logic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0V)
switches phase by 180°.

(1) With Option 85, within Frequency Band of 16 to 18 GHz will be:a. Insertion Loss: 4 dB max
b. Differential Phase Shift: 180° ±15°c. VSWR: 2.2:1 max(2) As measured with a phase bridge.

141Model F1938
Specifications
OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature
Range.......................... ­–55° to +110°C
Non-Operating Temperature
Range.......................... –65° to +125°C
Humidity......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock.............................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06" double
amplitude or 15G, whichever is
less)
Altitude........................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, 5 cycles

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
3
SMA female control connector
7
Two K male RF connectors
10	One K (J1) male and one K female (J2) RFconnector
33
EMI filter solder-type control terminal
85	SMA RF connectors
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008142Series 71, 12 Bit Digital and Series 72 Analog
I-Q Vector Modulators
Both Series comprise a family of four solid-state PIN
diode I-Q Vector Modulators covering the frequency
range from 0.5 to 18 GHz in four bands: 0.5 to 2 GHz, 2
to 6 GHz, 4 to 12 GHz and 6 to 18 GHz. See Fig. 1.
All models provide a full 360° range of phase shift and aminimum of 20 dB attenuation range at any frequency.

• Simultaneous control of amplitude andphase• 0.5 to 18 GHz in four bands: 0.5 to 2 GHz;
2 to 6 GHz; 4 to 12 GHz; 6 to 18 GHz• 12 Bit digitally programmable (Series 71)• Analog control (Series 72)• High speed• Guaranteed monotonicity

IQ Model 7128

143

Series 71, 12 Bit Digital and Series 72 Analog
I-Q Vector Modulations
THEORY OF OPERATIONThe block diagram of the I-Q Vector Modulator is shownin Figure 1. An RF signal incident on a 3 dB quadrature
hybrid is divided into two equal outputs, with a 90°
phase difference between them. The in-phase, or 0°,
channel is designated the I channel and the Quadrature,or 90°, channel is designated the Q channel. Eachsignal passes through a biphase modulator which sets
the 0° or 180° state and the attenuation level for boththe I and Q paths. The outputs of the I and Q path are
combined to yield the resultant vector which may fall
anywhere within the bounded area shown in Figure 2.
Any signal applied to the I‑Q Vector Modulator can beshifted in phase and adjusted in amplitude by applying
the following relationships:
1. Let the desired attenuation level = X dB and thedesired phase shift = θ° (with respect to 0 dB and 0°
reference states).
2. The normalized output voltage magnitude is given
V = 10‑(x/20).
by:
3. The values of the I and Q attenuator control inputs
are then expressed as:
I = V cos θ  andQ = V sin θ.
Figure 3 shows the nominal value of I and Q vs. either
digital word (Series 71) or analog voltage (Series 72).
Thus, to achieve an attenuation level of 3 dB with aphase offset of 112.5° (with respect to 0 dB and 0°
reference states) the values of I and Q can be calculated
as follows:
V = 10–(3/20) = 0.707
I = 0.707 cos (112.5°) =–.027
Q = 0.707 sin (112.5°) =+0.65
From Figure 3, the control inputs to yield the desired
amplitude and phase are approximately:
Analog Units (72 Series)  Digital Units (71 Series)
I = 5.78 volts
100101000000
Q = 2.84 volts
010010001011
While these values for I and Q will yield an output signal
whose amplitude and phase are close to the nominal
values over the entire operating frequency range of thevector modulator, the use of an iterative measurement
procedure will determine the I and Q inputs which
exactly define the desired parameter at any selected
frequency.

│ │

144

Series 71/72
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL

7120/7220

7122/7222

7124/7224

7128/7228

0.5-2.0 GHz

2.0-6.0 GHz

4.0-12.0 GHz

6.0-18.0 GHz

INSERTION LOSS

13 dB

11 dB

12 dB

12 dB

VSWR (MAX)
POWER HANDLINGWITHOUT PERFORMANCEDEGRADATIONSURVIVAL POWER (MAX)ABSOLUTE INSERTION
PHASE ACCURACY VS.
FREQUENCY (MAX)

1.6 :1

1.8 :1

1.8 :12.0 :1+7 dBm+20 dBm+20 dBm+20 dBm

FREQUENCY

1W±15º

VARIATION OF PHASE VS.
TEMPERATURE (MAX)±0.1 deg./ ºC

ATTENUATION RANGE (MIN)

20 dB

VARIATION OF AMPLITUDE
VS. TEMPERATURE (MAX)0.02 dB/ ºC

RESPONSE TIME (MAX)0.5 µsec–12 to –15V @ 70 mA+12 to +15V @ 70 mA

POWER SUPPLYCONTROL INPUT
71 SERIES
72 SERIES

12 bit TTL for both I and Q inputs
0 to +10V DC for both I and Q inputs

CONTROL INPUT IMPEDANCE
71 SERIES
72 SERIES

40 µA max
10 kW

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGSACCESSORY FURNISHED

Operating Temperature
Range..................................­–54°C to +100°C
Non-Operating
Temperature Range..........–65°C to +125°C
Humidity.................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at
95%)
Shock......................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
213B, Cond. B (75G, 6
msec)
Vibration.................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06"double amplitude or 15G,
whichever is less)Altitude...................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling........................MIL-STD-202F, Method
107D, Cond. A, 5 cycles

Mating power/control connector (Series 71 only)

145

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
7
Two type K male RF connectors
10	One type K male (J2) and one SMA female(J1) RF connector
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

Series 71/72
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS SERIES 71

    





  
 




















 













 ­   ­

MODEL

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

J

7120

4.95±.03(125,7)3.38±.03(85,9)

1.02(25,9)

4.75±.01(120,7)3.12±.01(79,2)

2.62(66,5)

1.69(42,9)

2.47(62,9).73(18,5)

3.25±.03(82,6)

3.25±.03(82,6).85(21,6)

3.05±.01(77,5)

3.00±.01(76,2)

1.63(41,4)

1.63(41,4).64(16,3)

3.00±.03(76,2)

3.00±.03(76,2).96(24,4)

2.80±.01(71,1)

2.75±.01(69,9)

1.50(38,1)

1.50(38,1).76(19,3)

7122
7124
7128

PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

J3 PIN FUNCTIONFUNCTIONPIN
FUNCTION
I-5
20
I-4
I-6
21
I-7
I-8
22
I-3
I-9
23
I-2
I-10
24
I-1 (LSB)
I-11
25
I-12 (MSB)
N/C
26
N/C
27
N/C
+12 to +15V
GND
28
GND
GND
29
N/C
–12 to –15V
30
N/C
Q-3
31
N/C
Q-2
32
Q-4
Q-1 (LSB)
33
N/C
Q-5
34
N/C
Q-6
35
Q-12 (MSB)
Q-7
36
Q-11
Q-8
37
Q-10
Q-9

1.99
(50,5)
1.83(46,5)
1.63(41,4)MODEL

WEIGHT (APPROX)

7120

13 oz. (369 gr.)

7122

10 oz. (284 gr.)

7124

10 oz. (284 gr.)7128

9 oz. (255 gr.)

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

146

Series 71/72
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS SERIES 72

MODEL

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

J

7220

4.95±.03(125,7)3.38±.03(85,9)

1.02(25,9)

4.75±.01(120,6)3.12±.01(79,2)

1.68(42,7).75(19,1)

1.75(44,5).73(18,5)

3.25±.03(82,6)

3.25±.03(82,6).85(21,6)

3.05±.01(77,5)

3.00±.01(76,2)

1.63(41,4).90(22,9).64(16,3)

3.00±.03(76,2)

3.00±.03(76,2).96(24,4)

2.80±.01(71,1)

2.75±.01(69,9)

1.50(38,1).78(19,8).76(19,3)

7222
7224
7228

MODEL

WEIGHT (APPROX)

7220

13 oz. (369 gr.)

7222

10 oz. (284 gr.)

7224

10 oz. (284 gr.)7228

9 oz. (255 gr.)

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

147

1.99
(50,5)
1.83(46,5)
1.63(41,4)

Model 7218
Broadband I-Q Vector Modulator
The Model 7218 is the latest addition to the family ofhigh performance I.Q. Vector Modulators. Its broadband
capability is ideally suited for today’s more demanding
and complex Electronic Warfare systems• Broad Frequency range - 2 to 18 GHz• Simultaneous control of phase andamplitude

The Model 7218 covers a frequency range of 2 to 18
GHz, is capable of a full 360 Degrees phase control
and a minimum of 20 dB amplitude control. Responsetime is 1 microsecond, maximum. Digital control isaccomplished by two 12 bit TTL inputs, for I and Q
channels, which provide for high precision calibrationof phase and amplitude. Operation is guaranteed to be
monotonic.

• Digitally programmable - 12 Bits for both
I&Q
• High Speed• Guaranteed monotonic

IQ Model 7218

Fig. 1 - Model 7218 Block Diagram

148

Model 7218
Broadband I-Q Vector Modulator
THEORY OF OPERATIONThe block diagram of the I-Q Vector Modulator is shownin Figure 1. An RF signal incident on a 3 dB quadrature
hybrid is divided into two equal outputs, with a 90°
phase difference between them. The in-phase, or 0°,
channel is designated the I channel and the Quadrature,or 90°, channel is designated the Q channel. Eachsignal passes through a biphase modulator which sets
the 0° or 180° state and the attenuation level for boththe I and Q paths. The outputs of the I and Q path are
combined to yield the resultant vector which may fall
anywhere within the bounded area shown in Figure 2.
Any signal applied to the I‑Q Vector Modulator can beshifted in phase and adjusted in amplitude by applying
the following relationships:
1. Let the desired attenuation level = X dB and thedesired phase shift = θ° (with respect to 0 dB and 0°
reference states).
2. The normalized output voltage magnitude is givenby:V = 10‑(x/20).
3. The values of the I and Q attenuator control inputs
are then expressed as:
I = V cos θ  andQ = V sin θ.
Figure 3 shows the nominal value of I and Q vs. either
digital word or analog voltage Thus, to achieve anattenuation level of 3 dB with a phase offset of 112.5°(with respect to 0 dB and 0° reference states) the valuesof I and Q can be calculated as follows:
V = 10–(3/20) = 0.707
I = 0.707 cos (112.5°) =–.027
Q = 0.707 sin (112.5°) =+0.65
From Figure 3, the control inputs to yield the desired
amplitude and phase are approximately:
Analog Units
Digital Units
I = 5.78 volts
100101000000
Q = 2.84 volts
010010001011
While these values for I and Q will yield an output signal
whose amplitude and phase are close to the nominal
values over the entire operating frequency range of thevector modulator, the use of an iterative measurement
procedure will determine the I and Q inputs which
exactly define the desired parameter at any selected
frequency.

│ │

149

Model 7218
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSPARAMETERSPECIFICATIONOPERATING FREQUENCY RANGE

2.0 - 18.0 GHz

Band 1

2 - 6 GHz

Band 2

6 - 18 GHz

Band Switching Speed, max.

250 nanoseconds

INSERTION LOSS (MAX)

16 dB

VSWR (MAX)

2.2 :1POWER HANDLING CAPABILITY
Without performance degradation+20 dBm

Survival

1W

ABSOLUTE INSERTION PHASE ACCURACY VS.
FREQUENCY (MAX)±15º (in each band)

VARIATION OF PHASE VS.
TEMPERATURE (MAX)±0.1 deg./ ºC

ATTENUATION RANGE (MIN)

20 dB

VARIATION OF AMPLITUDE
VS. TEMPERATURE (MAX)0.02 dB/ ºC

RESPONSE TIME (MAX)1.0 µsec

POWER SUPPLY+5 V ±2% @ 200 mA, max.
+12 to +15V @ 150 mA, max.
-5.2 V ±2% @ 400 mA, max.
-12 to -15V @ 150 mA, max

MONOTONICITYGUARANTEEDCONTROL INPUT

12 BIT TTL FOR BOTH I & Q INPUTSCONNECTORSRF Input/output

SMA Female, 2X

Control/Power

Cannon DC-37P or Equivalent

TEMPERATURE RANGE
Operating-55 ºC to +85 ºC

Storage-65 ºC to +125 ºC

150

Model 7218
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

WEIGHT (APPROX) 16oz. (453 gr.)

PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

ACCESSORY FURNISHED

J3 PIN FUNCTIONFUNCTIONPIN
FUNCTION
I-5
20
I-4
I-6
21
I-7
I-8
22
I-3
I-9
23
I-2
I-10
24
I-1 (LSB)
I-11
25
I-12 (MSB)
BAND 1 (notes1& 2)
26
N/C+12 to +15V
27
+5V ±2%
GND
28
GND
GND
29
BAND 1 (notes1& 2)–12 to –15V
30
-5.2V ±2%
Q-3
31
BAND 2 (notes1& 2)
Q-2
32
Q-4
Q-1 (LSB)
33
BAND 2 (notes1& 2)
Q-5
34
N/C
Q-6
35
Q-12 (MSB)
Q-7
36
Q-11
Q-8
37
Q-10
Q-9

Mating power/control connector

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

NOTES:
1. BAND SELECT: Band 1 (2 to 6 GHz) - Apply TTL 0 to Pin 7 or Pin 29
Band 2 (6 to 18 GHz) - Apply TTL 0 to Pin 31 or Pin 33
2. With no band selected, there will be maximum Isolation between J1 and J2

151

Series 73, 12 Bit Digital and Series 74 Analog
High Dynamic Range I-Q Vector Modulations
The new Series 73/74 represents the latest addition
to General Microwave's existing line of PIN DiodeI.Q. Vector Modulators. Their performance has beenenhanced to provide a higher dynamic range ofattenuation for today's more demanding systemapplications.
All models incorporate multiple bi‑phase modulator
sections to provide in excess of 60 dB attenuation
range at any frequency. All models are also capableof a full 360° range of phase shift. The series covers afrequency range of 2 GHz to 24 GHz in three bands: 2
GHz to 6 GHz, 6 GHz to 18 GHz, and 16 GHz to 24 GHz.
A simplified block diagram is shown in Fig. 1.

• Simultaneous control of amplitude andphase over a 50 dB dynamic range• 2 to 24 GHz in three bands:
2 to 6 GHz; 6 to 18 GHz; 16 to 24 GHz• 12 Bit digitally programmable(Series 73)• Analog control (Series 74)• High speed• Guaranteed monotonicity

IQ Model 7328

152

Series 73/74
Specifications
THEORY OF OPERATIONThe block diagram of the I-Q Vector Modulator isshown in Figure 1. An RF signal incident on a 3 dB
quadrature hybrid is divided into two equal outputs,
with a 90° phase difference between them. The inphase, or 0°, channel is designated the I channel and
the Quadrature, or 90°, channel is designated the
Q channel. Each signal passes through a biphasemodulator which sets the 0° or 180° state and theattenuation level for both the I and Q paths. The outputsof the I and Q path are combined to yield the resultant
vector which may fall anywhere within the boundedarea shown in Figure 2. Any signal applied to the I‑Q
Vector Modulator can be shifted in phase and adjusted
in amplitude by applying the following relationships:
1. Let the desired attenuation level = X dB and thedesired phase shift = θ° (with respect to 0 dB and 0°
reference states).
2. The normalized output voltage magnitude is givenby:V = 10–(x/20).
3. The values of the I and Q attenuator control inputs
are then expressed as:
I = V cos θ  andQ = V sin θ.
Figure 3 shows the nominal value of I and Q vs. either
digital word (Series 73) or analog voltage (Series 74).
Thus, to achieve an attenuation level of 3 dB with aphase offset of 112.5° (with respect to 0 dB and 0°
reference states) the values of I and Q can be calculated
as follows:
V = 10–(3/20) = 0.707
I = 0.707 cos (112.5°) =–.027
Q = 0.707 sin (112.5°) =+0.65
From Figure 3, the control inputs to yield the desired
amplitude and phase are approximately:
Analog Units (73 Series)  Digital Units (74 Series)
I = 7.81 volts
110010000000
Q = 1.50 volts
001010000000
While these values for I and Q will yield an output signal
whose amplitude and phase are close to the nominal
values over the entire operating frequency range of thevector modulator, the use of an iterative measurement
procedure will determine the I and Q inputs which
exactly define the desired parameter at any selected
frequency.

│ │

153

Series 73/74
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSMODELFREQUENCY7322/7422

7328/7428

7329/7429

2.0-6.0 GHz

6.0-18.0 GHz

16.0-24.0 GHz

INSERTION LOSS

16 dB

6-16 GHz>16-18 GHz

VSWR (MAX)

1.8 :1

2.3:1

20 dB
23 dB

POWER HANDLINGWITHOUT PERFORMANCEDEGRADATION+20 dBm typical

SURVIVAL POWER (MAX)

1W

ABSOLUTE INSERTION
PHASE ACCURACY VS.
FREQUENCY (MAX)

±25º

21 dB
2.5 :1±22°

VARIATION OF PHASE VS.
TEMPERATURE (MAX)±0.2 deg./ ºC

ATTENUATION RANGE (MIN)

50 dB

VARIATION OF AMPLITUDE
VS. TEMPERATURE (MAX)0.04 dB/ ºC

RESPONSE TIME (MAX)1.0 µsec–12 to –15V @ 100 mA+12 to +15V @ 100 mA

POWER SUPPLYCONTROL INPUT
73 SERIES
74 SERIESCONTROL INPUTIMPEDANCE
73 SERIES
74 SERIES

12 bit TTL for both I and Q inputs
0 to +10V DC for both I and Q inputs
40 µA max
10 kW

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGSACCESSORY FURNISHED

Operating Temperature
Range.......................... ­–54°C to +100°C
Non-Operating
Temperature Range.. –65°C to +125°C
Humidity......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock.............................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06" double
amplitude or 15G, whichever is
less)
Altitude........................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, 5 cycles

Mating power/control connector (Series 73 only)

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
7	Two SMA (Type K-Model 7X29) male RFconnectors
10	One SMA (Type K-Model 7X29) male(J2) and one SMA (Type K-Model 7X29)
female (J1) RF connector
G09
Meeting the specified Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant154

Series 73/74
Specifications

MODEL

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

J

K

7322

4.00±.03 3.00±.03(101,6)(76,2).88(22,4)

3.80±.01 2.75±.01(96,5)(69,9)

1.50(38,1)

1.90(48,3)

2.00(50,8).68(17,3)

.10
(2,9)

7328

3.12±.03 3.00±.03(79,2)(76,2).88(22,4)

2.92± .01 2.75±.01(74,2)(69,9)

1.50(38,1)

1.82(46,2)

1.56(39,6).68(17,3)

.10
(2,9)

7329

3.25±.03 3.00±.03(82,6)(76,2).82(20,8)

3.00±.01 2.75±.01(76,2)(69,9)

1.50(38,1)

1.69(42,9)

1.69(41,1).65(16,5)

.12
(3,0)

PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

J3 PIN FUNCTIONFUNCTIONPIN
FUNCTION
I-5
20
I-4
I-6
21
I-7
I-8
22
I-3
I-9
23
I-2
I-10
24
I-1 (LSB)
I-11
25
I-12 (MSB)
N/C
26
N/C
27
N/C
+12 to +15V
GND
28
GND
GND
29
N/C
–12 to –15V
30
N/C
Q-3
31
N/C
Q-2
32
Q-4
Q-1 (LSB)
33
N/C
Q-5
34
N/C
Q-6
35
Q-12 (MSB)
Q-7
36
Q-11
Q-8
37
Q-10
Q-9

MODEL

WEIGHT (APPROX)

7322
7328
7329

12 oz. (341 gr.)
11 oz. (312 gr.)
11 oz. (312 gr.)

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

155

Series 73/74
Specifications

MODEL

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

J

K

7422

4.00±.03(101,6)3.00±.03(76,2).88(22,4)

3.80±.01(96,5)

2.75±.01(69,9)

1.50(38,1)

1.90(48,3)

1.28(32,5).68(17,3)

.10
(2,9)

7428

3.12±.03(79,2)

3.00±.03(76,2).88(22,4)

2.92± .01 2.75±.01(74,2)(69,9)

1.50(38,1)

1.82(46,2).83(21,1).68(17,3)

.10
(2,9)

7429

3.25±.03(82,6)

3.00±.03(76,2).82(20,8)

3.00±.01(76,2)

1.50(38,1)

1.69(42,9).90(22,9).65(16,5).12(3,0)

2.75±.01(69,9)MODEL

WEIGHT (APPROX)

7422

12 oz. (341 gr.)7428

11 oz. (312 gr.)7429

11 oz. (312 gr.)

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

156

Model 7328H High Speed, High Dynamic
Range I-Q Vector Modulator
The Model 7328H represents the latest advancement
to General Microwave's comprehensive product line of
PIN diode I‑Q Vector Modulators. Its response time has
been significantly reduced, resulting in an enhanced
modulation rate performance of 50 MHz to better serve
today's more demanding system applications.
In addition to the high speed, the Model 7328H
incorporates multiple bi‑phase modulator sections
to provide in excess of 60 dB attenuation through 16
GHz, and is capable of a full 360 degrees of phase shift.
Thus, the unit will provide high speed and simultaneouscontrol of amplitude and phase over the full frequency
range of 6 to 18 GHz. A simplified block diagram isshown in Fig. 1.

• High Speed – Modulation Rate of better
than 50 MHz• Wide Frequency Range – 6 to 18 GHz• Simultaneous control of amplitude andphase over a 60 dB dynamic range• Digitally Programmable I&Q – 12 Bit ECL
control• Guaranteed monotonicity

THEORYThe Theory of Operation of the Model 7328H is thesame as the Series 73 units. The RF and Driver portionsof the IQ Modulator have been modified to enable
modulation rates up to 50 MHz.

IQ Model 7328H

FIG. 1–SERIES 7328H BLOCK DIAGRAM

157

Model 7328H
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

Control Input Impedance.............. 100 ohms
(to –2V supply)Power Supply................................ +12V @ 350 mA–12V @ 130 mA–5.2V @ 340 mA–2V @ 280 mA

PARAMETERSPECIFICATION
Frequency Range, min.................. 6.0 to 18.0 GHz
Insertion Loss, max....................... 6 to 10 GHz 18.5 dB
10 to 12 GHz 20 dB
12 to 18 GHz 27 dB
VSWR, max................................... 6 to 10 GHz 2.2 :1
10 to 18 GHz 2.6:1
Power Handling, max Without Performance
Degradation............................... –5 dBm Typical
Survival.......................................... +27 dBm
Absolute Insertion Phase Accuracy
vs Frequency............................. 6 to 12 GHz ±25°
12 to 18 GHz ±35°
Variation of Phasevs Temperature, max................. ±0.2°/°C
Attenuation range, min
6 to 16 GHz................................ 60dB
>16 to 18 GHz............................ 50dB
Variation of Amplitude
vs Temperature, max................. 0.04 dB/°C
Modulation Rate, min.................... 50 MHz
Control Input................................. 12 Bit ECL
for both I&Q
Control Characteristics,
I&Q, typ...................................... See Figure 2

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

Model 7328H

weight 8.8 oz. (249 gr.) approximate

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

158

Series 77, 10 Bit Digital and Series 78 Analog
360° Phase Shifters & Frequency Translators
Both Series, 77 and 78, comprise a family of eightsolid‑state PIN diode phase shifters covering thefrequency range from 0.5 to 18 GHz in four bands: 0.5
to 2 GHz, 2 to 6 GHz, 4 to 12 GHz and 6 to 18 GHz. All
models provide a full 360° range of phase shift and may
also be used for frequency translation applications.
Each unit is an integrated assembly of an RF vector
modulator and a driver circuit, consisting of a 10‑bit
D/A converter and a voltage buffer in the Series 77
digital units (see Fig. 1A) and a voltage converterand buffer in the Series 78 analog configuration(see Fig. 1 B).
The phase in the Series 77 is digitally controlled over afull 360° in 0.35° discrete steps. The voltage converter in
the Series 78 consists of a 8 bit A/D converter followed
by D/A converter, and converts a continuous analog
input voltage into discrete steps of 1.41°.

• 0.5 to 18 GHz in four bands: 0.5 to 2 GHz;
2 to 6 GHz; 4 to 12 GHz; 6 to 18 GHz• 10 Bit digitally programmable (Series 77)• Analog control (Series 78)• High speed• Guaranteed monotonicity

Phase Shifter Model 7728A

159

Series 77/78
Specifications
Phase Shift
Phase shift is achieved utilizing the RF vector modulator
approach shown in Fig. 2. The 3 dB hybrid coupler
divides the RF signal into two quadrature components
which are then modulated in proportion to the sine andcosine of the desired phase shift. The signals are then
combined in-phase to yield the phase‑shifted output.
Excellent phase accuracy and PM/AM performance(see Figs. 4 and 5) are achieved by using linearized
double balanced modulators. In their main operating
bands, phase accuracy is better than ±10° up to
10 GHz and ±12° to 18 GHz. This phase accuracy
can be extended to cover the band edges by using abuilt‑in frequency correction circuit. Switching speed isbetter than 500 nsec.

Frequency Translation (Serrodyning)
Special attention in the design of the units has
been paid to those characteristics which affect theirperformance as frequency translators. These include
minimizing PM‑to‑AM conversion, use of high slew rate
drivers, and optimizing phase shift linearity with applied
signal. As a result, carrier and sideband suppression
levels of over 25 and 20 dB, respectively, are obtainedin the main bands. The same carrier and sideband
performance can be realized over the full stretch
band when the internal frequency correction circuit isemployed.
See Fig. 3 for input voltage control requirements for
Series 77 and 78 when used as a frequency translator.
On special order, frequency translators can beprovided for operation over reduced bandwidths with
suppression levels of up to 35 dB. Consult the factoryfor special requirements.

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSERIES 77
Control...........................10 bit TTL
Nominal Resolution........ 0.35o
Logic Input
Logic “0” (Bit OFF)....–0.3 to +0.8V @ 500 µA max
Logic “1” (Bit ON)......+2.0 to +5.0V @ 100 µA max

SERIES 78
Control Voltage...............0 to +6V
Sensitivity.......................23.4 mV/LSB
Resolution.......................1.41°
Step Uncertainty............0.7° max, 0.3° typ.
Input Resistance............2K ohms
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
VOLTAGESERIES 77

SERIES 78+5V to +5.5V

100 mA

200 mA+12V to +15V

100 mA

100 mA-12V to -15V

90 mA

90 mA

Power Handling Capability
Without Performance
Degradation................+20 dBm (+7 dBm for 7720A,
7820)
Survival............................+30 dBm
Harmonics.......................–30 dBc
Phase Variation..............0.1°/°C
160

Series 77/78
Specifications
PHASE SHIFTER SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL
NOS.

INSERTION VSWR ACCURACY
LOSS (Max.) (Max.)(Max.)

FREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)PM/AM(Max.)

Main Band (1)0.7 - 1.9
7720A & 7820 Stretch Band (2) 0.5 - 2.0
Band Edges (3) 0.5 - 0.7 & 1.9 -2.0

11.5 dB max
13.0 dB typ
13.0 dB max

1.75±10° max±15° typ±10° max±1.1 dB max±2.5 dB typ±1.1 dB max

Main Band (1) 2.6 - 5.2
7722A & 7822 Stretch Band (2) 2.0 - 6.0
Band Edges (3) 2.0 - 2.6 & 5.2 - 6.0

10.0 dB max
11.0 dB typ
11.0 dB max

1.6±10° max±15° typ±10° max±1.1 dB max±1.5 dB typ±1.1 dB max

Main Band (1) 4.5-10.5
7724A & 7824 Stretch Band (2) 4.0-12.0
Band Edges (3) 4.0 - 4.5 & 10.5 - 12.0

10.5 dB max
12.0 dB max
12.0 dB max

1.8±10° max±15° typ±10° max±1.1 dB max±2.0 dB typ±1.1 dB max

Main Band (1) 8.0-18.0
7728A & 7828 Stretch Band (2) 6.0-18.0
Band Edge (3) 6.0 to 8.0

12.0 dB max
12.0 dB typ
12.0 dB max

2.0±12° max±15° typ±12° max±1.25 dB max±2.0 dB typ±1.25 dB max

OTHER SPECIFICATIONS
Switching Speed (50% TTL to within 100 of Final Phase Value); 500 nsec Max.
Minimum phase shift range:   Series 77: 3600 in 1024 Steps (10-bit)   Series 78: 3600 @ 600/Volt

FREQUENCY TRANSLATOR SPECIFICATIONSINSERTION LOSSVARIATION (Max.)with translation rate:

TRANSLATIONRATE (Min.)CARRIER
SUPPRESSION (Min.)SIDEBAND
SUPPRESSION (Min.)

0 to 50 kHz(4)Main Band:
25 dB
Stretch Band: 18 dB

Main Band:
20 dB
Stretch Band: 15 dB

1 dB>50 to 500 kHz(4)Main Band:
20 dB
Stretch Band: 15 dB

Main Band:
18 dB
Stretch Band: 12 dB

3 dB

NOTES:BAND SELECTION BY PIN 3 OF J3 LOGIC LEVEL ASSIGNMENT(1) For Main Band optimized operation, apply logic HIGH to pin 3 or leave it floating.
(2) For Stretch Band operation, apply logic HIGH to pin 3 or leave it floating. While performance is optimized over the Main Band, the reduced
performance as statedin Stretch Band specifications apply to band edges..
(3) For Band Edges optimized operation, apply logic LOW to pin 3.
4) All specifications are met using five or more most significant bits for 0 to 50 kHz translation rates.
For 50-500 kHz translation rates, only the four most significant bits are used.

Narrow Band Phase Shifters
In addition to the standard wide band Phase Shifters, KRATOS General Microwave is offering Narrow Band Phase
Shifters. These units are available both as standard catalog units and as customized units meeting specificcustomer’s requirements. The narrow band units have better performances and lower prices.
Frequency Range

Model Number

Phase Accuracy

PM/AM

Insertion Loss

8.0 to 12.4 GHz

7728-NB-0812± 6o (max.)± 0.6 dB

12.0 dB (max.)

12.0 to 14.5 GHz

7728-NB-1214± 6o (max.)± 0.6 dB

12.0 dB (max.)161

Series 77/78
Specifications
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE

162

Series 77/78
Specifications
Altitude................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling.....................MIL-STD-202F, Method
107D, Cond. A, 5 cycles

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature
Range...............................­–54°C to +100°C
Non-Operating
Temperature Range.......–65°C to +125°C
Humidity..............................MIL-STD-202F, Method
103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at
95%)
Shock...................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
213B, Cond. B (75G,
6 msec)Vibration..............................MIL-STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06"double amplitude or 15G,
whichever is less)

ACCESSORY FURNISHED
Mating power/control connector

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
7	Two SMA male RF connectors
10	One SMA male (J2) and one SMA female(J1) RF connector
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
MODEL

A

B

7720A 4.95 ± .03 3.38 ± .03
7820(125,7)(85,9)

7722A
7822
7724A

3.25 ± .03 3.25 ± .03(82,6)(82,6)

7824
7728A 2.50 ± .03 3.00 ± .03
7828(63,5)(76,2)

C
1.02(25,9)
1.48(37,6).84(21,3)
1.25(31,8).84(21,3)
1.25(31,8).88(22,4)
1.19(30,2)

D

E

F

G

H

4.75 ± .01 3.12 ± .01

2.62

1.69

2.48

(120,7)(66,5)(42,9)(62,9)(79,2)

1.99
3.05 ± .01 3.00 ± .01(77,5)(76,2)

1.63(50,5)

1.63(41,4)

1.83(41,4)(46,5)
2.30 ± .01 2.75 ± .01(58,4)(69,9)

1.50

1.63

1.25

(38,1)(41,4)(31,8)

JK.73(18,5)
1.18(30,0).66(16,8)
1.07(27,2).66(16,8)
1.07(27,2).71(18,0)
1.02(25,9)

.32
(8,1)
.78
(19,8)
.32
(8,1)
.72
(18,3)
.32
(8,1)
.72
(18,3)
.39
(9,9)
.69
(17,6)

WEIGHT(APPROX)
13 oz. (369 gr.)
15 oz. (425 gr.)
9 oz. (255 gr.)
10 oz. (284 gr.)
9 oz. (255 gr.)
10 oz. (284 gr.)
6 oz. (170 gr.)
8 oz. (227 gr.)

J3 PIN FUNCTIONSFunction

NOTE:(1) Unused logic bits must be grounded.
(2) Must not exceed +7VDC. See footnote (3) below.
(3) Must not be greater than +0.3 VDC above voltage at pin 15.

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

163

Pin
No.

Series77(1)Series78

1
2
3–12V to –15V
+12V to +15V
Freq. Correction
Circuit Select(3)“0” = Band Edge
1.4° (3)5.6° (3)45.0° (3)180.0° (MSB)(3)
90.0° (3)Ground0.7° (3)
22.5°
2.8°
11.3°
0.35° (LSB)+5V to +5.5 VDC–12V to –15V
+12V to +15V
Freq. Correction
Circuit Select“0” = Band Edge
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Ground (Sig)
Ground (PWR)
Not Used
Not Used
Not UsedControl Voltage+5V to +5.5 VDC

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Series 77/78
Specifications

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008164Model 7928A Miniaturized 8 Bit
360° Phase Shifter/Frequency Translator
The Model 7928A is a miniaturized, hermetically sealed
PIN diode phase shifter covering the frequency range
from 6 to 18 GHz providing a full 360° range of variable
phase shift. It can also be used to perform frequency
translation.
The unit is an integrated assembly of an RF vector
modulator and a driver circuit consisting of an 8‑bit D/Aconverter and a voltage buffer. See Figure 1.

• 6 to 18 GHz• 360° range• High speed• Digitally programmable (8 Bits)• Guaranteed monotonicity

PHASE SHIFT• Hermetically Sealed

Phase shifting is achieved utilizing the RF vector
modulator approach shown in Figure 2. The 3‑dB hybrid
coupler divides the RF signal into two quadraturecomponents which are then biased in proportion to thesine and cosine of the desired phase shift. The signals
are then combined in‑phase to yield desired output.

• Miniaturized: less than 1.5 in3

ACCURACY
Improved phase accuracy and PM/AM performance
are achieved by using double‑balanced bi‑phase linear
amplitude modulators. In the main operating band,overall phase accuracy is better than 12°. The same
phase accuracy can be achieved at the band edges byusing a built‑in frequency correction circuit.
Switching speed is better than 500 nsec.

FREQUENCY TRANSLATION(SERRODYNING)

Phase Shifter Model 7928A

In the design of the Model 7928A special attention
has been paid to those characteristics which affect its
performance as a frequency translator. These include
minimizing PM‑to‑AM conversion, use of high slew rate
drivers, and optimizing phase shift linearity with applied
signal. As a result, carrier and sideband suppression
levels of over 25 and 20 dB, respectively, are obtainedin the main band. The same carrier and sideband
performance can be realized over the full stretch
band when the internal frequency correction circuit isemployed. See Fig. 3 for input control requirements.
On special order, frequency translators can beprovided for operation over reduced bandwidths with
suppression levels of up to 40 dB. Consult the factoryfor such requirements.

Fig. 1–Model 7928A, block diagram

Fig. 2–RF Vector Modulator

165

Model 7928A
Specifications
PHASE SHIFTER SPECIFICATIONSFREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)
Main Band
Stretch Band (3)INSERTION
LOSS (Max.)

VSWR(Max.)

ACCURACY(1)(Max.)

PM/AM(1)(Max.)

12.0 dB

2.0 :1±12°±15°±1.25 dB
± 2.0 dB

8.0-18.0
6.0-18.0

FREQUENCY TRANSLATOR SPECIFICATIONSTRANSLATIONRATE(Min.)CARRIER(1)SUPPRESSION(Min.)

SIDE BAND(1)SUPPRESSION(Min.)INSERTION LOSSVARIATION (Max.)with translation rate of:

0 to 500 kHz(2)Main Band:
25 dB
Stretch Band (3):18 dB

Main Band:
20 dB
Stretch Band (3):15 dB

200 kHz:
1 dB
500 kHz:3 dB(1) When operating as a Phase Shifter outside the Main Band Frequency Range, a TTL Low (0) applied to the J3 Power/Control Connector Freq.
Correction Pin (pin R) will result in Band Edge Frequencies exhibiting enhanced performance characteristics. The resultant Accuracy and
PM/AM specifications will be the same as those shown for the Main Band Frequency Range. When using the unit as a Frequency Translator,
similar enhanced performance can be achieved for Carrier & Sideband Suppression.
(2) All specifications are met using only the five most significant bits for translation rates of 0 to 200 kHz. For translation rates of 201 to 500 kHz,
only 4 most significant bits are used.
(3) Specifications for the Strech Band are typical.

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance
Degradation+
 20 dBm
Survival power+30 dBm
Power Supply
Requirements+ 5V ±5%, 250 mA max+12 to +15V, 50 mA max–12 to –15V, 95 mA max

Phase Shift
Range.......................................... 360° in 256 steps
Variation..................................... 0.1°/°C
Control Input................................. 8 Bit TTL
Switching Speed(50% TTL to within 10° of
Final Phase Value)........................... 500 nsec max
Harmonics...................................... –30 dBc

Fig. 3–Model 7928A Control input requirements.

166Model 7928A
Specifications
ACCESSORY FURNISHEDAVAILABLE OPTIONSMating power/control connector

Option No.	  Description
7	Two SMA male RF connectors
10	One SMA male (J1), and one SMA
female (J2) RF connector
49	High Rel screening

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature
Range...............................­–54°C to +95°C
Non-Operating
Temperature Range.......–65°C to +125°C

G09
G12

Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
RoHS Compliant

NOTE:
To initialized the unit after power up, at least one of the digital bits has to change its
TTL level.

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTMODEL 7928A

PIN FUNCTIONSPINFUNCTIONS

A
B
C
D
E
F
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R

Ground+ 5V–12 to –15V
1.4° (LSB)
2.8°
5.6°
22.5°
11.3°
90°
180° (MSB)+12 to +15V
45°
GND
Freq. Correction
Circuit Select“0” = Band Edge

Model 7928A   Wt. 4.0 oz (113gr.) approx.
Dimensional Tolerances: unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

167

Switches
General Microwave switches cover the frequency range
from 100 MHz to 40 GHz and are available in various
topologies ranging from single‑pole single-throw (SPST)
to single‑pole eight‑throw (SP8T) in both reflective
and non‑reflective configurations, and a Non-reflective
SP16T unit.

SWITCH TOPOLOGY
There are two fundamental methods of connecting PIN
diodes to a transmission line to provide a switching
function: in series with the transmission line so that
RF power is conducted when the PIN diode is forward
biased and reflected when reverse biased; or in shuntwith the transmission line so that the RF power isconducted when the diode is reverse biased andreflected when forward biased. A simple reflective
SPST switch can be designed utilizing one or more PIN
diodes in either configuration as shown in Fig. 1.
A multi‑throw switch essentially consists of a
combination of SPST switches connected to a common
junction and biased so that each switch port can be
enabled individually. The common junction of theswitch must be designed to minimize the resistive168

and reactive loading presented by the OFF ports inorder to obtain low insertion loss and VSWR for the
ON port. There are two basic methods of realizing
a multi‑throw switch common junction for optimum
performance over a broad frequency range. The first
employs series mounted PIN diodes connected to thecommon junction. A path is selected by forward biasing
its series diode and simultaneously reverse biasing all
the other diodes. This provides the desired low‑loss
path for the ON port with a minimum of loading fromthe OFF ports. The second method utilizes shunt
mounted PIN diodes located a quarter wavelength fromthe junction. The diode(s) of the selected ON port isreverse biased while the OFF ports are forward biased
to create a short circuit across the transmission line.
As a result of the quarter wavelength spacing, the shortcircuits are transformed to open circuits at the junction.
By proper choice of transmission line impedancesand minimization of stray reactance it is possible
to construct a switch of this type with low insertion
loss and VSWR over a three to one bandwidth. The
schematic diagrams for both switches are shown in Fig.
2.

Switches
ABSORPTIVE SWITCHES
It is often desirable to have a PIN diode switch present
a low VSWR in its OFF position as well as in its ON
state in order to maintain desired system performance.
General Microwave offers a complete line of single andmulti‑throw absorptive switches which incorporate
50Ω terminations in each of the output ports. Fig. 3
shows the schematic diagrams of the two versions ofabsorptive (also known as Non-reflective or terminated)
switches employed by GMC. The shunt termination
is used in GMC's "all‑series" configured absorptive
switches which have a suffix ending in “T” or “W”. This
style of absorptive switch offers the minimum penalty
in insertion loss due to the addition of the terminating
elements. The series termination is used in GMC's highspeed “series-shunt” configured absorptive switches
since it provides the optimum in switching performance.
The common port of the standard absorptive multithrow switches in the GMC catalog will be reflectivein the special circumstance when all ports are turned
OFF. If there is a need for this port to remain matchedunder these conditions, this can be realized either
by employing an additional port to which an externaltermination is connected or, in a custom design,by providing automatic connection of an internaltermination to the common port.

HARMONIC AND INTERMODULATIONPRODUCTS
All PIN diode switches generate harmonics andinter-modulation products since the PIN diodes arefundamentally non‑linear devices. The magnitude ofthese spurious signals is typically small in a switch
since the diodes are usually either in their saturated
forward biased state or in their reversed biased state.
The physics of the PIN diode cause a cut‑off frequency
phenomena such that the level of harmonics andintermods greatly increase at low frequencies. Theselevels will vary with the minority carrier lifetime of thediode. Thus, a high speed switch operating below
500 MHz may have a second order intercept point of
35 dBm, while a slow switch operating at 8 GHz will
have a second order intercept point of 70 dBm. Typicalperformance is as follows:
TYPICAL SWITCH INTERCEPT POINTSSWITCHFREQUENCY

HIGH SPEED
LOW SPEED

2.0 GHz
2.0 GHz

2nd Order
INTERCEPT+50 dBm+65 dBm

3rd ORDER
INTERCEPT+40 dBm+50 dBm

Since these levels vary significantly with frequency,
switching speed, and RF topology, please consult thefactory for specific needs in this area.

PHASE AND AMPLITUDE MATCHING
Switches are available on a custom basis with phase
and/or amplitude matching. Matching can be either
between ports of a switch, between like ports on
different switches, or a combination of the two. The
uniformity of broadband catalog switches is quite goodand is usually better than ±0.75 dB and ±15 degrees
over the entire operating frequency of the switch.
Please consult the factory for special requirements.

169

Switches
VIDEO LEAKAGE
Video leakage refers to the spurious signals present at the
RF ports of the switch when it is switched without an RF
signal present. These signals arise from the waveforms
generated by the switch driver and, in particular, fromthe leading edge voltage spike required for high speed
switching of PIN diodes. When measured in a 50 ohm
system, the magnitude of the video leakage can be as muchas several volts. The frequency content is concentrated in
the band below 200 MHz although measurable levels forhigh speed switches are observed as high as 6.0 GHz. The
magnitude of the out of band video leakage can be reduced
significantly by the inclusion of high pass or “video filters” (1)in the switch. The General Microwave E-series switches are
specially designed for low in-band video leakage, without
sacrificing switching speed.

POWER HANDLINGThe power handling of PIN diode switches isdependent on the RF topology, forward and reverse
biasing levels, and speed of the switch. This catalog
addresses both the maximum operating power levels
and the survival limits of the components. Maximum
operating limits are usually set at the power level
which will cause the reversed biased diodes tobegin conduction and thereby degrade the insertion
loss, VSWR, or isolation of the switch. The survival
power limits are based on the maximum ratingsof the semiconductors in the switch. For special
applications, significantly higher operational power
levels can be provided, particularly for narrow bandrequirements. Please consult the factory for specificapplications.

(1) For switches with internal video filters, specify Option 41, Option
42, or Option 43. These filters reduce the leakage as shown in thefollowing chart.

VIDEO LEAKAGE FILTER OPTIONSApplicability: F91 and G91 Switch Series
Peak (mV)
100 max     Video Leakage with Video Filter Options:

Bandwidth (MHz)100

INSERTION LOSS DEGRADATION
Option41

Affected Ports
Common Port Only

42

Output Ports Only

43

All Ports

Option41, 42, 43

Affected Ports
All Ports

Frequency
1-12.4 GHz
12.4-18 GHz
1-12.4 GHz
12.4-18 GHz
1-12.4 GHz
12.4-18 GHz

Additional IL
0.1 dB
0.2 dB
0.1 dB
0.2 dB
0.2 dB
0.4 dBVSWR DEGRADATION
Frequency
1-4 GHz
4-18 GHz

VSWR
1.7 :1*
No Change* As shown for switches whose VSWR specification from 1‑4 GHz is less than 1.7.
No change for switches whose VSWR specification from 1‑4 GHz is 1.7 or greater.

OPTION 55 – EXTENDED FREQUENCIES
When Option 55 is applicable, a switch in our catalog that covers 1-18 GHz can be modified
to cover 0.5 to 18 GHz with following specification changes:. 1. Specification for insertion loss and isolation from 0.5 to 1.0 GHz is the same as the 1
to 2 GHz specification.
VSWR degrades to 2.0:1.
2. Insertion loss in the 12.4 to 18 GHz band increases by 0.3 dB. Consult factory for
cost.

170

Fall Time is the time between the 90% and 10% pointsof the square‑law detected RF power when the unit isswitched from full ON to full OFF.

DEFINITION OF PARAMETERS
INSERTION LOSS is the maximum loss measured in a
50 ohm system when only a single port of the switch isin the ON state.
ISOLATION is the ratio of the power level when theswitch port is ON to the power level measured when theswitch port is OFF. In a multi‑throw switch the isolationis measured with one of the other ports turned ON andterminated in 50 ohms.
VSWR is defined for the input and output ports of theselected ON path. For those switches with a “T”, “W” or“HT” suffix, the VSWR is also defined for the OFF state.
SWITCHING SPEED)2(
Port-To-Port Switching is the interval from the time
the RF power level at the off-going port drops to 90% of
its original value to the time the TF power lrvrl in the ongoing port rises to 90% of its final value. See Fig. 4

On Time is measured from the 50% level of the input
control signal to the 90% point of the square‑law
detected RF power when the unit is switched from full
OFF to full ON.
Off Time is measured from the 50% level of the input
control signal to the 10% point of the square‑law
detected RF power when the unit is switched from full
ON to full OFF.
In addition to the above definitions, the following
information about switching performance may be usefulto the system designer.
Switching To Isolation – Although catalog switching
speed specifications are usually defined to the 10%
level of detected RF (equivalent to 10 dB isolation), theuser of a switch may be more interested in the time theswitch requires to reach rated isolation. This latter timeis strongly dependent on the topology of the switch.
For all‑shunt mounted or combination series and shunt
mounted topologies, the time to reach final isolation
is usually less than twice the fall time. For an all‑series
topology, the time to reach final isolation may be as
much as ten times the fall time.

(2) For a unit without an integrated driver, the specifications apply toconditions when it is driven by an appropriately shaped switching
waveform.

Switching To Insertion Loss – For multi‑throwswitches, the ON time depends on whether theswitch is being operated in a commutating or single
port mode. In the former mode, switching speed isslower than in the latter due to the loading effect at
the junction of the port turning OFF. All switching
speed measurements at GMC are performed in thecommutating mode.

Rise Time is measured between the 10% and 90%
points of the square‑law detected RF power when theunit is switched from full OFF to full ON. See Fig. 5.

171

SwitchSelection Guide
SWITCHES WITH INTEGRATED DRIVERSFREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)0.1 0.2 0.5 1

2

4

8

12.4

18

40

MODEL ORSERIESPAGECOMMENTSREFLECTIVE SPST SWITCHES
0.1

401

18

0.2

4
1

18
18

40

F9016
F91
F9214A
E9114H
F90

180

Wide Frequency Range

182

Miniature broadband

275
338

Hermetically sealed,
Millimeter Wave

NON-REFLECTIVE SPST SWITCHES
0.2

F192A

18

177

Ultra-broadband

REFLECTIVE SP2T SWITCHES
0.1

401

18

0.2

4
1.5

F9025
F91, G91
F91AH
F92, G92

189
193

Wide Frequency Range
Miniature broadband
Miniature broadband, high-speed
Miniature broadband

4.5
3

F892

191

Octave-brand, high-speed

E9120H
F90

278
340

Hermetically sealed,
Millimeter Wave

9
6

18

1

18
18

40

NON-REFLECTIVE SP2T AND TRANSFER SWITCHES
2

1

21

F9321T

18

F91T, F91W,
G91T, G91W
F91AHT

0.2

4
0.5

18
1

18

F92T, G92T
F940H
E9120HT

186

Phase and Amplitude matched
Miniature broadband

196
272
278

Miniature broadband, high-speed
Miniature broadband
Broadband transfer switch
Hermetically sealed,

REFLECTIVE SP3T SWITCHES
1
0.2

18
4

1

18

F91, G91
F91AH
F92, G92
E9130H

202
282

Miniature broadband
Miniature broadband, high-speed
Miniature broadband
Hermetically sealed, lNON-REFLECTIVE SP3T SWITCHES
1		

18

F91T, F91W,
G91T, G92W
F91AHT

0.2

4
1

18

F92T, G92T
E9130HT

172

Miniature broadband
202
282

Miniature broadband, high-speed
Miniature broadband
Hermetically sealed,SwitchSelection Guide (Cont.)
SWITCHES WITH INTEGRATED DRIVERS (cont.)
FREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)
0.1

0.2

0.5

1

2

4

8

12.4

18

40

MODEL ORSERIESPAGECOMMENTSREFLECTIVE SP4T SWITCHES
1

F91, G91
F91AH
F92, G92
E9140H

18

0.2

4
1

18

204
286

Miniature broadband
Miniature broadband, high-speed
Miniature broadband
Hermetically sealed,

NON-REFLECTIVE SP4T SWITCHES
2

21

1

F91

18

0.2

F92T, G92T

4
1
6

210
206

Phase and Amplitude matched
Miniature broadband

18

E9140HT

286

Hermetically sealed, low video leakage

18

2578

213

Low-cost

F9043-C36

342

Output ports all on one side

F9044

344

Miniature broadband

2600

216

Output ports all on one side- 36
26 -4032

1F9341T

18

REFLECTIVE SP5T SWITCHES
1

F91, G91

18

0.2

F92, G92

4
0.5

ER-2260-UK

18

219

Miniature broadband

290

Hermetically Sealed

NON-REFLECTIVE SP5T SWITCHES
1

F91T, F91W, G91T,
G91W

18

0.2

F92T, G92T

4

219

Miniature broadband

REFLECTIVE SP6T SWITCHES
1

F91, G91

18

0.2

F92, G92

4
0.5

FR-2260-UK

18

223

Miniature broadband

293

Hermetically Sealed

NON-REFLECTIVE SP6T SWITCHES
2

21

1
0.2

18

F92T, G92T

4
1

F9361T
F91T, F91W, G91T,
G91W

18

2629

227

Phase and Amplitude matched

223

Miniature broadband

230

Output ports all on one side

REFLECTIVE SP7T SWITCHES
1
0.2

18
4

F91, G91
F92, G92

173

234

Miniature broadband

SwitchSelection Guide (Cont.)
SWITCHES WITH INTEGRATED DRIVERS (cont.)
FREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)
0.1

0.2

0.5

1

2

4

8

12.4

18

40

MODEL ORSERIESCOMMENTSPAGE

NON-REFLECTIVE SP7T SWITCHES
1

18

0.2

F91T, F91W, G91T, G91W
F92T, G92T

4

234

Miniature broadband

238

Low-cost broadband

REFLECTIVE SP8T SWITCH
1

18

F9180

NON-REFLECTIVE SP8T SWITCH
1

18

F9180W

238

Low-cost broadband

1182553-B90

241

Phase & Amp. Matched

NON-REFLECTIVE SP9T SWITCH
8

IA2470-XO

12

244

NON-REFLECTIVE SP10T SWITCH
6

18

1
0.02

18
2

2553-B39

247

KA-2970-LK

253

KA-2060-VV

250

Phase & Amp. Matched

NON-REFLECTIVE SP12T SWITCH
6

18

2553-B48256

Phase & Amp. Matched

NON-REFLECTIVE SP13T SWITCH
5.5

7.5

5.5

7.5

5.5

7.5

NA-2750-CO

259

NON-REFLECTIVE SP14T SWITCHOA-2750-CO

262

NON-REFLECTIVE SP15T SWITCH
PA-2750-CO

265

NON-REFLECTIVE SP16T SWITCHES
0.5

PA16066
1

PA161818

270

Amplitude and Phase Matched

268

Broadband

REFLECTIVE SP16T SWITCHES
2

18

1744

174

SwitchSelection Guide (Cont.)
SWITCHES WITHOUT INTEGRATED DRIVERSFREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)
0.1  0.2  0.5  1   
2  4   8  12.4

18    40

MODEL ORSERIESPAGECOMMENTSREFLECTIVE SPST SWITCHES
1
0.2

91

18

9214

4
18

90

40

182

Miniature broadband

338

Millimeter Wave

REFLECTIVE SP2T SWITCHES
1

91

18

91AH
0.2

92

4

0.1

Miniature broadband
195

2677

20

Miniature broadband, high-speed
Miniature broadband

200

Wide BandNON-REFLECTIVE SP2T SWITCHES
91T, 91W
1

91AHT
0.2

Miniature broadband

18

195

92T

4

Miniature broadband, high-speed
Miniature broadband

REFLECTIVE SP3T SWITCHES
91
1

91AH
0.2

Miniature broadband

18

202

92

4

Miniature broadband, high-speed
Miniature broadband

NON-REFLECTIVE SP3T SWITCHES
91T, 91W
1

91AHT
0.2

Miniature broadband

18

202

92T

4

Miniature broadband, high-speed
Miniature broadband

REFLECTIVE SP4T SWITCHES
91
1

18

91AH
0.2

Miniature broadband
206

92

4

Miniature broadband, high-speed
Miniature broadband

NON-REFLECTIVE SP4T SWITCHES
91T, 91W
1

91AHT
0.2

Miniature broadband

18

206

Miniature broadband

92T

4

Miniature broadband, high-speed

REFLECTIVE SP5T SWITCHES
1
0.2

91

18

92

4

219

Miniature broadband

NON-REFLECTIVE SP5T SWITCHES
1
0.2

18

91T, 91W
92T

4

175

219

Miniature broadband

SwitchSelection Guide (Cont.)
SWITCHES WITHOUT INTEGRATED DRIVERS (cont.)
FREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)
0.1  0.2  0.5  1   
2  4   8  12.4

18    40

MODEL ORSERIESPAGECOMMENTSREFLECTIVE SP6T SWITCHES
1
0.2

91
92

18
4

223

Miniature broadband

NON-REFLECTIVE SP6T SWITCHES
1
0.2

18
4

91T, 91W
92T

223

Miniature broadband

REFLECTIVE SP7T SWITCHES
1
0.2

91
92

18
4

234

Miniature broadband

NON-REFLECTIVE SP7T SWITCHES
1
0.2

18
4

91T, 91W
92T

176

234

Miniature broadband

Model F192A Non-Reflective
Ultra-Broadband High-Speed SPST Switch
The Model F192A is a high‑speed non‑reflective PIN
diode SPST switch with integrated driver. Operatingover the instantaneous frequency range from 0.2 to 18
GHz, it provides a minimum isolation of 80 dB from 0.5
to 18 GHz, and 70 dB below 0.5 GHz. The RF design
consists of an arrangement of shunt and series diodes
in a microstrip integrated circuit transmission line asshown in the schematic diagram below.

• High speed• 0.2 to 18 GHz frequency range• 80 dB isolation• Non-reflective• Low VSWR and insertion loss• Small size, light weight

The currents required to switch the unit ON or OFF andsimultaneously maintain a bilateral 50‑ohm impedance
match in both states are provided by the integrated
driver, which is controlled by an external logic signal.

Switch Model F192A

177

Model F192A
SPECIFICATIONSPERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSFREQUENCY (GHz)CHARACTERISTIC

0.2
to
0.5

0.5
to
2.0

2.0
to
8.0

8.0
to
12.4

12.4
to
18.0

Min Isolation (dB)Max Insertion Loss (dB)
VSWR (ON and OFF)

70
2.0
1.5

80
2.0
1.5

80
2.5
1.75

80
3.0
2.0

80
3.5
2.0

Switching Speed
Rise Time............................ 10 nsec. max.
Fall Time.............................. 10 nsec. max.
ON Time.............................. 30 nsec. max.
OFF Time............................ 15 nsec. max.
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance  Degradation.................... 500 mW cw or peak
Survival Power.................... 1W average, 10W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)Power Supply Requirements+5V ±5%, 90 mA–12V ±5%, 75 mA
Control Characteristics
Control Input  Impedance...................... TTL, advanced Schottky,
one-unit load. (A unit load
is 0.6 mA sink current and20 µA source current.)
Control Logic...................... Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V)
for switch ON and logic“1” (+2.0 to +5.0V) for
switch OFF.

178

Model F192A
SPECIFICATIONSOPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature
Range.......................... ­–54°C to +110°C
Non-Operating Temperature
Range.......................... –65°C to +125°C
Humidity......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock.............................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06" double
amplitude or 15G, whichever is
less)
Altitude........................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, 5 cycles* Special order products. Consult factory before ordering. In addition,
consult factory for full specifications and availability.

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
3
SMA female control connector
7	Two SMA male RF connectors
9	Inverse control logic; logic “1” for switch
ON and logic “0” for switch OFF
10	One SMA male (J1) and one SMA female(J2) RF connector
33	EMI filter solder-type control terminal
48+5V, –15V operation
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant
5004*	Video Filters. RF operating band
restricted to 6-18 GHz.
		Leakage 50 mV P-P into a 300 MHz
bandwidth.
		Option 5004 includes Options 9 and 33. If
Option 5004 is desired and Option 9 and/or 33 are not, consult factory.
893*
Video Filters. RF band 0.5-2 GHz.
		Leakage 100 mV P-P into 100 MHz
bandwidth.
5037*	Video Filters. RF band 2-18 GHz.
		
Leakage 100 mV. P-P into 100 MHz
bandwidth.

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

179

Model F9016
0.1 to 40 GHz SPST Switch
Model F9016
General Microwave introduces the Model F9016 ultrabroadband, Reflective SPST Switch operating over afrequency range of 100 MHz to 40 GHz.

• 0.1 to 40 GHz FREQUENCY RANGE• LOW VSWR and INSERTION LOSS 

Applications include ultra-wide band Test, Receiving
and EW Systems

Model F9016

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSFREQUENCY (GHz)
MODEL NO.

CHARACTERISTIC

0.1-4

4-18

18-26.5

26.5-40

F9016

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

65
2.3
2.0

65
2.9
2.3

60
3.5
2.5

50
5.0
2.5

SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
Switching Time.....................250 nsec max.

POWER HANDLING CAPABILITY

Without Performance  Degradation................. 200mW cw or peak

POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS.................................................+5V ±2%, 60 mA max.
–15V ±5%, 50 mA max.

CONTROL CHARACTERISTICS
Control Input
Impedance.........................TTL, advanced Schottky,
one unit load. (A unit load
is 0.6 mA sink current and20 µA source current.)
Control Logic.........................Logic “0” (0 to +0.8V) for
switch ON and Logic “1”(+2.0 to +5.0V) for switch
OFF.

180

Model F9016
0.1 to 40 GHz SPST Switch
AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant
G16
RoHS Plus REACH Compliant

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

Weight 1.06 oz (30 gr.) approx.
Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

181

Series 91 and 92
Miniature Broadband SPST Switches
SERIES 91 AND 92• Frequency range (Series 91):
1 to 18 GHz

Series 91 and 92 switches provide high performance
characteristics over a multi‑octave range. Series 91
models cover the frequency range of 1 to 18 GHz, while
Series 92 models cover the range from 0.2 to 4.0 GHz.
These miniature switches measure only 0.75 x 0.69 x
0.38 inches.
Both series use an integrated circuit assembly of up to
four PIN diodes mounted in a microstrip transmission
line. The circuit configuration is shown below.

• Frequency range (Series 92):
0.2 to 4 GHz• Low VSWR and insertion loss• Up to 80 dB isolation• Less than 10 nsec rise and fall time• Miniature size, light weight

Switch Model
F9114AUNITS WITH
INTEGRATEDDRIVERS

Switch Model
F9214A

Application of a positive current to the bias terminal
switches the unit OFF since the diodes are biased toa low resistance value. With zero or negative voltage
at the bias terminal, the diodes are biased to highresistances and the unit is switched ON. Maximum riseand fall times are less than 10 nsec.

SERIES F91 AND F92
The Series F91 and F92 switches are the same as thecorresponding Series 91 and 92 models except theunits are equipped with integrated drivers, and thedimensions of the units are 0.75 x 0.75 x 0.38 inches.
The proper current required to switch the unit ON or
OFF is provided by the integral driver which requires +5
and –12 to –15 volt power supplies and is controlled by
an external logic signal.

Switch Model
9114

DRIVERLESS
UNITS

Switch Model
9112

182

Series 91 and 92 SPST Switches
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSFREQUENCY (GHz)
MODEL NO.(1)CHARACTERISTIC

0.2
to
0.5

0.5
to
1.0

1.0
to
2.0

2.0
to
4.0

4.0
to
8.0

8.0
to
12.4

12.4
to
18.0

9112*, F9112A*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

–
–
–

–
–
–

36
0.8
1.3

40
0.8
1.3

45
0.9
1.6

45
1.1
1.75

45
1.8
1.75

9114, F9114A

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

–
–
–

–
–
–

60
0.9
1.4

74
0.9
1.4

80
1.0
1.75

80
1.6
1.75

80
2.5
2.0

9214*, F9214A

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

40
1.0
1.5

45
1.0
1.5

50
1.0
1.5

50
1.0
1.5

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

*Special-order product. Consult factory before ordering.

Power Handling Capability
Without Performance Degradation  Without integrated
drivers...................... 1W cw or peak(3)  With integrated
drivers...................... 1W cw or peak
Survival Power............. 2W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width

9112, F9112A
9114, F9114A
Switching Speed(2)Rise Time..................... 10 nsec max
Fall Time....................... 10 nsec max
ON Time(4)..................... 20 nsec max
OFF Time(4)................... 20 nsec max
Repetition Rate(4)......... 20 MHz max

Control Characteristics

9214, F9214A
Switching Speed(2)Rise Time..................... 10 nsec max
Fall Time....................... 10 nsec max
ON Time(4)..................... 40 nsec max
OFF Time(4)................... 40 nsec max
Repetition Rate(4)......... 10 MHz max

Control Input
Impedance................ TTL, two-unit load. (A unit load
is 1.6 mA sink current and 40µA source current.
Control Logic............... Logic “0” (–3.0 to +0.8V) for
switch ON and logic “1” (+2.0
to +5.0V) for switch OFF.

Power Supply Requirements
Driverless Units
For rated isolation:+35 mAFor rated insertion loss: –10V
Units With Integrated Drivers+5V ±5%, 65 mA–12 to –15V, 20 mA(1) Models prefixed with “F” are equipped with integrated TTL-compatible drivers; models without the “F” prefix are
current-controlled units and are furnished without drivers.
(2) For driverless units, shaped current pulses must be provided by the user.
(3) 2W cw or peak with –20V back bias.
(4) ON and OFF time and repetition rate specifications are only applicable to Series F91 and F92 units.

183

Series 91 and 92 SPST Switches
Specifications
OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature
Range.......................... ­–54°C to +110°C
Non-Operating Temperature
Range.......................... –65°C to +125°C
Humidity................................ MIL-STD-202F, Method
103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at
95%)
Shock..................................... MIL-STD-202F, Method
213B, Cond. B (75G, 6
msec)
Vibration................................ MIL-STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06"double amplitude or 15G,
whichever is less)Altitude.................................. MIL-STD-202F, Method
105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling....................... MIL-STD-202F, Method
107D, Cond. A, 5 cycles

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
3
SMA female bias/control connector
7	Two SMA male RF connectors
9	Inverse control logic; logic “0” forswitch OFF, logic “1” for switch ON(Not applicable to Series 91/92)
10	One SMA male (J1) and one SMA
female (J2) RF connector
33	EMI filter solder-type bias/control
terminal
	 41*Internal video filter, port J1 only
	 42*Internal video filter, port J2 only
	 43*	Internal video filter, both ports
55	Frequency range 0.5 to 18 GHz. See
page 143.
64A
SMB male bias/control connector
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant* Not applicable to Models 9214 and F9214. See Video Filter Options on page 143.

184

Series 91 and 92 SPST Switches
Specifications

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

185Model F9321T SPDT
Phase & Amplitude Matched Switch
MODEL F9321T
Model F9321T is a low cost high-performanceterminated SPDT switch that operates over the fullinstantaneous bandwidth of 2 to 21 GHz with ON and
OFF times of 100 nsec. Design features include an
integrated circuit assembly of PIN diodes mounted in a
microstrip transmission line.
The Model F9321T has all of the output ports on one
side while maintaining Amplitude and Phase matching
between all output ports.
The Model F9321T is equipped with an integrated driverthat is powered by +5 and –12 volt supplies. The proper
currents required to switch the ports ON or OFF areprovided by the driver, which is controlled by external
logic signals.

• Frequency range: 2 to 21 GHz• Isolation: 45 dB• In-line outputs• Phase and amplitude matched• Non-reflective

186

Model F9321T SPDT
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
CHARACTERISTICSPECIFICATIONFREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)2-21

MIN. ISOLATION (dB)

45

MAX. INSERTION LOSS (dB)

4.0

MAX. VSWR (ON/OFF)

2.5

Phase & Amplitude Matching
Amplitude Matching .............1 dB Typical
Phase Matching ...................12 Deg. Typical
Switching TimeON time............................500 nsec max.
OFF time..........................500 nsec max.
Power Handling Capability Without Performance
Degradation
OFF port 100 mW cw or peak
ON port 1W cw or peak
Survival PowerOFF port 1W average, 10W
peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)
ON port 1W average, 75W
peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)

Control Characteristics
Control Input
Impedance.......................TTL, advanced Schottky, one
unit load. (A unit load is 0.6
mA sink current and 20 µA
source current.)
Control Logic...................Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V) forPort “ON”
Logic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0V) forPort “OFF”.
Power Supply Requirements+5V ±5%, 80 mA max–12V to -15V 50 mA max

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature Range................. –54°C to +110°C
Non-Operating Temperature Range........ –65°C to +125°C
Humidity....................................................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock............................................................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration....................................................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D,
Cond. B (.06" double amplitude or
15G, whichever is less)Altitude......................................................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling.............................................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, 5 cycles

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

187

Model F9321T SPDT
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

188Model F9025
0.1 to 40 GHz SPDT Switch
Model F9025
General Microwave introduces the Model F9025 ultrabroadband, Reflective SPDT Switch operating over afrequency range of 100 MHz to 40 GHz.

• 0.1 to 40 GHz FREQUENCY RANGE• LOW VSWR and INSERTION LOSS 

Applications include ultra-wide band Test, Receiving
and EW Systems.

Model F9025

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSFREQUENCY (GHz)
MODEL NO.

CHARACTERISTIC

0.1-4

4-18

18-26.5

26.5-40

F9025

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

70
2.6
2.0

60
3.2
2.3

55
3.8
2.5

40
5.3
2.5

SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
Switching Time.....................250 nsec max.

POWER HANDLING CAPABILITY

Without Performance  Degradation................. 200mW cw or peak

POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS

CONTROL CHARACTERISTICS
Control Input
Impedance.........................TTL, advanced Schottky,
one unit load. (A unit load
is 0.6 mA sink current and20 µA source current.)
Control Logic.........................Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V)
for switch ON and Logic“1” (+2.0 to +5.0V) for
switch OFF.

.................................................+5V ±2%, 75 mA max–15V ±5%, 50 mA max

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

189

Model F9025
0.1 to 40 GHz SPDT Switch
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

190

Series F892
High-Speed Octave-Band SP2T Switches• Low Cost

SERIES F892

• S, C and X‑U band models• Up to 60 dB isolation

Series F892 high speed switches with integrated
drivers are low‑cost units that have been engineered tomeet the need of microwave system designers for fastswitching devices in small packages.

• As low as 1.0 dB insertion loss

2 To 18 GHz Frequency Range• 10 nsec rise and fall times

Frequency coverage from 2 to 18 GHz is provided by
the three models in the Series: Model F8922 (2‑4 GHz),
Model F8924 (4‑8 GHz) and Model F8928 (8‑18GHz). Each model is capable of extended bandwidth
operation, typically 3:1, with only moderate degradationin performance at the band edges, as shown in thespecifications on page 102.

Fast Switching Shunt Design
Switch Model F8928

All models are optimally designed, with respect to theirsize, for low VSWR and insertion loss. As shown inthe schematic below, a pure shunt design is used forthe most practical realization of fast switching action.
Although the use of a pure shunt mode imposes certain
bandwidth limitations, frequency coverage in excess ofoctave bands has been maintained.

Switch Model F8924

The proper currents required to switch ports ON or
OFF are provided by the integrated drivers which arecontrolled by external logic signals.

Switch Model F8922
THESE THREE UNITSARE EQUIPPED WITH
INTEGRATED DRIVERS

191

Series F892
High-Speed Octave-Band SP2T Switches
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL
NO.
F8922*
F8924*
F8928

FREQUENCY
RANGE
(GHz)

INSERTION
LOSS, MAX.
(dB)

ISOLATION
MIN.
(dB)

VSWR
MAX.
(ON)

2-4

1.0

60

1.5

1.5-4.5

2.0

55

2.0

4-8

1.4

50

1.5

3-9

2.3

45

2.2

8-18

2.3

  45

(1)

2.2

6-18

2.5

  45(1)

2.5*Special-order product. Consult factory before ordering.

Switching Characteristics
Rise Time.......................10 nsec max.
Fall Time.........................10 nsec max.
ON Time.........................35 nsec max.
OFF Time.......................30 nsec max.
Repetition rate...............10 MHz max.
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance  Degradation...............2W cw or peak(2)Survival Power...............2W average, 75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)

Control Characteristics
Control Input
Impedance...................Schottky TTL, one-unit load. (A unit load is 2.0 mA sinkcurrent and 50 µA source current.)
Control logic....................Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V) for port ON and logic “1” (+2.0
to +5.0V) for port OFF.

Power Supply Requirements(For one port ON)..........+5V ±5%, 65 mA–12 to –15V(2), 20 mA(1) Isolation 40 dB above 16 GHz.
(2) With –15V power supply. Reduces to 1.5W with –12V power supply. Units may be operated at higher input power levels someincrease in switching time when –30V power supply is used. (consult factory for this optio)

192

Series F892
SP2T Switches Specifications
OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature
Range.......................... ­–54°C to +110°C
Non-Operating Temperature
Range.......................... –65°C to +125°C
Humidity...........................MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock................................MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration...........................MIL-STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06" double
amplitude or 15G, whicheveris less)
Altitude.............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling..................MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, 5 cycles

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
3
SMA female control connectors
7	SMA male RF connectors
7A
J1 SMA male; J2 and J3 SMA female
7B
J1 SMA female; J2 and J3 SMA male
9	Inverse control logic; logic “0” for port
OFF and logic “1” for port ON
27	Single-port toggle control; logic “0”connects J1 to J2
62	±15V operation
64	SMC male control connectors
64A
SMB male control connectors
65±12V operation
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

193

Series F892
SP2T Switches Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTSMODEL F8922
Wt: 1.5 oz. (43 gr.) approx.

MODEL F8924
Wt: 1 oz. (28 gr.) approx.

MODEL F8928
Wt: 1 oz. (28 gr.) approx.

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

194Series 91 and 92
Miniature Broadband SP2T Switches
MODELS 9120T‑500, 9120W‑500
AND 9220T‑500• Frequency range (Series 91): 1 to 18 GHz• Frequency range (Series 92): 0.2 to 4 GHz

These switches are non‑reflective versions of theswitches described above. They are constructed in theconfiguration configuration shown below.

• Rise and fall times as fast as 10 nsec• Reflective and Non-reflective models• Low VSWR and insertion loss• Miniature size, light weight

Switch Model
9120-55-33(DRIVERLESS)(1) SERIES 91W UNITS ARE CONSTRUCTEDWITH THREE SERIES DIODES

Switch Model
F9120(WITH INTEGRATEDDRIVER)

Series 91T, 92T and 91W schematic diagram

When positive current is applied, the port is OFF since
the associated series diodes are back‑biased to a highresistance. At the same time, the corresponding shunt
diode is biased to a low resistance, and the impedanceat the port is then effectively that of the 50 ohm resistor
in series with the shunt diode. When applying negative
current, the converse conditions are established andthe port is ON.
Note that when all output ports are OFF, a high VSWR
will be present at the common port.

MODELS 9120‑500 AND 9220‑500
These switches provide high‑performance
characteristics over a multi‑octave frequency range.
Model 9120‑500 covers the frequency range of 1 to
18 GHz; Model 9220‑500 covers the frequency rangeof 0.2 to 4 GHz. Both models use an integrated circuitassembly of a series‑shunt configuration of PIN diodes
mounted in a microstrip transmission line as shown
below.

MODEL 9120AH‑500
This switch has the same circuit topology as the9120‑500 except it is equipped with high‑speed diodes
to achieve rise and fall times of 10 nsec.

MODEL 9120AHT‑500
This switch is similar to the 9120AH‑500 except it
includes a terminating network as shown below.
      

Series 91 and 92 schematic diagram ! #" $&%'()*,+.-0/ '1#/ +)243 +*Model 9120AHT-500 schematic diagram

Port Control
By applying positive current to a bias terminal, theassociated port is OFF since the corresponding shunt
diodes are biased to a low resistance and the series
diode to a high resistance. With negative current at thebias terminal, the converse conditions are establishedand the port is ON. Since bias terminals are individuallyavailable for both ports, the user has the option of any
combination of ports ON or OFF.

195

SERIES F91/F92
The Series F91/F92 units are the same as the Series
91/92 units except they are equipped with integrated
drivers that are powered by +5 and –12 to –15V
supplies. The proper currents required to switch theports ON or OFF are provided by the drivers, which arecontrolled by external control signals. Standard units
are wired so that a port is ON with the application of alogic “0” control signal.

Series 91 and 92
Miniature Broadband SP2T Switches
SERIES G91 and G92
Operating from +5 and +15V power supplies only,
the G‑series switches provide high performance
characteristics at relatively high speeds over multioctave frequency ranges. The series includes low
insertion loss and high isolation models in bothreflective and non‑reflective configurations. Series G91
units cover the frequency range of 1 to 18 GHz; Series
G92 units cover the frequency range of 0.2 to 4 GHz.
The design is based on an integrated circuit assemblyof PIN diodes mounted in a microstrip transmission line
as shown below. The currents required to switch theports ON or OFF are provided by the integrated driver,which is controlled by external TTL logic signals.

• Frequency range (Series G91):
1 to 18 GHz• Frequency range (Series G92):
0.2 to 4 GHz• Reflective and non-reflective models• Low VSWR and insertion loss
• Up to 60 dB isolation• Positive DC supplies only
• Miniature size, light weight

Switch Model G9120

SERIES G91T/G92T and G91W
These switches are non‑reflective versions of theswitches described above.

196

Series 91 and 92 SP2T Switches
Specifications
MODEL
NO.(1)

CHARACTERISTIC

9120-500*
F9120

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)
G9120*
Max. VSWR (ON)9220-500*
Min. Isolation (dB)
F9220*
Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)
G9220*
Max. VSWR (ON)9120T-500*
Min. Isolation (dB)
F9120T
Max. Insertion Loss (dB)
G9120T*
Max. VSWR (ON or OFF)
9220T-500*
Min. Isolation (dB)
F9220T*
Max. Insertion Loss (dB)
G9220T*
Max. VSWR (ON or OFF)9120W-500*
Min. Isolation (dB)
F9120W
Max. Insertion Loss (dB)
G9120W*
Max. VSWR (ON or OFF)
9120AH-500* Min. Isolation (dB)
F9120AH
Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)9120AHT-500* Min. Isolation (dB)
F9120AHT
Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)Max. VSWR (OFF)

0.2-1
–
–
–
–
–
–
60
1.5
1.5
60
1.8
1.5
–
–
–
60
1.3
1.5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

1-2
60
1.1
1.75
60
1.8
1.5
60
1.5
1.5
60
1.8
1.5
50
1.2
1.5
60
1.3
1.5
60
1.8
1.5
60
1.1
1.75
60
1.3
1.75
1.75

FREQUENCY (GHz)
2-4
4-8
60
60
1.1
1.4
1.75
1.75
60
60
1.8
1.8
1.5
1.7
60
–
1.5
–
1.5
–
60
–
1.8
–
1.5
–
50
50
1.2
1.5
1.5
1.7
60
–
1.3
–
1.5
–
60
60
1.8
1.8
1.7
1.7
60
60
1.1
1.4
1.75
1.75
60
60
1.3
1.7
1.75
1.9
1.75
2.0

8-12.4
60
2.0
1.75
60
2.2
1.7
–
–
–
–
–
–
45
1.5
1.7
–
–
–
60
2.2
2.0
60
2.0
1.75
60
2.5
2.0
2.2

12.4-18
50
2.5
2.0
50
2.5
2.0
–
–
–
–
–
–
40
2.2
2.0
–
–
–
55
2.5
2.0
50
2.5
2.0
50
3.0
2.0
2.3

*Special-order product. Consult factory before ordering.

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

Survival Power
Units without “T” or “W” suffix: 1W average,   75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)
Units with “T” or “W” suffix   Input to any “OFF” port: 1W average    10W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to any “ON” port: 1W average,    75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to common port: 1W average    75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)Power Handling Capability
Without Performance Degradation
Units without “T” or “W” suffix: 1W cw or peak
Units with “T” or “W” suffix   Input to any “OFF” port: 100 mW cw or peak   Input to any “ON” port: 1W cw or peak   Input to common port: 1W cw or peak(1) Models prefixed with “F” or “G” are equipped with integrated TTL-compatible drivers; models without the “F” or “G” prefix are currentcontrolled units and are furnished without drivers; models suffixed with “T” or “W” are non-reflective except a high VSWR will be present at
the common port if all other ports are OFF; models suffixed with “H” are high-speed units.

197

Series 91 and 92 SP2T Switches
Specifications
Switching Characteristics(1)Control Characteristics

SERIES 91/F91/G91
Units without “H” suffix
ON time...................................... 250 nsec max.
OFF time.................................... 250 nsec max.
Units with “H” suffix
Rise time.................................... 10 nsec max.
Fall time...................................... 10 nsec max.
ON time...................................... 25 nsec max.
OFF time.................................... 20 nsec max.
Repetition rate........................... 20 MHz max.
SERIES 92/F92/G92
ON time...................................... 500 nsec max.
OFF time.................................... 500 nsec max.

SERIES 91/92/F91/F92
Units With Integrated Drivers
Control Input Impedance
Units without “H” suffix...... TTL, low power Schottky,
one unit load. (A unit load
is 0.8 mA sink current and40 µA source current.)
Units with “H” suffix........... TTL, advanced Schottky,
one unit load. (A unit load
is 0.6 mA sink current and20 µA source current.)
Control Logic........................ Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V)
for port ON and logic “1”(+2.0 to +5.0 V) for port
OFF.
SERIES G91/G92
Control Input Impedance... Schottky TTL, one unitload. (A unit load is 2.0
mA sink current and 50 µA
source current.)
Control Logic........................ Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V)
for port ON and logic “1”(+2.0 to +5.0 V) for port
OFF.

Power Supply Requirements
SERIES 91/92/F91/F92
Driverless Units
Bias current required at each port for rated isolation andinsertion loss.
  PORT OFF    Units without “H” suffix..... +50 mA    Units with “H” suffix.......... +30 mA  PORT ON    Units without “H” suffix..... –50 mA    Units with “H” suffix.......... –35 mA
Units With Integrated Drivers(For one port ON)+5V ± 5%
–12 to –15V
Units Without“H” Suffix

65 mA

65 mA

Units With
“H” Suffix

60 mA

50 mA

Units With“HT” Suffix

80 mA

50 mA

SERIES G91/G92(For one Port ON)+5V ±5%, 100 mA+15V ±5%, 30 mA(1) For driverless units, shaped current pulses must be provided by user.

198

Series 91 and 92 SP2T Switches
Specifications
ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGSAVAILABLE OPTIONS

Temperature Range
Option No.	  Description
Units With Integrated Drivers
3
SMA female bias/control connectors  Operating..................–54°C to +110°C
7	J1, J2 and J3 SMA male  Non-Operating.........–65°C to +125°C
7A
J1 SMA male; J2 and J3 SMA female
Driverless Units  Operating ................–54°C to +110°C
7B
J1 SMA female; J2 and J3 SMA male  Non-Operating.........–65°C to +125°C
9	Inverse control logic; logic “0” for port OFF
Humidity...........................MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
and logic “1” for port ON (Not applicable toCond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Series 91/92)
Shock................................MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B, 27	Single-port toggle control; logic “0”Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
connects J1 to J2 (Not applicable to the
Driverless Units, Series 91/92)
Vibration...........................MIL-STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06" double
33	EMI filter solder-type bias/control terminals
amplitude or 15G, whichever
41*	Internal video filter, common port onlyis less)
42*
Internal video filter, output ports only
Altitude.............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
43*Internal video filter, all ports
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling..................MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D, 55	Frequency range 0.5 to 18 GHz. See page139.
Cond. A, 5 cycles
64A
SMB male bias/control connectors
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT*Not applicable to Series 92//F92/G92. See Video Filter Options on page 169.

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

199

Model 2677
Wide Frequency Band SP2T Switch
MODEL 2677• Frequency range: 0.1 to 20 GHz

Model 2677 is a wide frequency range, Low Cost,
high-performance SPDT switch. It operates over the fullinstantaneous bandwidth of 0.1 to 20 GHz .
The proper currents required to switch the ports ON or
OFF are provided by the user.

• Isolation: up to 60 dB• Small Size

Switch Model 2677

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSFREQUENCY (GHz)CHARACTERISTIC
0.1-4

4-12

12-18

18-20

MIN. ISOLATION (dB)

60

60

45

45

MAX. INSERTION LOSS (dB)

2

2

3

3.8

MAX. VSWR (ON)

1.8

2.2

3.0

3.5

Switching Time*.................500 nsec max.
*Shaped current pulses must be provided by user.

Power Handling Capability 
Without Performance
Degradation.................1 W cw or peak
Survival Power ...........1 W average, 75 W peak,(1 µsec max. pulse width)Power Supply Requirements
Port ON .........+7.0 V ±0.5 V, 50 mA max
Port OFF.........- 1.0 V ±0.5 V, 50 mA max

200

Model 2677
Wide Frequency Band SP2T Switch
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTSMODEL 2677
Wt: 1.7 oz. (47 gr.) approx.
Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

201

Series 91 and 92
Miniature Broadband SP3T Switches
MODELS 9130‑500 AND 9230‑500
These switches provide high‑performance
characteristics over a multi‑octave frequency range.
The Model 9130‑500 covers the 1 to 18 GHz frequency
range while the Model 9230‑500 covers the 0.2 to 4 GHz
range. This description and operation are the sameas that for the Models 9120‑500 and 9220‑500 SP2T
switches.

• Frequency range (Series 91): 1 to 18 GHz

MODELS 9130T‑500, 9130W‑500 AND
9230T‑500• Isolation: up to 60 dB• Frequency range (Series 92): 0.2 to 4 GHz• Rise and fall times as fast as 10 nsec
• Reflective and Non-reflective models• Low VSWR and insertion loss
• Miniature size, light weight

These switches are non‑reflective versions of theswitches described above.

MODELS 9130AH‑500 AND 9130AHT‑500
These switches are the same as the 9120AH‑500 and
9120AHT‑500 except for the number of ports.

SERIES F91 AND F92
The Series F91 and F92 switches are the same as thecorresponding Series 91 and 92 models, except theunits are equipped with integrated drivers.

Switch Model
9130-500 (DRIVERLESS)SERIES G91 AND G92
These switches are the same as the Series G91 and
G92 SP2T switches except for the number of ports.

Switch Model
F9130 (WITH
INTEGRATED DRIVER)

202

Series 91 and 92 SP3T Switches
Specifications
MODEL
NO.(1)
9130-500*
F9130
G9130*
9230-500*
F9230*
G9230*
9130T-500*
F9130T*
G9130T*
9230T-500*
F9230T*
G9230T*
9130W-500*
F9130W
G9130W*
9130AH-500*
F9130AH
9130AHT-500*
F9130AHTFREQUENCY (GHz)CHARACTERISTIC

0.2-1

1-2

2-4

4-8

8-12.412.4-18

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON or OFF)Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON or OFF)Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON or OFF)Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

–
–
–
–
–
–
60
1.5
1.5
60
1.8
1.5
–
–
–
60
1.2
1.5
–
–
–
–
–
–

60
1.5
1.75
60
1.8
1.5
60
1.5
1.5
60
1.8
1.5
50
1.4
1.5
60
1.2
1.5
60
1.8
1.5
60
1.2
1.75

60
1.5
1.75
60
1.8
1.5
60
1.5
1.5
60
1.8
1.5
50
1.5
1.5
50
1.4
1.5
60
1.8
1.7
60
1.2
1.75

60
1.5
1.75
60
2.0
1.7
–
–
–
–
–
–
45
1.6
1.7
–
–
–
60
2.0
1.7
60
1.5
1.75

60
2.0
1.75
60
2.5
1.7
–
–
–
–
–
–
40
1.8
1.7
–
–
–
60
2.5
2.0
60
2.0
1.75

50
2.5
2.0
50
2.8
2.0
–
–
–
–
–
–
40
2.5
2.0
–
–
–
55
2.8
2.0
50
2.6
2.0

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)Max. VSWR (OFF)

–
–
–
–

60
1.6
1.75
1.75

60
1.6
1.75
1.75

60
1.8
1.9
2.0

60
2.5
2.0
2.2

50
3.3
2.0
2.3

*Special-order product. Consult factory before ordering.

Survival Power
Units without “T” or “W” suffix: 1W average,   75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)
Units with “T” or “W” suffix   Input to any “OFF” port: 1W average,    10W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to any “ON” port: 1W average,    75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to common port: 1W average,    75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance Degradation
Units without “T” or “W” suffix: 1W cw or peak
Units with “T” or “W” suffix   Input to any “OFF” port: 100 mW cw or peak   Input to any “ON” port: 1W cw or peak   Input to common port: 1W cw or peak(1) Models prefixed with “F” or “G” are equipped with integrated TTL-compatible drivers; models without the “F” or “G” prefix are currentcontrolled units and are furnished without drivers; models suffixed with “T” or “W” are non-reflective except a high VSWR will be present at
the common port if all other ports are OFF; models suffixed with “H” are high-speed units.

203

Series 91 and 92 SP3T Switches
Specifications
Switching Characteristics(1)Control Characteristics

SERIES 91/F91/G91
Units without “H” suffix
ON time...................................... 250 nsec max.
OFF time.................................... 250 nsec max.
Units with “H” suffix
Rise time.................................... 10 nsec max.
Fall time...................................... 10 nsec max.
ON time...................................... 25 nsec max.
OFF time.................................... 20 nsec max.
Repetition rate........................... 20 MHz max.
SERIES 92/F92/G92
ON time...................................... 500 nsec max.
OFF time.................................... 500 nsec max.

SERIES 91/92/F91/F92
Units With Integrated Drivers
Control Input Impedance
Units without “H” suffix...... TTL, low power Schottky,
one unit load. (A unit load
is 0.8 mA sink current and40 µA source current.)
Units with “H” suffix........... TTL, advanced Schottky,
one unit load. (A unit load
is 0.6 mA sink current and20 µA source current.)
Control Logic........................ Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V)
for port ON and logic “1”(+2.0 to +5.0 V) for port
OFF.
SERIES G91/G92
Control Input Impedance... Schottky TTL, one unitload. (A unit load is 2.0
mA sink current and 50 µA
source current.)
Control Logic........................ Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V)
for port ON and logic “1”(+2.0 to +5.0 V) for port
OFF.

Power Supply Requirements
SERIES 91/92/F91/F92
Driverless Units
Bias current required at each port for rated isolation andinsertion loss.
  PORT OFF    Units without “H” suffix..... +50 mA    Units with “H” suffix.......... +30 mA  PORT ON    Units without “H” suffix..... –50 mA    Units with “H” suffix.......... –35 mA
Units With Integrated Drivers(For one port ON)+5V ± 5%
–12 to –15V
Units Without“H” Suffix

130 mA

60 mA

Units With
“H” Suffix

75 mA

55 mA

Units With“HT” Suffix

105 mA

55 mA

SERIES G91/G92(For one port ON)+5V ±5%, 100 mA+15V ±5%, 40 mA(1) For driverless units, shaped current pulses must be provided by user.

204

Series 91 and 92 SP3T Switches
Specifications
OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Temperature Range
AVAILABLE OPTIONSUnits With Integrated Drivers  Operating..................–54°C to +110°C
Option No.	  Description  Non-Operating.........–65°C to +125°C
3
SMA female bias/control connectors
Driverless Units
7	SMA male RF connectors  Operating ................–54°C to +110°C
9	Inverse control logic; logic “0” for port OFF  Non-Operating.........–65°C to +125°C
and logic “1” for port ON (Not
Humidity...........................MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
applicable to Series 91/92)
Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
33	EMI filter solder-type bias/control terminals
Shock................................MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
41*	Internal video filter, common port only
Vibration...........................MIL-STD-202F, Method
42*Internal video filter, output ports only
204D, Cond. B (.06" double
43*
Internal video filter, all ports
amplitude or 15G, whichever55	Frequency range 0.5 to 18 GHz. See pageis less)
169.
Altitude.............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
64A
SMB male bias/control connectors
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings
Temp. Cycling..................MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, 5 cycles
G12
RoHS Compliant*Not applicable to Series 92//F92/G92. See Video Filter Options on page 169

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

205

Series 91 and 92
Miniature Broadband SP4T Switches
MODELS 9140‑500 AND 9240‑500
These switches provide high‑performance
characteristics over a multi‑octave frequency range.
Model 9140‑500 covers the 1 to 18 GHz frequency
range while the Model 9240‑500 covers the 0.2 to 4 GHz
range. Their description and operation are the sameas that for the Models 9120‑500 and 9220‑500 SP2T
switches.

• Frequency range (Series 91): 1 to 18 GHz

MODELS 9140T‑500, 9140W‑500
AND 9240T‑500• Isolation: up to 60 dB• Frequency range (Series 92): 0.2 to 4 GHz• Rise and fall times as fast as 10 nsec
• Reflective and Non-reflective models• Low VSWR and insertion loss
• Miniature size, light weight

These switches are Non-reflective versions of theswitches described above.

MODELS 9140AH‑500 AND 9140AHT‑500
These switches are the same as the 9120AH‑500 andthe 9120AHT‑500 except for the number of ports.

SERIES F91 AND F92
The Series F91 and F92 switches are the same as thecorresponding Series 91 and 92 models except theunits are equipped with integrated drivers.

SERIES G91 AND G92
These switches are the same as the Series G91 and
G92 SP2T switches except for the number of ports.

Switch Model F9140AH(WITH INTEGRATED DRIVER)

Switch Model 9140AH-500(DRIVERLESS)

206

Series 91 and 92 SP4T Switches
Specifications
MODEL
NO.(1)

FREQUENCY (GHz)CHARACTERISTIC

0.2-1

1-2

2-4

4-8

8-12.412.4-18

9140-500*
F9140

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

–
–
–

60
1.4
1.75

60
1.4
1.75

60
1.5
1.75

60
2.0
1.75

50
2.8
2.0

G9140*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

–
–
–

60
2.0
1.5

60
2.0
1.5

60
2.2
1.7

60
2.7
1.7

50
3.0
2.0

9240-500*
F9240*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

60
1.5
1.6

60
1.5
1.6

60
1.5
1.6

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

G9240*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

60
2.0
1.5

60
2.0
1.5

60
2.0
1.5

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

9140T-500*
F9140T*
G9140T*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON or OFF)

–
–
–

50
1.5
1.5

50
1.5
1.5

45
1.7
1.7

40
2.0
1.7

40
2.5
2.0

9240T-500*
F9240T*
G9240T*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON or OFF)

50
1.3
1.5

50
1.3
1.5

50
1.5
1.5

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

9140W-500*
F9140W
G9140W*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON or OFF)

–
–
–

60
2.0
1.5

60
2.0
1.7

60
2.2
1.7

60
2.7
2.0

55
3.0
2.0

9140AH-500*
F9140AH

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

–
–
–

60
1.4
1.75

60
1.4
1.75

60
1.5
1.75

60
2.0
2.0

50
2.8
2.0

9140AHT-500* Min. Isolation (dB)
F9140AHT
Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)Max. VSWR (OFF)

–
–
–
–

60
1.6
1.75
1.75

60
1.6
1.75
1.75

60
1.8
1.9
2.0

60
2.5
2.0
2.2

50
3.3
2.0
2.3

*Special-order product. Consult factory before ordering.

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

Survival Power
Units without “T” or “W” suffix: 1W average,   75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)
Units with “T” or “W” suffix   Input to any “OFF” port: 1W average,    10W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to any “ON” port: 1W average,    75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to common port: 1W average,    75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)Power Handling Capability
Without Performance Degradation
Units without “T” or “W” suffix: 1W cw or peak
Units with “T” or “W” suffix   Input to any “OFF” port: 100 mW cw or peak   Input to any “ON” port: 1W cw or peak   Input to common port: 1W cw or peak(1) Models prefixed with “F” or “G” are equipped with integrated TTL-compatible drivers; models without the “F” or “G” prefix are currentcontrolled units and are furnished without drivers; models suffixed with “T” or “W” are non-reflective except a high VSWR will be present at
the common port if all other ports are OFF; models suffixed with “H” are high-speed units.

207

Series 91 and 92 SP4T Switches
Specifications
Switching Characteristics(1)Control Characteristics

SERIES 91/F91/G91
Units without “H” suffix
ON time...................................... 250 nsec max.
OFF time.................................... 250 nsec max.
Units with “H” suffix
Rise time.................................... 10 nsec max.
Fall time...................................... 10 nsec max.
ON time...................................... 25 nsec max.
OFF time.................................... 20 nsec max.
Repetition rate........................... 20 MHz max.
SERIES 92/F92/G92
ON time...................................... 500 nsec max.
OFF time.................................... 500 nsec max.

SERIES 91/92/F91/F92
Units With Integrated Drivers
Control Input Impedance
Units without “H” suffix...... TTL, low power Schottky,
one unit load. (A unit load
is 0.8 mA sink current and40 µA source current.)
Units with “H” suffix........... TTL, advanced Schottky,
one unit load. (A unit load
is 0.6 mA sink current and20 µA source current.)
Control Logic........................ Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V)
for port ON and logic “1”(+2.0 to +5.0 V) for port
OFF.
SERIES G91/G92
Control Input Impedance... Schottky TTL, one unitload. (A unit load is 2.0
mA sink current and 50 µA
source current.)
Control Logic........................ Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V)
for port ON and logic “1”(+2.0 to +5.0 V) for port
OFF.

Power Supply Requirements
SERIES 91/92/F91/F92
Driverless Units
Bias current required at each port for rated isolation andinsertion loss.
  PORT OFF    Units without “H” suffix..... +50 mA    Units with “H” suffix.......... +30 mA  PORT ON    Units without “H” suffix..... –50 mA    Units with “H” suffix.......... –35 mA
Units With Integrated Drivers(For one port ON)+5V ± 5%
–12 to –15V
Units Without“H” Suffix

190 mA

60 mA

Units With
“H” Suffix

95 mA

60 mA

Units With“HT” Suffix

135 mA

60 mA

SERIES G91/G92(For one port ON)+5V ±5%, 150 mA+15V ±5%, 50 mA(1) For driverless units, spiked current pulses must be provided by user.

208

Series 91 and 92 SP4T Switches
Specifications
OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGSAVAILABLE OPTIONS

Temperature Range
Units With Integrated Drivers  Operating..................–54°C to +110°C  Non-Operating.........–65°C to +125°C
Driverless Units  Operating ................–54°C to +110°C  Non-Operating.........–65°C to +125°C

Option No.	  Description
3
SMA female bias/control connectors
7	SMA male RF connectors
9	Inverse control logic; logic “0” for port
OFF and logic “1” for port ON (Notapplicable to Series 91/92)
33	EMI filter solder-type bias/control
terminals
41*	Internal video filter, common port only
42*
Internal video filter, output ports only
43*
Internal video filter, all ports
55	Frequcy range 0.5 to 18 GHz. See page
169.
64A
SMB male bias/control connectors
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

Humidity...........................MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock................................MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration...........................MIL-STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06" double
amplitude or 15G, whicheveris less)
Altitude.............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling..................MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, 5 cycles*Not applicable to Series 92//F92/G92. See Video Filter Options on page 159

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT(1) USED ONLY ON UNITS WITH INTEGRATED DRIVERS(2) +15V FOR G91/G92 SERIES(3) NOT USED ON DRIVERLESS UNITS EXCEPT WITH OPTION 33

MODELS 91/92/F91/F92/G91/G92
Wt. 2 oz. (57 gr.) approx.
Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

209Model F9341T SP4T
Phase & Amplitude Matched Switch
MODEL F9341T
Model F9341T is a low cost high-performanceterminated SP4T switch that operates over the fullinstantaneous bandwidth of 2 to 21 GHz with ON and
OFF times of 500 nsec. Design features include an
integrated circuit assembly of PIN diodes mounted in a
microstrip transmission line.
The Model F9341T has all of the output ports on one
side while maintaining Amplitude and Phase matching
between all output ports.
The Model F9341T is equipped with an integrated driverthat is powered by +5 and –12 volt supplies. The proper
currents required to switch the ports ON or OFF areprovided by the driver, which is controlled by external
logic signals.

• Frequency range: 2 to 21 GHz• Isolation: 50 dB• Phase and amplitude matched• In-Line Outputs• Non-reflective• Decoder (Optional)• LVDS Interface (Optional)• RS-422 / RS-485 Interface (Optional)

210

Model F9341T SP4T
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
CHARACTERISTICSPECIFICATION

Frequency Range (GHz)Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON/OFF)

2-21
50
5.5
2.5

Phase & Amplitude Matching
Amplitude Matching ..............1 dB Typical
Phase Matching ..................12 Deg. Typical
Switching TimeON time......................................500 nsec max.
OFF time....................................500 nsec max.

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature
Range...............................–54°C to +110°C
Non-Operating
Temperature Range.......–65°C to +125°C
Humidity..............................MIL-STD-202F, Method
103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at
95%)
Shock...................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
213B, Cond. B (75G,
6 msec)Vibration..............................MIL-STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06"double amplitude or 15G,
whichever is less)Altitude................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling.....................MIL-STD-202F, Method
107D, Cond. A, 5 cycles

Power Handling Capability Power Handling Capability Without Performance
Degradation ............................OFF port 0.1 W cw or
peak
ON port 1W CW or
PeakSurvival Power ........................OFF port 1W average,
10W peak (1 µsec max.
pulse width)
ON port 1 W average,
75W peak ( 1 µsec max.
pulse width)Power Supply Requirements+5V ±5%, 190 mA–12V ±5%, 60 mA

AVAILABLE OPTIONSControl Characteristics
Control Input
Impedance...................Schottky TTL, two unit loads. (Aunit load is 0.4 mA sink current
and 40 µA source current.)
Control Logic...................Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V) for port
ON and logic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0V)
for port OFF.

211

Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G11-12V & +6 to +15V
G12
RoHS Compliant

Model F9341T SP4T
Specifications
MODEL F9341T DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

212Model 2578
Low Cost SP4T Switch
MODEL 2578• Frequency range: 6 to 18 GHz

The Model 2578 is a low cost high-performanceterminated SP4T switch that operates over the fullinstantaneous bandwidth of 6 to 18 GHz with ON and
OFF times of 250 nsec. Design features include an
integrated circuit assembly of PIN diodes mounted in a
microstrip transmission line.
The Model 2578 is equipped with an integrated driverthat is powered by +5 and –12 volt supplies. The proper
currents required to switch the ports ON or OFF areprovided by the driver, which is controlled by external
logic signals.

• Isolation: up to 55 dB• Phase and amplitude Matched• Non-reflective

Switch Model 2578

213

Model 2578 Low Cost SP4T Switch
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
CHARACTERISTIC
Frequency Range (GHz)Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON/OFF)

6-18
55
3.5
2.0

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS

Switching TimeON time.............................250 nsec max.
OFF time...........................250 nsec max.
Power Handling Capability 
Without Performance
Degradation......................500 mW cw or peak
Survival Power
Input to any “OFF” port: 1W average, 10W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)
Input to any “ON” port: 1W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)
Input to common port: 1W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)Power Supply Requirements+5V ±5%, 135 mA–12V ±5%, 60 mA

Control Characteristics
Control Input
Impedance...................Schottky TTL, two unit loads.
(A unit load is 2 mA sink current
and 50 µA source current.)
Control Logic...................Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V) for port
ON and logic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0V)
for port OFF.

214

Operating Temperature
Range...............................–54°C to +110°C
Non-Operating
Temperature Range.......–65°C to +125°C
Humidity..............................MIL-STD-202F, Method
103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at
95%)
Shock...................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
213B, Cond. B (75G,
6 msec)Vibration..............................MIL-STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06"double amplitude or 15G,
whichever is less)Altitude................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling.....................MIL-STD-202F, Method
107D, Cond. A, 5 cycles

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

Model 2578 Low Cost SP4T Switch
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT





-&20




-

-





02'(/
*+]6:,7&+

*(1(5$/
0,&52:$9(







-

-

61



















 -&21752/


LOGIC
INPUT

PORT
STATUSA–12V DCCGROUND

X – –

–

B

+5V DC
N/C

PIN
D F
0 0

H
1

PIN DESIGNATION

J4



J1
J2
J3



1 0

1

– X –

–

E

0 1

1

– – X

–

D

LSB

X

F

MSB

H

ENABLE

1 1

1

– – –

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

215

Series 2600 SP4T
Amp & Phase Matched Switches
MODEL 2600
The Model 2600 is a low cost high-performanceterminated SP4T switch that operates over the fullinstantaneous bandwidth of 1 to 18 GHz with ON and
OFF times of 200 nsec. Design features include an
integrated circuit assembly of PIN diodes mounted in a
microstrip transmission line.
The Model 2600 has all of the output ports on one
side while maintaining Amplitude and Phase matching
between all output ports.
The Model 2600 is equipped with an integrated driverthat is powered by +5 and –12 volt supplies. The proper
currents required to switch the ports ON or OFF areprovided by the driver, which is controlled by external
logic signals.

• Frequency range: 1 to 18 GHz• Isolation: Up to 50 dB• All in-line outputs• Phase and amplitude matched• Non-reflective

Switch Model 2600

216

Series 2600 SP4T
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
CHARACTERISTIC

Model
2600

Frequency Range (GHz)Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)Max. VSWR (OFF)

1-18
50
4.4
2.0
2.3

Amplitude & Phase Matching ......Designed for, nottestedSwitching TimeON time.............................500 nsec max.
OFF time...........................500 nsec max.
Power Handling Capability 
Without Performance Degradation
Input to any OFF port................. 0.1 W CW or peak.
Input to any ON port ..................0.5 W CW or peak.
Input to Common port .............. 0.5 W CW or peak.

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS

Operating Temperature
Range...............................–54°C to +110°C
Non-Operating
Temperature Range.......–65°C to +125°C
Humidity..............................MIL-STD-202F, Method
103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at
95%)
Shock...................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
213B, Cond. B (75G,
6 msec)Vibration.
.
............................MIL-STD-202F, Method
Survival Power
204D, Cond. B (.06"
Input to any OFF port.................1W average, 10W,
double amplitude or 15G,
(1 µsec max. pulse
width)
whichever is less)
Input to any ON port ..................1W average, 75W
Altitude................................MIL-STD-202F, Method
peak (1 µsec max.
pulse
105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)width)
Temp. Cycling.....................MIL-STD-202F, Method
Input to COMMON port ......... 1W average, 75W peak
107D, Cond. A, 5 cycles(1 µsec max. pulse width)Power Supply Requirements+5V ±5%, 190 mA
AVAILABLE OPTIONS–12V ±5%, 60 mA
Option No.	  Description
Control Characteristics
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Control Input
Ratings
Impedance...................Schottky TTL, two unit loads.
G12
RoHS Compliant(A unit load is 2 mA sink current
and 50 µA source current.)
Control Logic...................Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V) for port
ON and logic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0V)
for port OFF.

217

Series 2600 SP4T Switches
Specifications
MODEL 2600 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

FUNCTION
J1 CONTROL
J3 CONTROL
+V
GND
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
J2 CONTROL
J4 CONTROL
N/C
N/C
N/C
–V
N/C

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

218

Series 91 and 92
Miniature Broadband SP5T Switches
MODELS 9150‑500 AND 9250‑500
These switches provide high‑performance
characteristics over a multi‑octave frequency range.
The Model 9150‑500 covers the 1 to 18 GHz frequency
range while the Model 9250‑500 covers the 0.2 to 4 GHz
range. This description and operation are the sameas that for the Models 9120‑500 and 9220‑500 SP2T
switches.

• Frequency range (Series 91):
1 to 18 GHz

MODELS 9150T‑500, 9150W‑500
AND 9250T‑500• Low VSWR and insertion loss

These switches are non‑reflective versions of theswitches described above.

• Miniature size, light weight• Frequency range (Series 92):
0.2 to 4 GHz• Reflective and Non-reflective models• Isolation: up to 60 dB

SERIES F91 AND F92
The Series F91 and F92 switches are the same as thecorresponding Series 91 and 92 models, except theunits are equipped with integrated drivers.

SERIES G91 AND G92
These switches are the same as the Series G91 and
G92 SP2T switches except for the number of ports.
Switch Model F9150(WITH INTEGRATEDDRIVER)

Switch Model 9150-500(DRIVERLESS)

219

Series 91 and 92 SP5T Switches
Specifications
MODEL
NO.(1)
9150-500*
F9150*

FREQUENCY (GHz)CHARACTERISTIC
Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

0.2-1

1-2

2-4

4-8

8-12.412.4-18

–
–
–

60
1.5
1.5

60
1.5
1.5

55
1.5
1.75

50
2.0
1.75

50
3.0
2.0

G9150*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

–
–
–

60
2.2
1.5

60
2.2
1.5

60
2.4
1.8

60
3.0
2.0

50
3.3
2.2

9250-500*
F9250*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

60
1.5
1.6

60
1.5
1.6

60
1.5
1.6

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

G9250*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

60
2.2
1.5

60
2.2
1.5

60
2.2
1.5

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

9150T-500*
F9150T*
G9150T*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON or OFF)

–
–
–

50
1.5
1.5

50
1.5
1.5

45
2.0
1.7

40
2.5
2.0

40
3.0
2.2

9250T-500*
F9250T*
G9250T*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON or OFF)

60
1.4
1.5

60
1.4
1.5

50
1.5
1.5

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

9150W-500*
F9150W
G9150W*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON or OFF)

–
–
–

60
2.2
1.5

60
2.2
1.7

60
2.4
1.8

60
3.0
2.0

55
3.3
2.2

*Special-order product. Consult factory before ordering.

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance Degradation
Units without “T” or “W” suffix: 1W cw or peak
Units with “T” or “W” suffix   Input to any “OFF” port: 100 mW cw or peak   Input to any “ON” port: 1W cw or peak   Input to common port: 1W cw or peak
Survival Power
Units without “T” or “W” suffix: 1W average,   75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)
Units with “T” or “W” suffix   Input to any “OFF” port: 1W average,    10W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to any “ON” port: 1W average,    75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to common port: 1W average,    75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)

Switching Time(2)SERIES 91/F91/G91
ON time...................................... 250 nsec max.
OFF time.................................... 250 nsec max.
With Option C37......................100 nsec max.
SERIES 92/F92/G92
ON time...................................... 500 nsec max.
OFF time.................................... 500 nsec max.

(1) Models prefixed with “F” or “G” are equipped with integrated TTL-compatible drivers; models without the “F” or “G” prefix are
current-controlled units and are furnished without drivers; models suffixed with “T” or “W” are non-reflective except a high VSWR
will be present at the common port if all other ports are OFF.
(2) For driverless units, shaped current pulses must be provided by the user.

220

Series 91 and 92 SP5T Switches
Specifications
Power Supply Requirements

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGSSERIES 91/92/F91/F92
Driverless Units
Bias current required at each port for rated isolation andinsertion loss.
Port OFF.................... +50 mA
Port ON...................... –50 mA
Units With Integrated Drivers(For one port ON).......... +5V ±5%, 250 mA–12 to –15V, 80 mA
SERIES G91/G92(For one port ON).......... +5V ±5%, 150 mA+15V ±5%, 60 mA

Temperature Range
Units With Integrated Drivers  Operating..................–54°C to +110°C  Non-Operating.........–65°C to +125°C
Driverless Units  Operating ................–54°C to +110°C  Non-Operating.........–65°C to +125°C
Humidity........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock............................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D,
Cond. B (.06" double amplitude
or 15G, whichever is less)Altitude.......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling............... MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, 5 cycles

Control Characteristics
SERIES 91/92/F91/F92
Units With Integrated Drivers
Control Input
Impedance............... TTL, low power Schottky, one
unit load. (A unit load is 0.8 mA
sink current and 40 µA source
current.)
Control Logic............... Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V) for port
ON and logic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0V)
for port OFF.
SERIES G91/G92
Control Input
Impedance............... Schottky TTL, one unit load. (Aunit load is 2.0 mA sink current
and 50 µA source current.)
Control Logic............... Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V) for port
ON and logic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0V)
for port OFF.
*Not applicable to Series 92/F92/G92. See Video Filter Options on
page 169** Not applicable to series 92/F92/C92. Minimum order buy of 100
switches

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
3
SMA female bias/control connectors
7	SMA male RF connectors
9	Inverse control logic; logic “0” for port OFF
and logic “1” for port ON (Not applicable toSeries 91, 92)33	EMI filter solder-type bias/control terminals
41*	Internal video filter, common port only
42*
Internal video filter, output ports only
43*
Internal video filter, all ports
55	Frequency range 0.5 to 18 GHz. See page
169
64A
SMB male bias/control connectors
C37**
100 nsec. switching time
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

221

Series 91 and 92 SP5T Switches
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

222

Series 91 and 92
Miniature Broadband SP6T Switches
MODELS 9160‑500 AND 9260‑500
These switches provide high‑performance
characteristics over a multi‑octave frequency range.
Model 9160‑500 covers the 1 to 18 GHz frequency
range while the Model 9260‑500 covers the 0.2 to 4 GHz
range. Their description and operation are the sameas that for the Models 9120‑500 and 9220‑500 SP2T
switches.

• Frequency range (Series 91): 1 to 18 GHz• Frequency range (Series 92): 0.2 to 4 GHz• Reflective and non-reflective models• Low VSWR and insertion loss
• Isolation: up to 60 dB

MODELS 9160T‑500, 9160W‑500
AND 9260T‑500• Miniature size, light weight

These switches are non‑reflective versions of theswitches described above.

SERIES F91 AND F92
The Series F91 and F92 switches are the same as thecorresponding Series 91 and 92 models, except theunits are equipped with integrated drivers.

SERIES G91 AND G92
These switches are the same as the Series G91 and
G92 SP2T switches except for the number of ports.

Switch Model F9160(WITH INTEGRATED DRIVER)

Switch Model 9160-500(DRIVERLESS)

223

Series 91 and 92 SP6T Switches
Specifications
MODEL
NO.(1)
9160-500*
F9160*

FREQUENCY (GHz)CHARACTERISTIC
Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

0.2-1

1-2

2-4

4-8

8-12.412.4-18

–
–
–

60
1.6
1.6

60
1.6
1.6

55
1.8
1.9

50
2.2
2.0

50
3.4
2.2

G9160*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

–
–
–

60
2.2
1.6

60
2.2
1.6

60
2.6
2.0

60
3.2
2.2

50
3.5
2.3

9260-500*
F9260*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

60
1.5
1.6

60
1.5
1.6

60
1.5
1.6

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

G9260*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

60
2.2
1.6

60
2.2
1.6

60
2.2
1.6

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

9160T-500*
F9160T*
G9160T*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON or OFF)

–
–
–

50
1.5
1.6

50
1.5
1.6

45
2.2
1.8

40
2.7
2.0

40
3.2
2.2

9260T-500*
F9260T*
G9260T*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON or OFF)

60
1.5
1.5

60
1.5
1.5

50
1.5
1.6

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

9160W-500*
F9160W
G9160W*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON or OFF)

–
–
–

60
2.2
1.7

60
2.2
1.7

60
2.6
2.0

60
3.2
2.2

55
3.5
2.3

*Special-order product. Consult factory before ordering.

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance Degradation
Units without “T” or “W” suffix: 1W cw or peak
Units with “T” or “W” suffix   Input to any “OFF” port: 100 mW cw or peak   Input to any “ON” port: 1W cw or peak   Input to common port: 1W cw or peak
Survival Power
Units without “T” or “W” suffix: 1W average,   75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)
Units with “T” or “W” suffix   Input to any “OFF” port: 1W average,    10W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to any “ON” port: 1W average,    75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to common port: 1W average,    75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)

Switching Time(2)SERIES 91/F91/G91
ON time...................................... 250 nsec max.
OFF time.................................... 250 nsec max.
With Option C37......................100 nsec max.
SERIES 92/F92/G92
ON time...................................... 500 nsec max.
OFF time.................................... 500 nsec max.

224

Series 91 and 92 SP6T Switches
Specifications
Power Supply Requirements

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGSSERIES 91/92/F91/F92
Driverless Units
Bias current required at each port for rated isolation andinsertion loss.
Port OFF.................... +50 mA
Port ON...................... –50 mA
Units With Integrated Drivers(For one port ON).......... +5V ±5%, 315 mA–12 to –15V, 60 mA
SERIES G91/G92(For one port ON).......... +5V ±5%, 150 mA+15V ±5%, 70 mA

Temperature Range
Units With Integrated Drivers  Operating..................–54°C to +110°C  Non-Operating.........–65°C to +125°C
Driverless Units  Operating ................–54°C to +110°C  Non-Operating.........–65°C to +125°C
Humidity........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock............................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D,
Cond. B (.06" double amplitude
or 15G, whichever is less)Altitude.......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling............... MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, 5 cycles

Control Characteristics
SERIES 91/92/F91/F92
Units With Integrated Drivers
Control Logic............... Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V) for port
ON and logic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0V)
for port OFF.
Control Input
Impedance............... TTL, low power Schottky, one
unit load. (A unit load is 0.8 mA
sink current and 40 µA source
current.)
SERIES G91/G92
Control Logic............... Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V) for port
ON and logic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0V)
for port OFF.
Control Input
Impedance............... Schottky TTL, one unit load. (Aunit load is 2.0 mA sink current
and 50 µA source current.)*Not applicable to Series 92/F92/G92. See Video Filter Options on
page 169** Not applicable to series 92/F92/G92. Minimum order buy of 100
switches.

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
3
SMA female bias/control connectors
7	SMA male RF connectors
9	Inverse control logic; logic “0” for port
OFF and logic “1” for port ON (Notapplicable to Series 91/92)
33	EMI filter solder-type bias/control
terminals
41*	Internal video filter, common port only
42*
Internal video filter, output ports only
43*
Internal video filter, all ports
64A
SMB male bias/control connectors
C37**
100 nsec switching time
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

225

Series 91 and 92 SP6T Switches
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT(1) Used only on units with integrated drivers(2) +15V for G91/G92 Series(3) Not used on driverless units except with option 33

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

226Model F9361T SP6T
Phase & Amplitude Matched Switch
MODEL F9361T
Model F9361T is a low cost high-performanceterminated SP6T switch that operates over the fullinstantaneous bandwidth of 2 to 21 GHz with ON and
OFF times of 500 nsec. Design features include an
integrated circuit assembly of PIN diodes mounted in a
microstrip transmission line.
The Model F9361T has all of the output ports on one
side while maintaining Amplitude and Phase matching
between all output ports.
The Model F9361T is equipped with an integrated driverthat is powered by +5 and –12 volt supplies. The proper
currents required to switch the ports ON or OFF areprovided by the driver, which is controlled by external
logic signals.

• Frequency range: 2 to 21 GHz• Isolation: 55 dB• Phase and amplitude matched• Non-reflective• In-Line Outputs• Decoder (Optional)• LVDS Interface (Optional)• RS-422 / RS-485 Interface (Optional)

227

Model F9361T SP6T
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
CHARACTERISTICSPECIFICATIONFREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)2-21

MIN. ISOLATION (dB)

55

MAX. INSERTION LOSS (dB)

5.5

MAX. VSWR (ON/OFF)

2.5

Phase & Amplitude Matching
Amplitude Matching .....1 dB Typical
Phase Matching .........12 Deg. Typical
Switching TimeON time.............................500 nsec max.
OFF time..........................500 nsec max.
Power Handling Capability Without Performance
Degradation ....................OFF port 100 mW cw or
peak
ON port 1W CW or Peak
Survival Power ...............OFF port 1W average,10W
peak (1 µsec max. pulse
width)ON port 1W Average, 75W
peak (1 µsec max. pulse
width)

Power Supply Requirements+5V ±5%, 250 mA max–12V ±5%, 100 mA max

Control Characteristics
Control Input
Impedance...................Schottky TTL, two unit loads.
(A unit load is 0.4 mA sinkcurrent and 40 µA source
current.)
Control Logic...................Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V) forPort “ON”
Logic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0V) forPort “OFF”.

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature Range................. –54°C to +110°C
Non-Operating Temperature Range........ –65°C to +125°C
Humidity....................................................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock............................................................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B, Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration....................................................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D, Cond. B (.06" double amplitude or
15G, whichever is less)Altitude......................................................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling.............................................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D, Cond. A, 5 cycles

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings
G11-12V & +6V to +15V
G12
RoHS Compliant

228

Model F9361T SP6T
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTSPIN OUT
Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

229

PIN

FUNCTION

1

+5V

2

N/C

3

J2 CONTROL

4

N/C

5

J4 CONTROL

6

N/C

7

J6 CONTROL

8

–12V

9

J1 CONTROL

10

N/C

11

J3 CONTROL

12

N/C

13

J5 CONTROL

14

N/C

15

GND

Model 2629
Low Cost SP6T Switches
MODEL 2629
Model 2629 is a Low Cost high-performance terminated
SP6T switch that operates over the full instantaneous
bandwidth of 1 to 18 GHz with ON and OFF times of
500 nsec.
The Model 2629 is equipped with an integrated driverthat is powered by +5 and –12 volt supplies. The proper
currents required to switch the ports ON or OFF areprovided by the driver, which is controlled by external
logic signals.

• Frequency range: 1 to 18 GHz• Isolation: up to 55 dB• All in-line outputs• Phase and amplitude matched• Non-reflective

Switch Model 2629

230

Model 2629 SP6T Switches
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL
CHARACTERISTIC
2629

2626-C99

FREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)

1-18

2-21

MIN. ISOLATION (dB)55

55

MAX. INSERTION LOSS (dB)

4.8

5.5

MAX. VSWR (ON/OFF)

2.2

2.5

PHASE MATCHING BETWEENPORTS (deg, max)

±10

±15

AMPLITUDE MATCHING BETWEENPORTS (dB, max)

±0.6

±1.5

HARMONICS @ +25 dBm (dBc, max)

–35

–35

Control Characteristics

Switching TimeON time.............................500 nsec max.
OFF time...........................500 nsec max.
Power Handling Capability 
Without Performance
Degradation
OFF port 100 mW cw or peak
ON port 1W average
Survival PowerOFF port 10W peak,
ON port 75W peak (1 µsec
max. pulse width)Power Supply Requirements+5V ±5%, 250 mA max–12V ±5%, 100 mA max

Control Input
Impedance...................Schottky TTL, two unit loads.
(A unit load is 2 mA sinkcurrent and 50 µA source
current.)
Control Logic...................Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V) forPort “ON”
Logic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0V) forPort “OFF”.

231Model 2629 SP6T Switches
Specifications
OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature Range................. –54°C to +110°C
Non-Operating Temperature Range........ –65°C to +125°C
Humidity....................................................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock............................................................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration....................................................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D,
Cond. B (.06" double amplitude or
15G, whichever is less)Altitude......................................................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling.............................................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, 5 cycles

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant232

Model 2629 SP6T Switches
Specifications
MODEL 2629 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTSPIN OUT

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

233

PIN

FUNCTION

1

+5V

2

N/C

3

J2 CONTROL

4

N/C

5

J4 CONTROL

6

N/C

7

J6 CONTROL

8

–12V

9

J1 CONTROL

10

N/C

11

J3 CONTROL

12

N/C

13

J5 CONTROL

14

N/C

15

GND

Series 91 and 92
Miniature Broadband SP7T Switches
MODELS 9170‑500 AND 9270‑500
These switches provide high‑performance
characteristics over a multi‑octave frequency range.
Model 9170‑500 covers the 1 to 18 GHz frequency range
while the Model 9270‑500 covers the 0.2 to 4 GHz range.
Their description and operation are the same as that for
the Models 9120‑500 and 9220‑500 SP2T switches.

MODELS 9170T‑500, 9170W‑500
AND 9270T‑500• Frequency range (Series 91):
1 to 18 GHz• Frequency range (Series 92):
0.2 to 4 GHz• Reflective and non-reflective models• Low VSWR and insertion loss
• Isolation: up to 60 dB• Miniature size, light weight

These switches are non‑reflective versions of theswitches described above.

SERIES F91 AND F92
The Series F91 and F92 switches are the same as thecorresponding Series 91 and 92 models, except theunits are equipped with integrated drivers.

SERIES G91 AND G92
These switches are the same as the Series G91 and G92
SP2T switches except for the number of ports.

Switch Model F9170(WITH INTEGRATEDDRIVER)

Switch Model 9170-500(DRIVERLESS)

234

Series 91 and 92 SP7T Switches
Specifications
MODEL
NO.(1)
9170-500*
F9170*

FREQUENCY (GHz)CHARACTERISTIC
Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

0.2-1

1-2

2-4

4-8

8-12.412.4-18

–
–
–

60
1.75
1.75

60
1.75
1.75

55
2.0
2.0

50
2.6
2.2

50
3.8
2.4

G9170*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

–
–
–

60
2.2
1.7

60
2.2
1.7

60
2.8
2.2

60
3.5
2.2

50
3.8
2.4

9270-500*
F9270*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

60
1.5
1.6

60
1.5
1.6

60
1.5
1.6

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

G9270*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

60
2.2
1.7

60
2.2
1.7

60
2.2
1.7

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

9170T-500*
F9170T*
G9170T*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON or OFF)

–
–
–

50
1.5
1.7

50
1.5
1.7

45
2.4
2.0

40
3.0
2.2

40
3.5
2.4

9270T-500*
F9270T*
G9270T*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON or OFF)

60
1.5
1.5

60
1.5
1.5

50
1.5
1.7

–
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

9170W-500*
F9170W*
G9170W*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON or OFF)

–
–
–

60
2.2
1.7

60
2.2
1.7

60
2.8
2.2

60
3.5
2.2

55
3.8
2.4

*Special-order product. Consult factory before ordering.

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance Degradation
Units without “T” or “W” suffix: 1W cw or peak
Units with “T” or “W” suffix   Input to any “OFF” port: 100 mW cw or peak   Input to any “ON” port: 1W cw or peak   Input to common port: 1W cw or peak
Survival Power
Units without “T” or “W” suffix: 1W average,   75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)
Units with “T” or “W” suffix   Input to any “OFF” port: 1W average,    10W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to any “ON” port: 1W average,    75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to common port: 1W average,    75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)

Switching Time(2)SERIES 91/F91/G91
ON time...................................... 250 nsec max.
OFF time.................................... 250 nsec max.
With Option C37.....................100 nsec max.
SERIES 92/F92/G92
ON time...................................... 500 nsec max.
OFF time.................................... 500 nsec max.

(1) Models prefixed with “F” or “G” are equipped with integrated TTL-compatible drivers; models without the “F” or “G” prefix are currentcontrolled units and are furnished without drivers; models suffixed with “T” or “W” are non-reflective except a high VSWR will be present at
the common port if all other ports are OFF.
(2) For driverless units, shaped current pulses must be provided by the user.

235

Series 91 and 92 SP7T Switches
Specifications
Power Supply Requirements

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGSSERIES 91/92/F91/F92
Driverless Units
Bias current required at each port for rated isolation andinsertion loss.
Port OFF.................... +50 mA
Port ON...................... –50 mA
Units With Integrated Drivers(For one port ON).......... +5V ±5%, 375 mA–12 to –15V, 60 mA
SERIES G91/G92(For one port ON).......... +5V ±5%, 190 mA+15V ±5%, 70 mA

Temperature Range
Units With Integrated Drivers  Operating..................–54°C to +110°C  Non-Operating.........–65°C to +125°C
Driverless Units  Operating ................–54°C to +110°C  Non-Operating.........–65°C to +125°C

Control Characteristics
SERIES 91/92/F91/F92
Units With Integrated Drivers
Control Input
Impedance............... TTL, low power Schottky, one
unit load. (A unit load is 0.8 mA
sink current and 40 µA source
current.)
Control Logic............... Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V) for port
ON and logic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0V)
for port OFF.
SERIES G91/G92
Control Input
Impedance............... Schottky TTL, one unit load. (Aunit load is 2.0 mA sink current
and 50 µA source current.)
Control Logic............... Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V) for port
ON and logic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0V)
for port OFF.
*Not applicable to Series 92/F92/G92.See Video Filter Options on
page 169** Not applicable to series 92/F92/G92. Minimum order buy of 100
switches236

Humidity........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock............................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D,
Cond. B (.06" double amplitude
or 15G, whichever is less)Altitude.......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling............... MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, 5 cycles

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
3
SMA female bias/control connectors
7	SMA male RF connectors
9	Inverse control logic; logic “0” for port
OFF and logic “1” for port ON (Notapplicable to Series 91, 92)33	EMI filter solder-type bias/control
terminals
41*	Internal video filter, common port only
42*
Internal video filter, output ports only
43*
Internal video filter, all ports
55	Frequency range 0.5 to 18 GHz. See page
169
64A
SMB male bias/control connectors
C37**
100 nsec switching time
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

Series 91 and 92 SP7T Switches
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTMODELS 91/92/F91/F92/G91/G92
Wt: 2.9 oz. (82 gr.) approx.

(1) Used only on units with integrated drivers(2) +15V for G91/G92 Series(3) Not used on driverless units except with option 33

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

237

Models F9180 and F9180W
Low-Cost Broadband SP8T Switches
The Models F9180 and F9180W SP8T switches operateover a frequency range of 1 to 18 GHz. They are
low‑cost state‑of‑the‑art, high isolation, low insertion
loss units. For the Model F9180, the reflective design,
insertion loss varies from 1.5 dB at 1 GHz to 4.4 dB
at 18 GHz. The corresponding values for the Model
F9180W, the non‑reflective design, are 2.0 dB and 4.8
dB, respectively. Isolation varies from 65 dB at 1 GHz
to 55 dB at 18 GHz. The VSWR limit for both designs
ranges from 1.7 to 2.0, depending on frequency. These
units switch in under 250 nanoseconds. They operateover temperature ranges as wide as –54°C to +110°C
and withstand RF power levels as high as 75 watts
peak, 1 watt average.
Each model weighs 8.5 ounces and measures
4.65 x 1.5 x 0.75". They are powered by +5V DC and–12 to –15V DC (standard) or by ±5V DC (Option 11).
Individual port TTL logic control and power supply
connections are made by means of a DA15P connector.

• Frequency range: 1‑18 GHz• Reflective and non‑reflective models• High isolation, low insertion loss and
VSWR• Switching time: 250 nsec

Switch Model F9180

238

Models F9180 and F9180W
Specifications
FREQUENCY (GHz)
MODEL(1)NO.

CHARACTERISTIC

1– 2

2– 4

4–8

8 –12.4

12.4 –18

F9180*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

65
1.5
1.7

65
2.0
1.7

65
2.4
2.0

65
3.2
2.0

60
4.4
2.0

F9180W

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON or OFF)

65
2.0
1.7

65
2.3
1.7

65
3.2
2.0

60
3.5
2.0

55
4.8
2.0

*Special-order product. Consult factory before ordering.

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance Degradation  F9180:............................. 0.5W cw or peak  F9180W:   Input to any    “OFF” port:............. 100 mW cw or peak   Input to any    “ON” port:.............. 0.5W cw or peak   Input to common    port:........................ 0.5W cw or peak
Survival Power  F9180:............................. 1W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)  F9180W:   Input to any    “OFF” port:............. 1W average, 10W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to any    “ON” port:.............. 1W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to common    port:........................ 1W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)(1) Models prefixed with “W” are non-reflective except a high VSWR
will be presented at the common port if all other ports are OFF.

239

Switching TimeON Time............................. 250 nsec max.
OFF Time........................... 250 nsec max.
Power Supply
Requirements.................. +5V ±5% @ 100 mA–12 to –15V @ 50 mA

CONTROL CHARACTERISTICSCONTROL LOGIC
Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V) for port ON
Logic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0V) for port OFF
CONTROL INPUT IMPEDANCE
0.5 mA sink current, max.

Models F9180 and F9180W
Specifications
OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGSACCESSORIES FURNISHED

Temperature Range
Operating.................... –54°C to +110°C
Non-Operating............ –65°C to +125°C
Humidity........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock............................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D,
Cond. B (.06" double amplitude
or 15G, whichever is less)Altitude.......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling............... MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, 5 cycles

Mating power/logic connector

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
7	SMA male RF connectors
9	Inverse control logic; logic “0” for port
OFF and logic “1” for port ON
11	±5V operation
41*	Internal video filter, common port only
42*
Internal video filter, output ports only
43*
Internal video filter, all ports
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliantt

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTPIN

FUNCTION

1

J8 CONTROL

2

J6 CONTROL

3

+5v

4

GND

5

J4 CONTROL

6

J3 CONTROL

7

J2 CONTROL

8

J1 CONTROL

9

J7 CONTROL

10

J5 CONTROL

11

N/C

12

N/C

13
14
15

N/C
STD Unit: -12v to -15v
Opt 11: -5v
N/C

MODELS F9180 and F9180W
8.5 oz. (240 gr.) approx.
Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

2402553 Series Model 2553-B90
SP8T Phase and Amplitude Matched Switch
MODEL 2553 SERIES
Model 2553 series consists of SP8T-SP12T multi
throw switches. In this series, all output ports are in-line
and the ports are phase and amplitude matched.
The 2553 series consists of the following multi throwswitches:
TYPE

MODEL NO.

SP8T

2553-B90

SP10T

2553-B39

SP12T

2553-B48• Frequency range: 1 to 18 GHz• Phase matched• Amplitude matched• All in-line output ports• Non-reflective
UCT
PROD
R
ING–
E
ORD
RDER
L
O
A
I
E
C
R
SPE
BEFO
TORY
C
A
F
T
NSUL

­–CO

The Model 2553 series is equipped with an integrated
driver that is powered by +5 and –12 volt supplies. The
proper currents required to switch the ports ON or
OFF are provided by the driver, which is controlled byexternal logic signals.

Switch Model 2553-B90

241

Model 2553-B90 SP8T Switch
Specifications
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONSFREQUENCY
RANGE
(GHz)

CHARACTERISTIC

1.0
to
18.0

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR one port ON
Max. VSWR OFF

55
5.2
2.1 :12.2 :1

Amplitude Matching(between any two output ports) ..........1.2 dB max.
Phase Matching(between any two output ports)........... 30° max.
Switching TimeON Time........................700 nsec max.
OFF Time......................700 nsec max.
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance  Degradation...............600 mW cw or peak
Survival Power...............1.5W cw

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G12
RoHS Compliant

Power Supply Requirements+5V ±5%, 350 mA max–12V ±5%, 100 mA max

Control Characteristics
Control Input
Impedance...................Schottky TTL, two unit loads.
(A unit load is 2 mA sinkcurrent and 50 µA source
current.)
Control logic....................Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V) for“ON” state. Logic “1” (+2.0 to+5.0V) for “OFF” state.
Operating Temperature.........0°C to +70°C
Storage Temperature.........-20°C to +70°C

242

Model 2553-B90 SP8T Switch
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTPIN OUTPIN

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

243

FUNCTION

1

+5V

2

J2 CONTROL

3

J4 CONTROL

4

J6 CONTROL

5

J8 CONTROL

6

N.C.

7

N.C.

8

-12v

9

J1 CONTROL

10

J3 CONTROL

11

J5 CONTROL

12

J7 CONTROL

13

N.C.

14

N.C.

15

GND

Model IA-2470-XO
Low Profile Absorptive SP9T Switch
MODEL IA-2470 SERIES• Frequency range: 8 to 12 GHz
Model IA-2470-XO SP9T switch, is part of our productline of Low Profile, slim hermetically sealed switches.

• All in-line output ports• Non-reflective• Hermetically Sealed

The Model IA-2470 series is equipped with an
integrated driver that is powered by +5 and –12 volt
supplies. The proper currents required to switch theports ON or OFF are provided by the driver, which iscontrolled by external logic signals.

• Low Profile
T
ODUC
NG–
ER PR
D
R
DERI
O
R
L
O
A
I
E
R
SPEC
BEFO
TORY
C
A
F
ULT
CONS

­–

244

Model IA-2470-XO SP9T Switch
Specifications
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONSCHARACTERISTICFREQUENCY
RANGE
(GHz)

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR one port ON
Max. VSWR OFF

Switching TimeON Time........................25 nsec max.
OFF Time......................25 nsec max.
Switching Rate.................1 MHz max.
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance  Degradation...............100 mW cw or peak
Survival Power...............@25°C 1W cw

Power Supply Requirements+5V ±2%, 250 mA max–12V ±2%, 110 mA max

Control Characteristics
TTL Control,“0” = Insertion Loss, “1” = Isolation

8.0
to
12.0
70
4.0
2.0 :12.0 :1OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature
Range............................-54°C to +85°C
Non-Operating Temperature
Range............................–55°C to +125°C
Humidity...........................MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock................................MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. C (100G/ 6 msec)
Vibration...........................MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D,
Cond. G (30g PEAK)
Altitude.......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C, Cond.
C (70,000 ft.)Temp. Shock....................MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, (5 cycles) -55°C to +125°C
Seal ..............................MIL-STD 202F, Method 112C,
Cond. C 5x10-7
Salt Spray .....................MIL-STD 202F, Method
101D+EST., Cond. B

OPTIONSThe switch can be supplied with various options
please consult us for more details.
1. Other Frequency Bands
2. Reflective
3. Different Outline
4. Video Leakage Requirements
5. Option G09 - Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings

245Model IA-2470-XO SP9T Switch
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

2462553 Series Model 2553-B39
SP10T Phase and Amplitude Matched Switch
MODEL 2553 SERIES
Model 2553 series consists of SP8T-SP12T multi
throw switches. In this series, all output ports are in-line
and the ports are phase and amplitude matched.
The 2553 series consists of the following multi throwswitches:
TYPE

MODEL NO.

SP8T

2553-B90

SP10T

2553-B39

SP12T

2553-B48• Frequency range: 6 to 18 GHz• Phase matched• Amplitude matched• All in-line output ports• Non-reflective

UCT
PROD
R
ING–
E
ORD
RDER
L
O
A
I
E
C
R
SPE
BEFO
TORY
C
A
F
T
NSUL

The Model 2553 series is equipped with an integrated
driver that is powered by +5 and –12 volt supplies. The
proper currents required to switch the ports ON or
OFF are provided by the driver, which is controlled byexternal logic signals.

­–CO

Switch Model 2553-B39

247

Model 2553-B39 SP10T Switch
Specifications
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONSFREQUENCY RANGE(GHz)CHARACTERISTIC

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR one port ON
Max. VSWR OFF

6.0
to
12.0

12.0
to
18.0

70
4.3
2.0 :12.2 :170
5.6
2.0 :12.2 :1

Amplitude Matching(between any two output ports) .........1.2 dB max.
Phase Matching(between any two output ports).......... 30° max.
Switching TimeON Time........................700 nsec max.
OFF Time......................700 nsec max.
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance  Degradation...............600 mW cw or peak
Survival Power...............1.5W cw

Power Supply Requirements+5V ±5%, 350 mA max–12V ±5%, 100 mA max

Control Characteristics
Control Input
Impedance...................Schottky TTL, two unit loads. (A unit load is 2 mA sink current
and 50 µA source current.)
Control logic....................Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V) for “ON” state. Logic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0V)
for “OFF” state.
Operating Temperature.........0°C to +70°C
Storage Temperature.........-20°C to +70°C

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G12
RoHS Compliant

248

Model 2553-B39 SP10T Switch
Specifications

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTPIN OUT

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

249

PIN

FUNCTION

1

+5V

2

J2 CONTROL

3

J4 CONTROL

4

J6 CONTROL

5

J8 CONTROL

6

J10 CONTROL

7

N.U.

8

–12V

9

J1 CONTROL

10

J3 CONTROL

11

J5 CONTROL

12

J7 CONTROL

13

J9 CONTROL

14

N.U.

15

GND

Model KA-2060-VV
Low Frequency Absorptive SP10T Switch
MODEL KA-2060 SERIES• Frequency range: 20 to 2,000 MHz
Model KA-2060-LK SP10T switch, is part of our productline of Low Profile, slim hermetically sealed switches. It
is a Low Frequency SP10T switch.

• Non-reflective• Internal Decoder• Hermetically Sealed

The Model KA-2060 series is equipped with an
integrated driver that is powered by +5 volt supply.
The proper currents required to switch the ports ON or
OFF are provided by the driver, which is controlled byexternal logic signals.

• Low Profile

UCT
PROD
R
ING–
E
ORD
RDER
L
O
A
I
E
C
R
SPE
BEFO
TORY
C
A
F
T
NSUL

­–CO

250

Model KA-2060-VV SP10T Switch
Specifications
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONSFREQUENCY
RANGE
(MHz)

CHARACTERISTIC

20.0
to2,000.0

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR one port ON
Max. VSWR OFF

Switching TimeON Time........................2 msec max.
OFF Time......................2 msec max.
Switching Rate.................0.1 MHz max.
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance  Degradation...............20 mW cw or peak
Survival Power...............@25°C 500 mW cw

Power Supply Requirements+5V ±2%, 250 mA max

Control Characteristics
4 Bit decoder BCD

60
6.0
1.7 :1
1.7 :1OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature
Range......................... -10°C to +85°C
Non-Operating Temperature
Range......................... –55°C to +125°C
Humidity........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B, Cond.
(96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock............................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B, Cond.
C (100G/ 6 msec)
Vibration........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D, Cond.
G (30g PEAK)
Altitude.......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C, Cond.
C (70,000 ft.)Temp. Shock................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D, Cond.
A, (5 cycles) -55°C to +125°C
Seal ..............................MIL-STD 202F, Method 112C,
Cond. C 5x10-7
Salt Spray .....................MIL-STD 202F, Method
101D+EST., Cond. B

OPTIONSThe switch can be supplied with various options
please consult us for more details.
1. Other Frequency Bands
2. Reflective
3. Different Outline
4. Video Leakage Requirements
5. Option G09 - Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings251Model KA-2060-VV SP10T Switch
Specifications

4 BIT DECODER

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008252

Model KA-2970-LK
Low-Profile Absorptive SP10T Switch
MODEL KA-2970 SERIES
Model KA-2970-LK SP10T switch, is part of our productline of Low Profile, slim hermetically sealed switches.

• Frequency range: 1 to 18 GHz• All in-line output ports• Non-reflective

The Model KA-2970 series is equipped with an
integrated driver that is powered by +5 and –12 volt
supplies. The proper currents required to switch theports ON or OFF are provided by the driver, which iscontrolled by external logic signals.

• Internal Decoder• Hermetically Sealed• Low Profile
T
ODUC
–
R PR
E
RING
D
R
LO
ORDE
A
I
E
C
R
E
O
F
SP
RY BE
ACTO
F
T
L
U
CONS

­–

253

Model KA-2970-LK SP10T Switch
Specifications
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONSFREQUENCY RANGE(GHz)CHARACTERISTIC

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR one port ON
Max. VSWR OFF

Switching TimeON Time........................500 nsec max.
OFF Time......................500 nsec max.
Switching Rate.................0.1 MHz max.
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance  Degradation...............500 mW cw or peak
Survival Power...............@25°C 1W cw

Power Supply Requirements+5V ±2%, 300 mA max–12V ±2%, 100 mA max

Control Characteristics
4 Bit decoder BCD

OPTIONS

1.0
to
10.0

10.0
to
18.0

70
4.1
2.0 :12.2 :160
5.6
2.0 :12.2 :1OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature
Range......................... -40°C to +85°C
Non-Operating Temperature
Range......................... –55°C to +125°C
Humidity........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B, Cond.
(96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock............................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B, Cond.
C (100G/ 6 msec)
Vibration........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D, Cond.
G (30g PEAK)
Altitude.......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C, Cond.
C (70,000 ft.)Temp. Shock................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D, Cond.
A, (5 cycles) -55°C to +125°C
Seal ..............................MIL-STD 202F, Method 112C,
Cond. C 5x10-7
Salt Spray .....................MIL-STD 202F, Method
101D+EST., Cond. B

1. Other Frequency Bands
2. Reflective
3. Different Outline
4. Video Leakage Requirements
5. Option G09 - Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings254

Model KA-2970-LK SP10T Switch
Specifications

4 BIT DECODER
E4

E3

E2

E1

J1

0

0

0

1

J2

0

0

1

0

J3

0

0

1

1

J4

0

1

0

0

J5

0

1

0

1

J6

0

1

1

0

J7

0

1

1

1

J8

1

0

0

0

J9

1

0

0

1

10
ALL
OFF

1

0

1

0

1

1

1

1

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

2552553 Series Model 2553-B48
SP12T Phase and Amplitude Matched Switch
MODEL 2553 SERIES• Frequency range: 6 to 18 GHz

Model 2553 series consists of SP8T-SP12T multi
throw switches. In this series, all output ports are in-line
and the ports are phase and amplitude matched.
The 2553 series consists of the following multi throwswitches:• Phase matched• Amplitude matched• All in-line output ports• Non-reflective

TYPE

MODEL NO.

SP8T

2553-B90

SP10T

2553-B39

SP12T

2553-B48

The Model 2553 series is equipped with an integrated
driver that is powered by +5 and –12 volt supplies. The
proper currents required to switch the ports ON or
OFF are provided by the driver, which is controlled byexternal logic signals.

Switch Model 2553-B48

256

Model 2553-B48 SP12T Switch
Specifications
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONSFREQUENCY RANGE(GHz)CHARACTERISTIC

6.0
to
12.0

12.0
to
18.0

Min. Isolation (dB)7070Max. Insertion Loss (dB)

4.3

5.6

Max. VSWR one port ON

2.0 :12.0 :1Max. VSWR OFF

2.2 :12.2 :1

Amplitude Matching(between any two output ports) ...........1.2 dB max.
Phase Matching(between any two output ports)........... 30° max.
Switching TimeON Time........................700 nsec max.
OFF Time......................700 nsec max.
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance  Degradation...............600 mW cw or peak
Survival Power...............1.5W cw

Power Supply Requirements+5V ±5%, 350 mA max–12V ±5%, 100 mA max

Control Characteristics
Control Input
Impedance...................Schottky TTL, two unit loads. (A unit load is 2 mA sink current
and 50 µA source current.)
Control logic....................Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V) for “ON” state. Logic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0V)
for “OFF” state.
Operating Temperature.........0°C to +70°C
Storage Temperature.........-20°C to +70°C

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G12
RoHS Compliant

257

Model 2553-B48 SP12T Switch
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTPIN OUT

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

258

PIN

FUNCTION

1

+5V

2

J2 CONTROL

3

J4 CONTROL

4

J6 CONTROL

5

J8 CONTROL

6

J10 CONTROL

7

J12 CONTROL

8

–12V

9

J1 CONTROL

10

J3 CONTROL

11

J5 CONTROL

12

J7 CONTROL

13

J9 CONTROL

14

J11 CONTROL

15

GND

Model NA-2750-CO
Low Profile Absorptive SP13T Switch
MODEL NA-2750 SERIES• Frequency range: 5.3 to 7.5 GHz
Model NA-2750-CO SP13T switch is part of our productline of Low Profile, slim hermetically sealed switches.

• Non-reflective

The Model NA-2750 series is equipped with an
integrated driver that is powered by +5 and -12 volt
supplies. The proper currents required to switch theports ON or OFF are provided by the driver, which iscontrolled by external logic signals.

• Hermetically Sealed• Internal Decoder• Low Profile• Decoder
T
ODUC
–
R PR
E
RING
D
R
ORDE
IAL O
E
C
R
E
O
P
S
BEF
ORY
FACT
T
L
U
CONS

­–

259

Model NA-2750-CO SP13T Switch
Specifications
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONSCHARACTERISTICFREQUENCY
RANGE
(GHz)
5.3
to
7.5

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR one port ON
Max. VSWR OFF

Switching TimeON Time........................100 nsec max.
OFF Time......................100 nsec max.
Switching Rate.................0.1 MHz max.
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance  Degradation...............200 mW cw or peak
Survival Power...............@25°C 1W cw

Power Supply Requirements+5V ±2%, 600 mA max-12V ±2%, 140 mA max

Control Characteristics
4 Bit decoder

OPTIONS50
4.5
1.8 :1
1.8 :1

Option (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature
Range......................... -20°C to +70°C
Non-Operating Temperature
Range......................... –55°C to +125°C
Humidity........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B, Cond.
(96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock............................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B, Cond.
C (100G/ 6 msec)
Vibration........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D, Cond.
G (30g PEAK)
Altitude.......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C, Cond.
C (70,000 ft.)Temp. Shock................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D, Cond.
A, (5 cycles) -55°C to +125°C
Seal .............................MIL-STD 202F, Method 112C,
Cond. C 5x10-7
Salt Spray ...................MIL-STD 202F, Method
101D+EST., Cond. B

1. Other Frequency Bands
2. Reflective
3. Different Outline
4. Video Leakage Requirements
5. Option G09 - Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings260

Model NA-2750-CO SP13T Switch
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008261

Model OA-2750-CO
Low Profile Absorptive SP14T Switch
MODEL OA-2750 SERIES• Frequency range: 5.3 to 7.5 GHz• Non-reflective

Model OA-2750-CO SP14T switch is part of our productline of Low Profile, slim hermetically sealed switches.

• Internal Decoder• Hermetically Sealed

The Model OA-2750 series is equipped with an
integrated driver that is powered by +5 and -12 volt
supplies. The proper currents required to switch theports ON or OFF are provided by the driver, which iscontrolled by external logic signals.

• Low Profile• Decoder

T
ODUC
–
R PR
E
RING
D
R
ORDE
IAL O
E
C
R
E
O
P
S
BEF
ORY
FACT
T
L
U
CONS

­–

262

Model OA-2750-CO SP14T Switch
Specifications
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONSFREQUENCY RANGE(GHz)CHARACTERISTIC
5.3 to 7.5
Min. Isolation (dB)50

Max. Insertion Loss (dB)

4.5

Max. VSWR one port ON

1.8 :1Max. VSWR OFF

1.8 :1

Switching TimeON Time........................100 nsec max.
OFF Time......................100 nsec max.
Switching Rate.................0.1 MHz max.
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance  Degradation...............200 mW cw or peak
Survival Power...............@25°C 1W cw

Option (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS

Operating Temperature
Range............................-20°C to +70°C
Non-Operating Temperature
Range............................–55°C to +125°C
Humidity...........................MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock................................MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. C (100G/ 6 msec)
Power Supply Requirements
Vibration...........................MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D,+5V ±2%, 600 mA max
Cond. G (30g PEAK)-12V ±2%, 140 mA max
Altitude.............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. C (70,000 ft.)Temp. Shock....................MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Control Characteristics
Cond. A, (5 cycles) -55°C to +125°C
4 Bit TTL
Seal .............................MIL-STD 202F, Method 112C,
Cond. C 5x10-7
Salt Spray ....................MIL-STD 202F, Method
OPTIONS
101D+EST., Cond. B
The switch can be supplied with various options.
Please consult us for more details.
1. Other Frequency Bands
2. Reflective
3. Different Outline
4. Video Leakage Requirements
5. Option G09 - Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings263

Model OA-2750-CO SP14T Switch
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008264Model PA-2750-CO
Low-Profile Absorptive SP15T Switch
MODEL PA-2750 SERIES• Frequency range: 5.3 to 7.5 GHz• Non-reflective

Model PA-2750-CO SP15T switch is part of our productline of Low Profile, slim hermetically sealed switches.

• Internal Decoder• Hermetically Sealed

The Model PA-2750 series is equipped with an
integrated driver that is powered by +5 and -12 volt
supplies. The proper currents required to switch theports ON or OFF are provided by the driver, which iscontrolled by external logic signals.

• Low Profile• Decoder
UCT
PROD
R
ING–
E
D
OR
RDER
L
O
A
I
E
C
R
O
SPE
Y BEF
CTOR
A
F
T
NSUL

–­ CO

265

Model PA-2750-CO SP15T Switch
Specifications
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONSCHARACTERISTIC

5.3
to
7.5

Min. Isolation (dB)50

Max. Insertion Loss (dB)

4.5

Max. VSWR one port ON

1.8 :1Max. VSWR OFF

1.8 :1

Switching TimeON Time........................100 nsec max.
OFF Time......................100 nsec max.
Switching Rate.................0.1 MHz max.
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance  Degradation............ 200 mW cw or peak
Survival Power............ @25°C 1W cw

Power Supply Requirements+5V ±2%, 600 mA max-12V ±2%, 140 mA max

Control Characteristics
4 Bit decoder

OPTIONSFREQUENCY
RANGE
(GHz)

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature
Range.............................-20°C to +70°C
Non-Operating Temperature
Range.............................–55°C to +125°C
Humidity............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock.................................MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. C (100G/ 6 msec)
Vibration.............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D,
Cond. G (30g PEAK)
Altitude...............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. C (70,000 ft.)Temp. Shock......................MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, (5 cycles) -55°C to +125°C
Seal .............................MIL-STD 202F, Method 112C,
Cond. C 5x10-7
Salt Spray ...................MIL-STD 202F, Method
101D+EST., Cond. B

The switch can be supplied with various options.
Please consult us for more details.
1. Other Frequency Bands
2. Reflective
3. Different Outline
4. Video Leakage Requirements
5. Option G09 - Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings

266

Model PA-2750-CO SP15T Switch
Specifications

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008267

Model 1744
SP16T PIN Diode Switch
General Microwave Corporation’s SP16T PIN Diode
Switch, Model 1744, covers the 2 to 18 GHz frequency
band. The switch exhibits a maximum insertion lossof 6.0 dB and an isolation of 60 dB to 14 GHz and
50 dB to 18 GHz. The switching speed is 500 nsec
maximum. This compact unit measures 4.5 x 4.0
x 0.75". Power supply voltages are +5V and +15 VDC,
and it is controlled by 7‑bit TTL binary logic. The switch
operates over the temperature range of –40ºC to +85ºC.

• Frequency Range: 2‑18 GHz• Non‑reflective•H igh Isolation, Low Insertion
Loss and VSWR
• Switching Speed: 500 nsec

UCT
PROD
R
ING–
E
D
OR
RDER
L
O
A
I
E
C
R
O
SPE
Y BEF
CTOR
A
F
T
NSUL

–­ CO

Switch Model 1744

268

Model 1744
SP16T Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency............................... 2.0 to 18.0 GHz
Insertion Loss........................ 6.0 dB max.
VSWR (ON or OFF)................ 2.0 :1 max.
Isolation................................... 60 dB min. to 14 GHz
50 dB min. to 18 GHz
Switching Speed.................... 500 nsec max.
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance Degradation   Input to any OFF port....... 100 mW cw or peak   Input to any ON port........ 1W cw or peak   Input to common port...... 1W cw or peak
Survival Power   Input to any OFF port....... 1W average, 10W peak (1µsec max. pulse width)   Input to any ON port........ 1W average, 75W peak (1µsec max. pulse width)   Input to common port...... 1W average, 75W peak (1µsec max. pulse width)Power Supply......................... +5 VDC at 250 mA+15 VDC at 100 mA
Control Input Impedance..... TTL, two unit load. (A unitload is 0.8 mA sinkcurrent and 40 µA source
current.)
Control Logic.......................... 5-bit TTL(Decoded Input)
Connector............................... DA-15P Multipin
Operating Temperature........ 0° to +70°C

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
J17 PIN FUNCTIONSPINFUNCTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

MODEL 1744
Wt. 15 oz. (426 gm.)
Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

269

NOT USED+ 15V
NOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USED
CTL-3 (MSB-2)
CTL-5 (MSB)
CTL-6 (MSB-1)
GND
GND
CTL-2 (LSB+1)
NOT USED
CTL-1 (LSB)NOT USED+ 5V

Series PA16 SP16T Phase and Amplitude
Matched Switches
Series PA16
The Series PA16 Non-Reflective SP16T Switches
have been designed for distribution of wide-band RF/
Microwave signals. Applications include EW Simulators
and Test Systems. All output ports are Phase andAmplitude matched to further minimize Simulator
calibration and enhance the fidelity of Test Systems• Frequency range: 0.5 to 18 GHz• Phase matched• Amplitude matched• Non-reflective

Switch Model PA16

270

PA16 SP16T Switch Specifications
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONSMODEL NUMBER
CHARACTERISTIC
PA1606

PA1618

0.5 to 6.0

1.0 to 18

Min. Isolation (dB)

65

60

Max. Insertion Loss (dB)

6.0

6.5

Max. VSWR one port ON

2.0 :12.2 :1Max. VSWR OFF

2.0 :12.2 :1

Min. Frequency Range (GHz)Power Handling Capability

Amplitude Matching(between any two output ports) ...........1.5 dB max.

Without Performance Degradation
Input to any “OFF” port: 100 mW cw or peak
Input to any “ON” port: 1W cw or peak
Input to common port: 1W cw or peak
Survival Power
Input to any “OFF” port: 1W average,
10W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)
Input to any “ON” port: 1W average,
75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)
Input to common port: 1W average,
75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)

Phase Matching(between any two output ports)........... 30° max.

Switching TimeON Time........................500 nsec max.
OFF Time......................500 nsec max.

Power Supply Requirements+5V ±5%, 450 mA max–12V ±5%, 135 mA max

Control Logic

4 Bit TTL Decoded Input.

Operating Temperature.....-20°C to +70°C
Storage Temperature.........-20°C to +70°C

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G12
RoHS Compliant271

PA16 SP16T Switch Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

272

PA16 SP16T Switch Specifications

273

Model F940H
Broadband Transfer Switch
MODEL F940H• Frequency range: 0.5 to 18 GHz

Model F940H is a high‑performance broadband
transfer switch that operates over the full instantaneous
bandwidth of 0.5 to 18 GHz with ON and OFF times of
30 nsec. Design features include an integrated circuitassembly of PIN diodes mounted in a microstrip
transmission line as well as a resistive bias line that
contributes to the broadband low‑loss performance.
The circuit configuration of the Model F940H is shown
below.

• Low VSWR and insertion loss
• Isolation: up to 60 dB• Small size, light weight

Switch Model F940H

The Model F940H is equipped with an integrated driverthat is powered by +5 and –12 volt supplies. The proper
currents required to switch the ports ON or OFF areprovided by the driver, which is controlled by external
logic signals.

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSFREQUENCY (GHz)CHARACTERISTIC

0.5
to
8.0

8.0
to
12.4

12.4
to
18.0

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR

60
2.0
1.75

55
2.5
1.75

50
3.5
2.0

274

Model F940H
Specifications
Switching TimeON Time........................30 nsec max.
OFF Time......................30 nsec max.
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance  Degradation...............500 mW cw or peak
Survival Power...............1W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)Power Supply Requirements+5V ±5%, 60 mA–12V ±5%, 75 mA

Control Characteristics
Control Input
Impedance...................Schottky TTL, two unit loads.
(A unit load is 2 mA sinkcurrent and 50 µA source
current.)
Control logic....................Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V)
connects J1 to J2 and J3 to
J4. Logic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0V)
connects J1 to J4 and J2 toJ3.

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTOPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature
Range......................... –54°C to +110°C
Non-Operating Temperature
Range......................... –65°C to +125°C
Humidity........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock............................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D,
Cond. B (.06" double amplitude
or 15G, whichever is less)Altitude.......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling............... MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, 5 cycles

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
7	SMA male RF connectors
9	Inverse control logic; logic “0” connects
J1 to J4 and J2 to J3, and logic “1”connects J1 to J2 and J3 to J4.
33	EMI filter solder-type control terminal
48	+5V, –15V operation
64A
SMB male control connector
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

Wt: 1.1 oz (31 gr.)

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008275

Hermetically Sealed Low Profile Switches
Selection Guide
KRATOS General Microwave is offering a broad range of Hermetically Sealed, Low Profile switches. These are highspeed, wide frequency range, high performance switches with low insertion loss and high isolation. They varyfrom SPST through SP6T, higher Multi-Throw switches are available as specials. The standard thickness of theseswitches is typically about 0.23” (6.0mm). In some cases, we can provide switches of 0.19” (4.9 mm) too. These
switches are meeting sever environmental requirements such as airborne and naval applications.
In addition to the standard configuration as specified in this catalog, they can be supplied with various options
such as: Reflective or Non-Reflective (absorptive), low video leakage , various Power Supply Voltages, OverVoltage Protection and in Drop-In configuration.

HERMETICALLY SEALED SWITCHESFREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)
0.1

0.5

1

2

4

8

12.4

18

20

MODEL ORSERIESPAGE

SPST SWITCHES
1

E9114H

18

277

SPDT SWITCHES
1

18

E9120H/HT

280

SP3T SWITCHES
1

18

E9130H/HT

284

SP4T SWITCHES
1

18

E9140H/HT

288

SP5T SWITCHES
0.5

18

ER-2260-UK

292

SP6T SWITCHES
0.5

18

FR-2260-UK

205

SP9T SWITCHES
8

12

IA-2470-XO

244

SP13T SWITCHES
5.3

7.5

NA-2750-CO

259

SP14T SWITCHES
5.3

7.5

OA-2750-CO

610

SP15T SWITCHES
5.3

7.5

PA-2750-CO

276

265

COMMENTSModel E9114H Hermetically Sealed
Low Profile SPST Switch
The Model E9114H is a hermetically sealed, low costhigh speed SPST PIN diode switch with integrated
driver. The switch can be used as a drop-in module.
The switch operates over the instantaneous frequency
range of 1 to 18 GHz.

• Low cost• Frequency range: 1 to 18 GHz• High speed: 10 nsec rise fall times• Typical 80 dB isolation• Low VSWR and insertion loss
• Low in-band video leakage• Low profile• Hermetically sealed• Can be used as drop-in module

Switch Model E9114

277

Model E9114H
SPST Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSFREQUENCY (GHz)CHARACTERISTIC

1– 2

2– 4

4–8

8 –12.4

12.4 –18

Min. Isolation (dB)

60

74

80

80

80

Max. Insertion Loss (dB)

0.9

0.9

1.2

1.6

2.5

VSWR (ON STATE)

1.4

1.4

1.75

1.75

2.0

Power Supply Requirements
Standard Switch

With Option 11

With Option 62

MODEL NO.

+5V ±5%–12V ±5%+5V ±5%–5V ±5%+5V ±5%–15V ±5%E9114H

60 mA max

40 mA max

60 mA max

40 mA max

60 mA max

40 mA max

Switching Characteristics
AVAILABLE OPTIONSRise Time..................... 10 nsec max.
(Consult factory before ordering)
Fall Time....................... 10 nsec max.
ON Time....................... 25 nsec max.
Option No.	  Description
OFF Time..................... 20 nsec max.
7	SMA male RF connectors all ports
Power Handling Capability
9	Inverse control logic; logic “1” for switch ON
Without Performanceand logic “0” for switch OFF  Degradation............. 200 mW cw or peak11	
+5V, –5V operation
Survival Power............. 2W average, 75W peak (1 µsec
43*	Internal video filter, all ports
max. pulse width)
49
High Reliability Screening
Control Characteristics
Control Input
62+5, –15V operation  Impedance............... TTL, 1-unit load
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings
Control Logic  Logic “0”.................. (max. VIL = 0.8V) for switch ON *See Video Filter Options on page 169.
  Logic “1”.................. (min. VIH = 2V) for switch OFF

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATING
1	Operating Temperature Range – -54°C to +95°C.
2	Humidity – MIL-STD-202G, Method 103B, Condition B (96 hours at 95%).
3	Shock – MIL-STD-202G, Method 213B, Condition A (50G, 11 msec).
4	Vibration – MIL-STD-202G, Method 204D, Condition B (0.06” double amplitude
or 15G,
5
Altitude – MIL-STD-202G, Method 105C, Condition B (50,000 ft.).
6
Temperature Cycling – MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D, Condition A (5 cycles.).

278Model E9114H
SPST Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
Model E9114H

Wt.: 0.28 oz. (8 gr.) approx.

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008279

Models E9120H and E9120HT Heretically
Sealed Low Profile SPDT
The Model E9120H is a hermetically sealed, low costhigh speed, SPDT PIN diode switch with integrated
driver. The switch can be used as a drop-in module.
The switch operates over the instantaneous frequency
range of 1 to 18 GHz.
The Model E9120HT is a non-reflective version ofthis switch.

• Low cost• Frequency range: 1 to 18 GHz• High speed: 10 nsec rise fall times• Isolation 60 dB• Reflective and non-reflective models• Low VSWR and insertion loss
• Low in-band video leakage• Hermetically sealed• Low profile• Can be used as a drop-in module

Switch Model E9120H

280

Models E9120H and E9120HTSPDT Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSFREQUENCY (GHz)
MODEL
NO.

CHARACTERISTIC

1– 4

4–8

8 –12.4

12.4 –18

E9120H

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

60
1.1
1.75

60
1.4
1.75

60
2.0
1.75

50
2.5
2.0

E9120HTMin. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR Port ON
Max. VSWR Port OFF

60
1.3
1.75
1.75

60
1.7
1.9
2.0

60
2.5
2.0
2.2

50
3.0
2.0
2.3

Power Supply Requirements
Standard Switch

With Option 11

With Option 62

MODEL NO.

+5V ±5%–12V ±5%+5V ±5%–5V ±5%+5V ±5%–15V ±5%E9120H

95 mA max

70 mA max

95 mA max

70 mA max

95 mA max

70 mA max

E9120HT

95 mA max

70 mA max

95 mA max

70 mA max

95 mA max

70 mA max

Survival Power:
Reflective Switches..............1W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)
Non-Reflective Switches   Input to OFF port:.............1W average, 10W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to ON port:..............1W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to COMMON   port: ..............................1W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)
Control Characteristics
Control Input
Impedance............................TTL, 1-unit load
Control Logic
Logic “0”...............................(max. VIL = 0.8V) for
switch ON
Logic “1”...............................(min. VIH = 2V) for switch
OFF

Switching Characteristics
Rise Time....................................... 10 nsec max.
Fall Time......................................... 10 nsec max.
ON Time......................................... 25 nsec. max
OFF Time....................................... 20 nsec max.
Max. Repetition rate...................... 20 MHz.
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance Degradation
Reflective Switches................... 200 mW cw or peak
Non-Reflective Switches  Input to OFF port:.................. 100 mW cw or peak   Input to ON port: .................. 200 mW cw or peak   Input to COMMON port:....... 200 mW cw or peak281

Models E9120H and E9120HTSPDT Specifications
OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATING
1	Operating Temperature Range – -54oC to +95oC.
2	Humidity – MIL-STD-202G, Method 103B, Condition B (96 hours at 95%).
3	Shock – MIL-STD-202G, Method 213B, Condition A (50G, 11 msec).
4	Vibration – MIL-STD-202G, Method 204D, Condition B (0.06” double amplitude
or 15G,
5
Altitude – MIL-STD-202G, Method 105C, Condition B (50,000 ft.).
6
Temperature Cycling – MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D, Condition A (5 cycles.).

AVAILABLE OPTIONS(Consult factory before ordering)
Option No.	  Description
7	SMA male RF connectors all ports
9	Inverse control logic; logic “1” for switch ON and logic “0” forswitch OFF
11	+5V, –5V operation
27	Single-port toggle; logic: Logic “0” connects J1 to J2
43*	Internal video filter, all ports
49
High Reliability Screening
62+5, –15V operation
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings*See Video Filter Options on page 169282

Models E9120H and E9120HTSPDT Specifications

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
Model E9120H/HT

Note 1: Not used with Option 27

Wt.: 0.42 oz. (12 gr.) approx.

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008283

Models E9130H and E9130HT Hermetically
Sealed Low Profile SP3T Switches• Low cost• Frequency range: 1 to 18 GHz• High Speed: 10 nsec rise fall times• Reflective and non-reflective models• High Performance• Improve in-band video leakage

The Model E9130H is a hermetically sealed, low costhigh speed, SP3T PIN diode switch with integrated
driver. The switch can be used as a drop-in module.
The switch operates over the instantaneous frequency
range of 1 to 18 GHz.
The Model E9130HT is a non-reflective version ofthis switch.

• Hermetically sealed• Low profile• Drop-in

Switch Model E9130H

284

Models E9130H and E9130HT
SP3T Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSFREQUENCY (GHz)
MODEL
NO.

CHARACTERISTIC

1– 4

4–8

8 –12.4

12.4 –18

E9130H

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)
VSWR (ON)

60
1.2
1.75

60
1.5
1.75

60
2.0
1.75

50
2.6
2.0

E9130HTMin. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR Port On
Max. VSWR Port Off

60
1.6
1.75
1.75

60
1.8
1.9
2.0

60
2.5
2.0
2.2

50
3.3
2.0
2.3

Power Supply Requirements
Standard Switch

With Option 11

With Option 62

MODEL NO.

+5V ±5%–12V ±5%+5V ±5%–5V ±5%+5V ±5%–15V ±5%E9130H

110 mA max

65 mA max

110 mA max

65 mA max

110 mA max

65 mA max

E9130HT

110 mA max

65 mA max

110 mA max

65 mA max

110 mA max

65 mA max

Survival Power:
Reflective Switches..............1W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)
Non-Reflective Switches   Input to OFF port:.............1W average, 10W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to ON port:..............1W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to COMMON   port: ..............................1W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)
Control Characteristics
Control Input
Impedance............................TTL, 1-unit load
Control Logic
Logic “0”...............................(max. VIL = 0.8V) for
switch ON
Logic “1”...............................(min. VIH = 2V) for switch
OFF

Switching Characteristics
Rise Time....................................... 10 nsec max.
Fall Time......................................... 10 nsec max.
ON Time......................................... 25 nsec. max
OFF Time....................................... 20 nsec max.
Max. Repetition rate...................... 20 MHz.
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance Degradation
Reflective Switches................... 200 mW cw or peak
Non-Reflective Switches  Input to OFF port:.................. 100 mW cw or peak   Input to ON port: .................. 200 mW cw or peak   Input to COMMON port:....... 200 mW cw or peak285

Models E9130H and E9130HT
SP3T Specifications
AVAILABLE OPTIONS(Consult factory before ordering)
Option No.	  Description
7	SMA male RF connectors all ports
9	Inverse control logic; logic “1” for switch ON and logic “0” forswitch OFF
11	–5V, +5V operation
43*	Internal video filter, all ports
49
High Reliability Screening
62+5, –15V operation
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings*See Video Filter Options on page 169

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATING
1	Operating Temperature Range – -54oC to +95oC.
2	Humidity – MIL-STD-202G, Method 103B, Condition B (96 hours at 95%).
3	Shock – MIL-STD-202G, Method 213B, Condition A (50G, 11 msec).
4	Vibration – MIL-STD-202G, Method 204D, Condition B (0.06” double amplitude
or 15G,
5
Altitude – MIL-STD-202G, Method 105C, Condition B (50,000 ft.).
6
Temperature Cycling – MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D, Condition A (5 cycles.).

286Models E9130H and E9130HT
SP3T Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
Model E9130H/HT



 





 





  


 

    


 
 

 
 

 

 
 
 


 





   
 


 
 

 
 
 


 

Wt.: 0.70 oz. (20 gr.) approx.

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

287



 






  
 

 

 











 

Models E9140H and E9140HT Hermetically
Sealed Low Profile SP4T Switches
The Model E9140H is a hermetically sealed, low costhigh speed, SP4T PIN diode switch with integrated
driver. The switch can be used as a drop-in module.
The switch operates over the instantaneous frequency
range of 1 to 18 GHz.
The Model E9140HT is a non-reflective version ofthis switch.

• Low cost• Frequency range: 1 to 18 GHz• High Speed: 10 nsec rise fall times• Reflective and non-reflective models• Low insertion loss• Low in-band video leakage• Hermetically sealed• Low profile• Drop-in

Switch Model E9140H

288

Models E9140H and E9140HT
SP4T Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSFREQUENCY (GHz)
MODEL
NO.

CHARACTERISTIC

1– 4

4–8

8 –12.4

12.4 –18

E9140H

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

60
1.4
1.75

60
1.5
1.75

60
2.0
1.75

50
2.8
2.0

E9140HTMin. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR Port On
Max. VSWR Port Off

60
1.6
1.75
1.75

60
1.8
1.9
2.0

60
2.5
2.0
2.2

50
3.3
2.0
2.3

Power Supply Requirements
Standard Switch

With Option 11

With Option 62

MODEL NO.

+5V ±5%–12V ±5%+5V ±5%–5V ±5%+5V ±5%–15V ±5%E9140H

135 mA max

65 mA max

135 mA max

65 mA max

135 mA max

65 mA max

E9140HT

135 mA max

65 mA max

135 mA max

65 mA max

135 mA max

65 mA max

Switching Characteristics
Rise Time....................................... 10 nsec max.
Fall Time......................................... 10 nsec max.
ON Time......................................... 25 nsec. max
OFF Time....................................... 20 nsec max.
Max. Repetition rate...................... 20 MHz.
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance Degradation
Reflective Switches................... 200 mW cw or peak
Non-Reflective Switches  Input to OFF port:.................. 100 mW cw or peak   Input to ON port: .................. 200 mW cw or peak   Input to COMMON port........ 200 mW cw or peak

Survival Power:
Reflective Switches..............1W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)
Non-Reflective Switches   Input to OFF port:.............1W average, 10W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to ON port:..............1W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)   Input to COMMON   port: ..............................1W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)
Control Characteristics
Control Input
Impedance............................TTL, 1-unit load
Control Logic
Logic “0”...............................(max. VIL = 0.8V) for
switch ON
Logic “1”...............................(min. VIH = 2V) for switch
OFF

289

Models E9140H and E9140HT
SP4T Specifications
AVAILABLE OPTIONS(Consult factory before ordering)
Option No.	  Description
7	SMA male RF connectors all ports
9	Inverse control logic; logic “1” for switch ON andlogic “0” for switch OFF
11+5V, –5V operation
43*	Internal video filter, all ports
49
High Reliability Screening
62–15V operation
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings*See Video Filter Options on page 169

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATING
1	Operating Temperature Range – -54oC to +95oC.
2	Humidity – MIL-STD-202G, Method 103B, Condition B (96 hours at 95%).
3	Shock – MIL-STD-202G, Method 213B, Condition A (50G, 11 msec).
4	Vibration – MIL-STD-202G, Method 204D, Condition B (0.06” double amplitude
or 15G,
5
Altitude – MIL-STD-202G, Method 105C, Condition B (50,000 ft.).
6
Temperature Cycling – MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D, Condition A (5 cycles.).

290Models E9140H and E9140HT
SP4T Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT


 

 



 





 





     



 

 
 












  







 

     








 


 
 



 





 



Wt.: 0.74 oz. (21 gr.) approx.
Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008291

Model ER-2260-UK Hermetically Sealed
Low Profile SP5T Switch
The Model ER-2260-UK is a hermetically sealed, lowcost high speed, SP5T PIN diode switch with integrated
driver. The switch operates over the instantaneous
frequency range of 0.5 to 18 GHz, with an option of 0.5
to 20 GHz

• Frequency range: 0.5 to 18 GHz• Low VSWR and insertion loss
• Isolation: up to 70 dB• Small size, light weightThis switch can be ordered in the basic catalog
configuration as specified below, or in a much thinner
outline or as a drop-in switch..

• With Integrated Driver• Low Video Leakage• Removable Connectors

292Model ER-2260-UK
SP5T Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSFREQUENCY (GHz)

MODEL
NO.
ER-2260-UK

CHARACTERISTIC

0.5-2

2-4

4-8

8-12

12-18

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

70
2.0
1.8:1

70
2.0
1.9:1

70
2.5
2.0:1

65
3.0
2.0:1

60
3.6
2.0:1

Switching TimeOPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS

ON Time........................20 nsec max.
OFF Time......................20 nsec max.

Power Handling Capability
Without Performance   Degradation,,,,,,,.......200 mW cw or peak
Survival Power...............1W CW, 20W peak (1 µsec
max. pulse width with 5%
duty cycle). Derate Linearly to
50% at +95oC

Control logic...............Logic “0” (0 to +0.8V) =Insertion Loss Logic “1”(+2.0 to +5.5V) = Isolation

Operating Temperature
Range......................... –54°C to +95°C
Humidity........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. B
Shock............................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. B
Vibration........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D,
Cond. B (.06" double amplitude
or 15G, whichever is less)Altitude.......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)
Thermal Shock............. MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, 5 cycles

Power Supply Requirements+5V ±0.5V (mA), max

140-12V ±10% (mA), max

90

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

TTL control logic (inverting or non-inverting)
BCD Decoder driver
Other DC Voltage supply
Very Low Video Leakage
Over Voltage Protection
Non-Reflective
Drop-In package
Extremely Low Profile, thickness of 6.1mm (0.24”)
Option G09 - Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings

293

Model ER-2260-UK
SP5T Specifications
Model ER-2260-UK (SP5T)

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008294Model FR-2260-UK Hermetically Sealed
Low Profile SP6T Switch
The Model FR-2260-UK is a hermetically sealed, lowcost high speed, SP6T PIN diode switch with integrated
driver. The switch operates over the instantaneous
frequency range of 0.5 to 18 GHz, with an option of 1 to
20 GHz• Frequency range: 0.5 to 18 GHz• Low VSWR and insertion loss
• Isolation: up to 70 dB• Small size, light weightThis switch can be ordered in the basic catalog
configuration as specified below, or in a much thinner
outline or as a drop-in switch..

• With Integrated Driver• Low Video Leakage• Removable Connectors

295Model FR-2260-UK
SP6T Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSFREQUENCY (GHz)FR-2260-UK

CHARACTERISTIC

0.5-2

2-4

4-8

8-12

12-18

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

70
2.0
1.8:1

75
2.0
1.9:1

70
2.5
2.0:1

65
3.0
2.0:1

60
3.6
2.0:1

Switching TimeOPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS

ON Time........................20 nsec max.
OFF Time......................20 nsec max.

Power Handling Capability
Without Performance   Degradation,,,,,,,.......200 mW cw or peak
Survival Power...............1W CW, 20W peak (1 µsec
max. pulse width with 5%
duty cycle). Derate Linearly
to 50% at +95oC

Control logic...............Logic “0” (0 to +0.8V) =Operating Temperature
Range......................... –54°C to +95°C
Humidity........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B, Cond. B
Shock............................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B, Cond. B
Vibration........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D, Cond.
B (.06" double amplitude or 15G,
whichever is less)Altitude.......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C, Cond. B(50,000 ft.)
Thermal Shock............. MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D, Cond.
A, 5 cycles

Insertion Loss Logic “1”(+2.0 to +5.5V) = Isolation

Power Supply Requirements+5V ±0.5V (mA), max-12V ±10% (mA), max

160
100

AVAILABLE OPTIONS*
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

TTL control logic (inverting or non-inverting)
BCD Decoder driver
Other DC Voltage supply
Over Voltage Protection
Non-Reflective
Drop-In package
Extremely Low Profile, thickness of 6.1 mm (0.24”)
Option G09 - Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings296

Model FR-2260-UK
SP6T Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008297

High Power & Medium Power Switches
HIGH POWER & MEDIUM POWER SWITCHESKRATOS General Microwave offers wide selection of High and Medium Power PIN Diode Microwave Switches. Current non-reflective and reflective switch designs will support HF, UHF, IFF,
L-Band, C-Band and Multi-Band operation with design capabilities up to 18 GHz. These switches
are ideal for use in various systems including Communications, IFF, EW, Radar, Test Equipment
and other applications demanding high performance, high reliability devices.
The High Power Switches are capable of handling power levels of up to 1K Watts the Medium
Power Switches are capable of handling power levels of 30 Watts.
These High and Medium Power Switch designs are accomplished using PIN Diode shunt andshunt-series topology as required by the individual performance characteristics. Special materials
are utilized for proper heat dissipation. A proprietary PIN Diode Driver, incorporating TTL control,
has been designed for these switches. That driver is capable of supplying reverse bias of up to-100 Volts and forward current up to 150 mA.
Most of the High and Medium Power Switches are custom designs. Therefore, variations ofFrequency Range, Switching Time, Operating Temperature are possible for many of the switches
shown. Standard component packaging, utilizing SMA or TNC RF connectors are shown but Carrier drop-in configurations are also available is some models.

HIGH POWER & MEDIUM POWER SWITCHESFREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)
0 .1    0 . 2   0 . 5    1    
2   4    8   1 2 . 4

18

MODEL

PAGE

COMMENTSSPDT SWITCHES
2.5
1.4
0.25

HPS-9257

7.5

299

SW-2367-01

1.8

SW-2746-02

0.8
4.4

60W CW
304

SW-2876-02

5.0

HPS-9201

10%200W CW

100W Peak
20W CW

3002

500W, L Band

SP3T SWITCHES
HPS-9301

10%

0.2

10%

HPS-930210%

HPS-9303
SW-2746-03

0.8

350W Peak, IFF Band
311

500W Peak, L Band
1,000W Peak, L Band

308

10W CW

SP4T SWITCHES
5.0
1.0

17.0

1.9

HPS-9417
SW-1193-00
SW-1996-00

1.3
2.1

316

7W CW

313

65W CW
50W CW

317

5W CW

SP6T SWITCHES
4.4

5.0

SW-2876-06

298

Model HPS-9257 High PowerSPDT Switch
HIGH POWER SWITCH Model 9257
KRATOS General Microwave has developed model HPS-9257
wide frequency band High Power SP2T switch. This switch
operates in the entire frequency range of 2.5 GHz to 7.5 GHz,

• Wide Band 2.5 to 7.5 GHz

This switch can be supplied in a carrier configuration or as a
packaged switch.

• Cold Switching• Reflective• Low insertion loss• High Speed

UCT
–
PROD
R
E
RING
D
L OR
ORDE
A
I
E
C
R
E
FO
SP
RY BE
ACTO
F
T
L
ONSU

­–C

Switch Model HPS-9257

299

Model HPS-9257 SPDT Switch
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSPARAMETERPower Handling (W)200 CW

Frequency Range (GHz)

2.5 to 7.5

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion loss (dB)
VSWR ON

20
1.2
1.9:1

AVAILABLE OPTIONS

Switching Characteristics

1.
2.
G09

ON time...................................... 3.5 µsec max.
OFF time.................................... 3.5 µsec max.

Carrier drop-in configuration
Packaged configuration
Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings

Power Supply Requirements(For one port ON)
MODEL

HPS 9257+5V ± 5%

Negative Voltage

mA

V

mA

250

-50

10

Control Characteristics
Control Input Impedance T TL, low power Schottky,
one unit load. (A unit load is
0.8 mA sink current and 40µA source current.)
Control Logic........................ Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V)
for port ON and logic “1”(+2.0 to +5.0 V) for port
OFF.

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Temperature Range
Operating................... –40°C to +105°C
Non Operating..........–65°C to +125°C
Humidity...................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock........................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B, Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration...................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D, Cond. B (.06” double amplitude or 15G, whichever is less)Altitude........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)300

Model HPS 9257-SPDT Switch
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT - FOR PACKAGED CONFIGURATION

Wt.: 4.06 oz. (115 gr.) approx.

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

301

High Power SPDT Switches
Series HPS 9000
HIGH POWER SWITCHES SERIES HPS9000• High Power• Low insertion loss• High Speed• Cold Switching

KRATOS General Microwave has developed series
HPS900 line of High Power SPDT switches for various
applications. These switches operate in the IFF and L
bands, providing Power handling capability of up to 1kW
in cold switching.

• Non-reflective

–­ CO

UCT
PROD
R
ING–
E
D
OR
RDER
L
O
A
I
E
C
R
O
SPE
Y BEF
CTOR
A
F
T
NSUL

Typically these switches are assembled in a multi-switch
assembly. The number of switches in one sub-assembly
depends upon the specific architecture of the system.
The control and supply voltages to the switch subassembly is supplied via a multi-pin connector.

Switch Model HPS-9201(8 SWITCHES IN A SUB-ASSEMBLY)302

Series HPS 9000 SPDT Switches
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL
PARAMETERPower Handling (W), 100 µsec pulse width,
10% duty cycle
Frequency Range

HPS 9201500
L BandFrequency Bandwidth

10%

Min. Isolation (dB)40

Max. Insertion loss (dB)

1.2

VSWR ON and OFF

1.4:1

Switching Characteristics
ON time...................................... 3.5 µsec max.
OFF time.................................... 3.5 µsec max.

Power Supply Requirements(For one port ON)+5V ± 5%-60V

270 mA

40 mA

Control Characteristics
Control Input Impedance TTL, low power Schottky,
one unit load. (A unit load is
0.8 mA sink current and 40µA source current.)
Control Logic........................ Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V)
for port ON and logic “1”(+2.0 to +5.0 V) for port
OFF.

AVAILABLE OPTIONS*OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS

1. Operating Frequency Range
2. Mechanical Configuration
3. Option - G09 Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings

Temperature Range
Operating................... –40°C to +105°C
Non Operating..........–65°C to +125°C
Humidity...................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock........................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B, Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration...................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D, Cond. B (.06” double amplitude or 15G, whichever is
less)
Altitude........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
These High Power Switches are normally incorporated in systems as a sub-assembly of two or more switches. For
this reason specific outline and weight information can be provided per specific requirement.

303

High and Medium Power SPDT Switches
Series SW-2000-01
HIGH AND MEDIUM POWER SWITCHES
Series SW-2000-01• High and Medium Power• Low insertion loss

KRATOS General Microwave has developed series SW2000-01 High and Medium Power SPDT switches forvarious applications in the frequency range of 30 Hz to
5 GHz in various sub-bands.

• High Isolation• Reflective and non-reflective models• Fast Switching Speed

T
ODUC
–
R PR
E
RING
D
R
ORDE
IAL O
E
C
R
E
O
P
S
BEF
ORY
FACT
T
L
U
CONS

­–

HIGH POWER SPDT SWITCH

304

Series SW-2000-01 SPDT Switches
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
SW-2367-01

MODEL
SW-2746-02

SW-2876-02

1.4 to 1.8

0.25 to 0.8

4.4 to 5.0

CW (W) max.

60

N/A

20

Peak-Power (W) max.

N/A

100

N/A

a) Pulse Width (µsec) max.

N/A

50

N/A

b) Duty Cycle %

N/A

20

N/A

Isolation (dB) min.

35

40

60

Insertion loss (dB) max.

1.0

1.0

1.2

VSWR ON
VSWR OFF

1.6:1
N/A

1.5:1
1.6:1

1.5:1
N/A

PARAMETER
Frequency Range (GHz) max.
Power HandlingPower Supply Requirements(For one port ON)
MODEL+5V ± 5%

Negative Voltage

mA

V

mA

SW-2367-01

200

-50

30

SW-2746-02

170

-60

30

SW-2876-02

150

-15

20

Switching Characteristics

Control Characteristics
Control Input Impedance TTL, low power
Schottky, one unit load.
(A unit load is 0.8 mA
sink current and 40 µA
source current.)
Control Logic........................ Logic “0” (–0.3 to+0.8V) for port ON andlogic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0
V) for port OFF.

AVAILABLE OPTIONS

Cold Switching
Model SW-2876-02
ON OFF Time .........100 nsec max.
Switching Rate ........1 MHz max.
All Other Models
ON OFF Time...........10 µsec max.
Switching Rate...........500 kHz max.

1. Different Operating temperatures
2. Faster Switching Speeds
3. Inverse Control Logic
4. Option G09 - Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating...................... –40°C to +105°C
Non Operating..........–65°C to +125°C
Humidity............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock ...............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B, Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration...........................MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D, Cond. B (.06” double amplitude or 15G, whicheveris less)
Altitude ............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)305

Series SW-2000-01 SPDT Switches
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTMODEL SW-2876-02

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008306

Series SW-2000-01 SPDT Switches
Specifications
MODEL SW-2367-01 and MODEL SW-2746-02

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

307

Medium Power SP3T Switch
Model SW-2746-03
MEDIUM POWER SP3T SWITCH Model SW-2746-03
KRATOS General Microwave has developed model SW-2746-03
Medium Power SP3T switch, in the frequency range of 200 MHz to
800 MHz, for various applications.

UCT
–
PROD
R
E
RING
D
L OR
ORDE
A
I
E
C
R
E
FO
SP
RY BE
ACTO
F
T
L
ONSU

­–C

• Medium Power• Low insertion loss• High Isolation• Terminated308Model SW-2746-03 SP3T Switch
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL
PARAMETER

SW-2746-03

Frequency Range (MHz) min.

200 to 800

Power Handling
Peak-Power (W) max.

10a) Pulse Width (µsec) max.

50b) Duty Cycle (%)

20

Isolation (dB) min.

50

Insertion loss (dB) max.

0.7

VSWR ON

1.5:1

VSWR OFF

1.6:1

Control Characteristics

Power Supply Requirements

Control Input Impedance TTL, low power Schottky,
one unit load. (A unit load is
0.8 mA sink current and 40µA source current.)
Control Logic........................ Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V)
for port ON and logic “1”(+2.0 to +5.0 V) for port
OFF.

(For one port ON)
MODEL

SW-2746-03+5V ± 5%

Negative Voltage

mA

V

mA

200

-28

30

AVAILABLE OPTIONS

Switching Characteristics

1. Different Operating temperatures
2. Different Switching Speeds
3. Inverse Control Logic
4. Option G09 - Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings

Cold Switching
On Off Time....................1 µsec max.
Switching Rate.................0.1 MHz max.

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature ..-20°C to +60°C
Storage Temperature .... -30°C to +95°C
Humidity............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock ...............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B, Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration...........................MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D, Cond. B (.06” double amplitude or 15G, whicheveris less)
Altitude ............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)309

Model SW-2746-03 SP3T Switch
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

310

High Power SP3T Switches
Series HPS 9000
• High Power• Low insertion loss• High Speed• Cold Switching• Non-reflective
UCT
PROD
R
ING–
E
D
OR
RDER
L
O
A
I
E
C
R
O
SPE
Y BEF
CTOR
A
F
T
NSUL

–­ CO

HIGH POWER SWITCHES SERIES HPS 9000
KRATOS General Microwave has developed series
HPS900 line of High Power SP3T switches for various
applications. These switches operate in the IFF and L
bands, providing Power handling capability of up to 1kW
in cold switching.
Typically these switches are assembled in a multi-switch
assembly. The number of switches in one sub-assembly
depends upon the specific architecture of the system.
The control and supply voltages to the switch subassembly is supplied via a multi-pin connector.

Switch Model HPS-9302(4 SWITCHES IN A SUB-ASSEMBLY)

311

Series HPS 9000 SP3T Switches
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL
PARAMETERPower Handling (W), 100 µsec pulse width,
10% duty cycle
Frequency Range
Frequency Bandwidth
Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion loss (dB)
VSWR ON and OFF

HPS 9301

HPS 9302

HPS 9303

350

500

1,000

IFF
10%
40
1.2
1.4:1

L BAND
10%
30
1.2
1.4:1

L BAND
10%
40
1.3
1.4:1

Switching Characteristics

Control Characteristics

ON time...................................... 3.5 µsec max.
OFF time.................................... 3.5 µsec max.

Control Input Impedance TTL, low power Schottky,
one unit load. (A unit load is
0.8 mA sink current and 40µA source current.)
Control Logic........................ Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V)
for port ON and logic “1”(+2.0 to +5.0 V) for port
OFF.

Power Supply Requirements(For one port ON)
MODEL+5V ± 5%

Negative Voltage

mA

V

mA

HPS 9301

400

-60

40

HPS 9302

450

-60

40

HPS 9303

450

-90

40

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
1. Operating Frequency Range
2. Mechanical Configuration
3.Option G09 - Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Temperature Range
Operating................... –55°C to +70°C
Non Operating..........–65°C to +125°C
Humidity...................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock........................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B, Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration...................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D, Cond. B (.06” double amplitude or 15G, whichever is
less)
Altitude........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
These High Power Switches are normally incorporated in systems as a sub-assembly of two or more switches. For
this reason specific outline and weight information can be provided per specific requirement.

312

Medium Power SP4T Switches
Series SW-1000-00
MEDIUM POWER SP4T SWITCHES Series
SW-1000-00• Medium Power• Low insertion loss

KRATOS General Microwave has developed series
SW-1000-00 Medium Power SP4T switches for various
applications in the frequency range of 1.0 GHz to 2.1 GHz
in various sub-bands for various applications.

• High Isolation• Non Reflective
T
ODUC
NG–
ER PR
D
R
DERI
O
R
L
O
A
I
E
R
SPEC
BEFO
TORY
C
A
F
ULT
CONS

­–

HIGH POWER SP4T SWITCH

313

Series SW-1000-00 SP4T Switches
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL
PARAMETER

SW-1193-00

SW-1996-00

1.0 to 1.3

1.9 to 2.1

CW (W) max.

65

50

Isolation (dB) min.

30

30

Insertion loss (dB) max.

1.0

1.3

VSWR ON

1.5:1

1.4:1

Frequency Range (GHz) min.
Power HandlingPower Supply Requirements(For one port ON)
MODEL+5V ± 5%

Negative Voltage

mA

V

mA

SW-1193-00

250

-50

60

SW-1996-00

150

-28

50

Switching Characteristics

Control Characteristics
Control Input Impedance TTL, low power Schottky,
one unit load. (A unit load is
0.8 mA sink current and 40µA source current.)
Control Logic........................ Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V)
for port ON and logic “1”(+2.0 to +5.0 V) for port
OFF.

Model SW-1193-00

AVAILABLE OPTIONS

Cold Switching
On Off Time ....................10 µsec max
Switching Rate.................2 kHz max.

1. Different Operating temperatures
2. Higher Switching Speeds
3. Inverse Control Logic
4. SMC or SMA output Connectors
5. Option G09 - Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings

Model SW-1996-00
Cold Switching
On Off Time......................5 µsec max.
Switching Rate.................10 kHz max.

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature ..–55°C to +70°C
Non Operating................–65°C to +125°C
Humidity............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock ...............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B, Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration...........................MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D, Cond. B (.06” double amplitude or 15G, whichever is
less)
Altitude ............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)314

Series SW-1000-00 SP4T Switches
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTMODEL SW-1193-00

MODEL SW-1996-00

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008315Medium Power SP4T Switch
Model HPS-9417
MEDIUM POWER SP4T SWITCH MODEL
HPS-9417
KRATOS General Microwave has developed model HPS9417 Medium Power SP4T switch for various applicationsin the frequency range of 5 to 17 GHz for various
applications.

UCT
PROD
R
ING–
E
D
OR
RDER
L
O
A
I
E
C
R
SPE
BEFO
TORY
C
A
F
T
NSUL

–­ CO

• Medium Power• Low insertion loss
• Reflective

Switch Model HPS-9417

316

Model HPS-9417 SP4T Switch
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL HPS-9417
PARAMETER
Frequency Range (GHz) max.

5 to 1212 to 17

Power Handling, CW (W) max.

7

7

Isolation (dB) min.

20

20

Insertion loss (dB) max.

2.1

2.3

VSWR ON

2:1

2:1

Power Supply Requirements(For one port ON)+5V ± 5%

-12V ± 0.2

mA

mA

80

80

Control Characteristics
Control Input Impedance TTL, low power
Schottky, one unit load.
(A unit load is 0.8 mA
sink current and 40 µA
source current.)
Control Logic........................ Logic “0” (–0.3 to+0.8V) for port ON andlogic “1” (+2.0 to +5.0
V) for port OFF.

Switching Characteristics

AVAILABLE OPTIONS

Cold Switching
ON OFF Time .........100 nsec

1. Wider Operating Frequency Range
2. Other Type of Connectors
3. Option G09 - Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature ..-30°C to +85°C
Storage Temperature ...... -50°C to +120°C
Humidity............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock ...............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B, Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration...........................MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D, Cond. B (.06” double amplitude or 15G, whicheveris less)
Altitude ............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)317

Model HPS-9417 SP4T Switch
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

318

Medium Power SP6T Switch
Model SW-2876-06
MEDIUM POWER SP6T SWITCH Model
SW-2876-06• Medium Power• Low insertion loss• High Isolation

KRATOS General Microwave has developed model
SW-2876-06 Medium Power SP6T switch for various
applications in the frequency range of 4.4 GHz to 5.0
GHz for various applications.

• Reflective• Fast Switching Speed319

Model SW-2876-06 SP6T Switch
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL
SW-2876-06
4.4 to 5.0

PARAMETER
Frequency Range (GHz) min.
Power Handling
CW (W) max.

5

Isolation (dB) min.

55

Insertion loss (dB) max.

1.7

VSWR ON

1.5:1

Control Characteristics
Control Input Impedance TTL, low power Schottky,
one unit load. (A unit load is
0.8 mA sink current and 40µA source current.)
Control Logic........................ Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V)
for port ON and logic “1”(+2.0 to +5.0 V) for port
OFF.

Power Supply Requirements(For one port ON)
MODEL

SW-2876-06+5V ± 5%

Negative Voltage

mA

V

mA

180

-15

60

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
1. Different Operating temperatures
2, Inverse Control Logic
3. Option G09 - Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings

Switching Characteristics
Cold Switching
On Off Time....................85 nsec. max.
Switching Rate.................2 MHz max.

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature ..-54°C to +85°C
Storage Temperature .... -60°C to +120°C
Humidity............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock ...............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B, Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration...........................MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D, Cond. B (.06” double amplitude or 15G, whicheveris less)
Altitude ............................MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C, Cond. B (50,000 ft.)320

Model SW-2876-06 SP6T Switch
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

321

Limiters Series LIM
Limiter Products
KRATOS General Microwave offers PIN diode-based
limiters, supporting up to 600 watts of pulsed power.
The limiters can be supplied in various configurations:connectorized, drop-in or with field-removableconnectors.
The limiters can be supplied as stand alone limiters,
or as integrated modules that include the limiter and acontrol component such as a switch or attenuator as
specified in the following:.

• Broadband• Coaxial and Drop-In Modules• High-Power Ratings

SWITCH LIMITERS
A switch module is available before the limiter, handlingup to 25-watt CW/ 250-watt Peak power.

Medium Power Limiter

LIMITER ATTENUATOR
Provides combined protection and attenuation
capabilities (Option).
LIMITER AMPLIFIER
A limiter and an amplifier module that maintains therequired power. Signal is amplified if power is notwithin the specified range (Option).

High Power Limiter

Low Power Limiters
Support 1GHz – 18GHz, up to 20-Watts Average power
and 500-watt Peak power.

High Power Limiters
Support 1GHz – 12GHz, up to 60-Watts Average power
and 600-watt Peak power.

Switch Limiter

Parameters Trade-off

The main parameters of Limiter specifications are
Frequency Band, Input Power and Flat Leakage. Notethat there is a trade-off between these parameters.

322

Limiters Series LIM
For a source VSWR of up to 2.0:1, an approximate
maximum effective power can be achieved bymultiplying the source VSWR by the incident power.
The following formula applies for source VSWRs over2.0:1:

DEFINITION OF PARAMETERS
Recovery Time:The time period from the end of a high power pulse to
the point where the insertion loss value has returned towithin 3 dB of the quiescent loss state.
Spike Leakage:
After pulsed high power is applied, the limiter will
momentarily pass significantly more power than when
it is totally saturated. This power rise is seen as a spikeon the leading edge of the leakage pulse. The rise timeof the high power pulse and the turn-on time of thediode determine the spike’s amplitude. The spike isdefined by its energy content, i.e., in ergs. The formulafor calculating the spike leakage is as follows:
SPIKE LEAKAGE (ERGS) = ts x Ps x 107
where ts equals spike width at the half-power point inseconds, and Ps equals maximum spike amplitude inwatts.

PA =Ps[1 ± (PFL *PFS) ]2

where:- PA = actual power- PS = source power- PFL = load (limiter) power factor 0.96 typical,- PFS = source power factor.

CONSIDERATIONS IN USING LIMITERS• The difference between the flat leakage and the 0.1
dB compression point is typically between 10 and 13
dBm, but may vary according to limiter type• Noise of 10 dBm may be generated following the startof limiter compression. However, limiters can andusually do exhibit signs of limiter compression at 0dBm• Limiters dissipate approximately 8% of incident
power as heat. Therefore, all limiters should be
attached to a heatsink whose temperature does notexceed the maximum rated ambient temperature• Limiters are inherently broadband components.
Band limitation results from DC return are requiredby some limiter designs. Limiters with bandwidthsof up to 10:1 are relatively simple, while those withbandwidths exceeding 10: 1 are progressively more
complex and costly.
CAUTION! Limiters are NOT bilateral components!
They have a defined input and output. Backwards
installation will damage the component.

Power Handling:
There are two important things to consider whendefining the power handling required of a limiter. Two
important considerations for defining the required
power handling of a limiter are:• Peak Pulsed Power: for narrow pulses, equated toan equivalent CW power by multiplying the PeakPower by the Duty Cycle. For pulses exceeding 10
microseconds, Peak Power is considered CW• Source VSWR: When is it fully turned on, the Limiter
short circuits across the transmission line, and 90%
incident power is reflected back towards the source
Any mismatch at the source reflects power back toward
the limiter, resulting in standing waves. In a correct
limiter-source phase relationship, the maximum current
point occurs at the input diode, causing the diode todissipate a greater level of power than incident power.

323

Limiters Series LIM
Limiters Selection Guide
FREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)
1.0

INPUT POWER

MODEL

18

CW: 2 W
Peak: 150 W

LIM-118-L

2.0

18

CW: 1 W
Peak: 150 W

LIM-218-L

2.0

18

CW: 3 W
Peak: 500 W

LIM-218-H

CW: 20 W
Peak: 50 W

LIM-1015-20

CW: 40 W
Peak: 400 W

LIM-12-VHP

CW: 30 W
Peak: 300 W

LIM-1214-VHP

CW: 25 W
Peak: 250 W

LIM-335-VHP

2.0

4.0

6.0

10

14

16

1.0

10

1.0

1.2

5

2.0

1.4

3.1

1.28

18

3.5

8.0

12

CW: 5 W
Peak: 50 W

LIM-812-50

8.4

9.6

CW: 15 W
Peak: 315 W

LIM-89-15

CW: 30 W
Peak: 300 W

LIM-2564-00

1.4

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGSAVAILABLE OPTIONSPAGECOMMENTS

325

326

327

328

Operating Temperature
Option No.	  Description
Range..................................­–30°C to +70°C
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Non-Operating
Ratings
Temperature Range..........–55°C to +85°C
Humidity.................................RTCA/DO-160D, Category B Sec. 6.3.2).
RH Operating 95% @ 60 oC
Shock......................................RTCA/DO-160D Section 7 Category B
Vibration.................................RTCV/DO-160D Category R or R2 Sec conde,) Section
8, Par. 8.7.2 Fig. 8-1 & 8-4. Curve C & C1, G rms 4.12 &5.83.
Random 30 min at performance level and 3 Hrs atendurance level for each axis.
Altitude...................................(70,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling........................MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D, Cond. A, 5 cycles324

Limiters Series LIM Broadband
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL

LIM-118-L

Frequency Range, (GHz)1-18

Max. Insertion Loss, (dB)
VSWR, max

LIM-218-L

LIM-218-H

2-18GHz

2-18GHz

2-4

4 -8

8-12

12-18

2-4

4 -8

8-12

12-18

2.5

1.0

1.4

1.8

2.3

1.3

1.8

2.2

2.7

2.0:1

1.7:1

1.9:1

1.9:1

2.0:1

1.7:1

1.9:1

1.9:1

2.0:1

CW

5

1

3

Peak

500

150

500

Pulse Width, (µSec)

1

1

1

Duty Cycle, % max.

1

0.1

0.1

Flat Leakage, (mW)100

Recovery Time Max. (nsec)

200

Input Power, (W)

150

130

130

150

130

100

130
200

See Page 324

Environmental Conditions
200/2-79

200/2-79

200/2-79

Input

SMA (M)

SMA (F)

SMA (F)

OutputSMA (F)

SMA (F)

SMA (F)

Package Type
Connectors

130

PACKAGE TYPE & DIMENSIONS

200/2-79

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

325

130

Limiters Series LIM Narrowband
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL

LIM-1015-20

Frequency Range, (GHz)10 - 15

Max. Insertion Loss, (dB)

2.0

VSWR, max.

1.8:1
CW

20

Peak

50

Input Power, max (W)Pulse Width, max (µSec)

1

Duty Cycle % max.

0.1

Flat Leakage , (dBm)

15

Recovery Time, max (nsec)

400

Environmental Conditions

See Page 324
200/2-79

Package Type

Connectors:

Input

SMA (F)

OutputSMA (F)

PACKAGE TYPE & DIMENSIONS

200/2-79
Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

326

Limiters Series LIM Narrowband
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL

LIM-12-VHP

LIM-1214-VHP

LIM-335-VHP

Frequency Range (GHz)

1.0 - 2.0

1.2 - 1.4

3.1 - 3.5

Insertion Loss, max (dB)

0.8

0.7

1.0

VSWR, max

1.5:1

1.3:1

1.3:1

CW

40

30

25

Peak

400

300

250

Pulse Width, max (µSec)

10

20

50

Duty Cycle % max

10

10

10

Flat Leakage, max (mW)

100

100

32

Recovery Time, max (nsec)

400

400

350

Input Power, max(W)

See Page 324

Environmental Conditions
200/2-79

200/2-10200/2-79

Input

SMA (F)

SMA (F)

SMA (F)

OutputSMA (F)

SMA (F)

SMA (F)

Package Type
Connectors

PACKAGE TYPE & DIMENSIONS

200/2-10200/2-79

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

327

Limiters Series LIM Narrowband
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL

LIM-89-15

LIM-812-50

LIM-2564-00

Frequency Range (GHz)

8.4 - 9.6

8 - 12

1.28 - 1.4

Insertion Loss, max (dB)

2.0

2.2

0.6

VSWR, max

2.0:1

1.8:1

1.5:1

CW

15

5

30

Peak

50

50

300

Pulse Width, max (µSec)

20

10

25

Duty Cycle, % max

5.0

10

13

Flat Leakage, max (mW)

64

100

32

Recovery Time, max (nsec)

500

500

200

Input Power, max(W)

See Page 324

Environmental Conditions
200/2-79

200/2-79

200-2564

Input

SMA (F)

SMA (F)

SMA (F)

OutputSMA (F)

SMA (F)

SMA (F)

Package Type
Connectors

328

PACKAGE TYPE & DIMENSIONS

200/2-79

200-2564

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

329

Millimeter Wave Components
18-40 GHzATTENUATORS: CURRENT, DIGITAL &VOLTAGE CONTROLLED
General Microwave wideband millimeter‑wave
attenuators are available in three configurations.
Model 1959 is current‑controlled, while the Model
D1959, which incorporates a hybrid driver, isvoltage‑controlled with a linearized transfer function of
10 dB per volt.
The digitally‑controlled Model 3499 provides 0.03 dB
resolution (11 bits) and switching speed of less than
500 nsec.
Each of the three models operates over the full
frequency range from 18‑40 GHz with a dynamic
attenuation range of 50 dB.
See Page 331.

SPDT SWITCH

PHASE SHIFTERSVOLTAGECONTROLATTENUATOR

Model 7929 is a MMW Phase Shifter with phase controlof 3600, over the entire frequency range of 10 to 40 GHz.
See page 336

SWITCHES: SPST, SP2T & SP4T
General Microwave millimeter wave switches areavailable in SPST and SP2T models in a variety of
topologies and configurations, e.g., with currentcontrolled switching, or with integrated TTL compatible
voltage drivers, and in both low insertion loss and highisolation models.
All switch models in the series operate over thefrequency range from 18‑40 GHz; each is capableof handling cw or peak powers up to 1W without
performance degradation, and features rise and falltimes of less than 10 nsec
See Page 340.

DIGITALLY CONTROLLED
ATTENUATORQUADRATURE COUPLER
The Model 7050 3‑dB Quadrature Coupler is a 4‑port
single‑section Hoppfer coupler which operates overthe frequency range from 18‑40 GHz. It features low
insertion loss, high isolation, and excellent amplitude
and phase balance.
See Page 344.

CUSTOM IMA PRODUCTS: See Page 343.

PHASE SHIFTER

330

Models 1959, D1959 Millimeter
Wave PIN Diode Attenuator/Modulator
MODEL 1959
The Model 1959 is a current‑controlled attenuator/
modulator that provides a minimum of 50 dB ofattenuation over the frequency range of 18 to 40 GHz.
As shown in figure 1 below, the RF circuit uses two
shunt arrays of PIN diodes and two quadrature hybrid
couplers. The quadrature hybrids are of a unique GMC
microstrip design which are integrated with the diodearrays to yield a minimal package size.

• Absorptive• Current or voltage controlled• 18 to 40 GHz frequency range• High performance MIC quadrature
hybrid design• High speed

MODEL D1959
The Model D1959 voltage‑controlled linearized
attenuator/modulator is an integrated assembly of
a Model 1959 and a hybridized driver circuit which
provides a nominal transfer function of 10 dB per volt.
(See figure 2 below.)

Attenuator Model D1959(WITH INTEGRATEDDRIVER)

Fig. 1–Model 1959, RF schematic diagram             #              !    "    331

Models 1959, D1959
Specifications
MODEL
1959

MAX.
FREQUENCY
INSERTION
RANGE
LOSS
(GHz)
(dB)
18-26.5
3.6
26.5-36
4.1
36-40
4.7

D1959

18-26.5
26.5-36
36-40

4.1
4.6
5.2

FLATNESS (± dB)
AT MEAN ATTENUATION LEVELS UP TO

MAX.
VSWR

10 dB

20 dB

40 dB

50 dB

1.3

2.2

3.4

4.0

2.2

2.2

ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS AND
AVAILABLE OPTIONSMODEL D1959

See page 350.

COMMON TO BOTH MODELS 1959
AND D1959
Mean Attenuation
Range................................... 50 dB
Monotonicity........................... Guaranteed
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance  Degradation...................... 10 mW cw or peak  Survival Power.................. 0.2W average, 5W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)
Phase Shift ...........................see page 66

MODEL 1959

Rise and Fall Times
Rise Time............................. 75 nsec max.
Fall Time.............................. 20 nsec max(1)Bias Current for Maximum
Attenuation......................... 15 to 70 mA
Temperature Effects............. See figure 3

Accuracy of Attenuation
0 to 30 dB............................ ±0.5 dB
30 to 50 dB.......................... ±1.0 dB
Temperature Coefficient...... ±0.025 dB/°C
Switching Characteristics
ON Time............................... 1,600 nsec
OFF Time............................. 100 nsec max(1)Nominal Control Voltage Characteristics
Operating............................ 0 to +5V
Transfer Function.................. 10 dB/volt
Input Impedance.................... 10 kW
Modulation Bandwidth
Small Signal........................ 5 MHz
Large Signal........................ 2 MHz
Power Supply
Requirements..................... +12V ±5%, 120 mA–12V ±5%, 50 mA
Power Supply
Rejection............................. Less than 0.1 dB/Voltchange in either supply(1) For attenuation steps of 10 dB or more

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008332

Model 3499 Octave-Band
11 Bit Digital PIN Diode Attenuator
The Model 3499 Millimeter Wave Digitally Controlled
Attenuator provides greater than octave‑band
performance and wide programming flexibility in acompact rugged package.
The Model 3499 is an integrated assembly of abalanced PIN diode attenuator and a driver circuit
consisting of a PROM, a D/A converter and acurrent‑to‑voltage converter, as shown in Figure 1.
This arrangement provides a high degree of accuracy
and repeatability and also preserves the inherent
monotonicity of the attenuator.
The Model 3499 offers a 50 dB attenuation range,
0.03 dB resolution and switching speed of no morethan 500 nanoseconds. It is available with either astrobe/latch or a non‑linear current or voltage controlledattenuation capability.

• Frequency range: 18‑40 GHz• 50 dB attenuation range• 500 nsec switching speed• 11 Bit binary programming• Guaranteed monotonicity• Absorptive

Attenuator Model 3499
(WITH INTEGRATEDDRIVER)333

Model 3499
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTIC

MODEL
3499

3499-60MAX.
FREQUENCY INSERTION
RANGE
LOSS
(GHz)
(dB)
18-26.5
4.1> 26.5-36

4.6> 36-40

5.2

18-26.5

4.3> 26.5-36

4.9> 36-40

5.8

FLATNESS (± dB)
AT MEAN ATTENUATION LEVELS UP TO

MAX.
VSWR

10 dB

20 dB

40 dB

50 dB

60 dB

2.2

1.3

2.2

3.4

4.0

N/A

2.2

1.3

2.2

3.4

4.0

5.0

Power Supply
Rejection............................. Less than 0.1 dB/voltchange in either supply

Mean Attenuation Range
Model 3499 .........................50 dB
Model 3499-60 ....................60 dB
Accuracy of Attenuation
OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
0 to 30 dB............................. ±0.5 dB
30 to 50................................. ±1.0 dB
Operating Temperature
Range......................... –40°C to +85°C
30 to 60 (Model 3499-60)....±1.0 dB
Non-Operating
Temperature
Monotonicity........................... Guaranteed
Range......................... –54°C to +100°C
Temperature Coefficient...... ±0.03 dB/°C
Humidity........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Phase Shift ...........................See page 66
Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Power Handling Capability
Shock............................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Without Performance
Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)  Degradation...................... 10 mW cw or peak
Vibration........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D,   Survival Power (from –40°C to +25°C;
Cond. B (.06" double amplitude or   +25°C; see Figure 2 for higher
15G, whichever is less)   temperatures)................ 0.2W average, 5W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width) Altitude.......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)
Switching Time....................... 0.5 µsec max.
Temp.
Cycling.
.
.............
MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Programming.......................... Positive true binary. For
Cond. A, 5 cycles
complementary code,
specify Option 2, To
interface with other logic
families, please contact
factory.
Minimum Attenuation
Step...................................... 0.03 dB(1)Logic Input
Logic “0” (Bit OFF)............... –0.3 to +0.8V
Logic “1” (Bit ON)................. +2.0 to +5.0V
Logic Input Current.............. 1 µA max.
Analog Input........................... 0 to 6.4V
Power Supply
Requirements..................... +12V to +15V, 120 mA–12V to –15V, 50 mA

334

Model 3499
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

J3 PIN FUNCTIONSPIN NO.

MODEL 3499
Wt: 5 oz. (142 gr.) approx.

BINARY1

0.06 dB(1)20.13 dB

3

Analog Input/
Strobe Latch(2)(3)

4

GND

5

0.25 dB

6

0.5 dB

7

1 dB

8

2 dB

9

4 dB

10

8 dB

11

16 dB

12

32 dB

13

+12 to +15V

14

–12 to –15V

15

0.03 dB

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

ACCESSORY FURNISHED
Mating power/logic connector

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
2	Complementary programming (logic “0” is
Bit ON)
4	Strobe latch for data input. Attenuator
responds to data input when logic “0” isapplied, Attenuator latched to data input
when logic “1” is applied.
7
Two type K male RF connectors
10	One type K male (J1) and one type K
female (J2) RF connector
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

335

NOTES:
1. The Model 3499 attenuator is an 11-bit digitalattenuator. In order to use this device with a lesser
number of bits (lower resolution), the user may
simply ground the logic pins for the lowest orderunused bits. For example, when operated as an
8-bit unit, the Model 3499 would have Pin 15, Pin 1
and Pin 2 connected to ground. All other parameters
remain unchanged.
2. Normally supplied as an Analog input. Optionallyavailable as a strobe latch function for input data.
3. Pin 3 is available to apply a current or voltage tocontrol the attenuator in a non-linear fashion. leave
pin as open circuit if not used.

Model 7929 MM Wave 360° Phase Shifter
The Model 7929 is a MMW PIN diode phase shifter
covering a frequency range from 18 to 40 GHz providing
a full 360° range of variable phase shift.

PHASE SHIFT
Phase shift is achieved by utilizing the RF vector
modulator approach shown in Figure 2. The 3‑dB hybrid
coupler divides the RF signal into two quadraturecomponents which are then biased in proportion to thesine and cosine of the desired phase shift. The signals
are then combined in‑phase to yield desired output.

• 18 to 40 GHz• 360° Range• 0.35° Incremental Resolution• High Speed• Digitally Programmable (10 Bits)• Guaranteed Monotonicity• Hermetically Sealed

ACCURACY
Improved phase accuracy and PM/AM performance
are achieved by using double‑balanced bi‑phase linear
amplitude modulators. In the operating band, overall
phase accuracy is better than 15°. Switching speed isbetter than 500 nsec.

Phase Shifter Model 7929

Fig. 2–Model 7929, RF section

Fig. 1–Model 7929, block diagram

336

Model 7929
Specifications
PHASE SHIFTER SPECIFICATIONSFREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)18.0-40.0

INSERTION
LOSS (Max.)

VSWR(Max.)

ACCURACY(Max.)

PM/AM(Max.)

15.0 dB

J1 INPUT:
2.5 :1J2 OUTPUT: 2.2:1±15°±2.0 dBPERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance
Degradation+
 20 dBm

Phase Shift
Range.......................................... 360° in 1,024 steps
Variation..................................... 0.1°/°C
Control Input................................. 10 Bit TTL
Switching Speed(50% TTL to within 10° of
Final Phase Value)........................... 500 nsec max
Input IP2......................................... +60 dBm typ.
Input IP3.......................................+35 dBm typ.

Survival power
Power Supply
Requirements+30 dBm+ 5V ±5%, 125 mA max+12 to +15V, 10 mA max–12 to –15V, 95 mA max

NOTE:
To initialized the unit after power up, at least one of the digital bits has to change its
TTL level.

Fig. 3: MODEL 7929 INSERTION LOSS VS. FREQUENCY (PM/AM)

337

Model 7929
Specifications
Narrow Band Phase Shifters
In addition to the standard wide band Phase Shifters, KRATOS General Microwave is offering Narrow Band Phase
Shifters. These units are available both as standard catalog units and as customized units meeting specificcustomer’s requirements. The narrow band units have better performances and lower prices.
Frequency Range

Model Number

Phase Accuracy

PM/AM

Insertion Loss

18.0 to 21.4 GHz

7929-NB-18-21± 6o (max.)± 1.0 dB

13.0 dB (max.)

27.0 to 31.0 GHz

7929-NB-27-31± 6o (max.)± 1.0 dB

13.0 dB (max.)

33.0 to 36.0 GHz

7929-NB-33-36± 6o (max.)± 1.0 dB

13.0 dB (max.)

37.0 to 40.0 GHz

7929-NB-37-40± 10o (max.)± 1.0 dB

13.5 dB (max.)

ACCESSORY FURNISHED
Mating power/control connector

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature
Range...............................­–54°C to +95°C
Non-Operating
Temperature Range.......–65°C to +125°C

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
7	Two K male RF connectors
10	One K male (J1), and one K female (J2) RFconnector
49	High Rel screening
G09
G12

Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings
RoHS Compliant

338

Model 7929
Specifications

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTMODEL 7929
PIN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Model 7929   Wt. 2.5 oz (71gr.) approx.
Dimensional Tolerances: unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

339

PIN FUNCTIONSFUNCTIONS

Ground+ 5V–12 to –15V
1.4°
2.8°
5.6°
22.5°
11.3°
90°
180° (MSB)+12 to +15V
45°
GND
0.7°
0.35° (LSB)

Series 90
Millimeter Wave SPST Switches
SERIES 90
Series 90 switches provide high performance
characteristics over the frequency range of 18 to
40 GHz. These miniature switches measure only.75" x .95" x .42".
The series uses an integrated circuit assembly of up to
four PIN diodes mounted in a microstrip transmission
line. The circuit configuration is shown in Fig. 1, below.
Application of a positive current to the bias terminal
switches the unit OFF since the diodes are biased toa low resistance value. With zero or negative voltage
at the bias terminal, the diodes are biased to a highresistance and the unit is switched ON.

• 18 to 40 GHz frequency range• Low VSWR and insertion loss• Up to 75 dB isolation• Less than 10 nsec rise and fall times

SERIES F90
The Series F90 switches are the same as thecorresponding Series 90 models except the units areequipped with integrated drivers as shown in Fig. 2.
The proper current required to switch the unit ON
or OFF is provided by the integral driver which iscontrolled by an external logic signal. Maximum riseand fall times are less than 10 nsec.

Switch Model 9013

(DRIVERLESS)

340

Series 90 SPST Switches
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL NO.

FREQUENCY (GHz)CHARACTERISTIC

18-26.5

26.5-40

9012, F9012

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

35
2.2
2.0

30
2.7
2.2

9013*, F9013*

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

55
2.5
2.0

50
3.0
2.2

9014, F9014

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

75
2.8
2.2

70
3.5
2.2

(1)

SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS (2)*Special-order product. Consult factory before ordering.

Rise and Fall Times...........10 nsec max.
Switching Time..................20 nsec max.
Repetition Rate..................20 MHz max.

CONTROL CHARACTERISTICS
Control Input
Impedance.........................TTL, advanced Schottky,
one unit load. (A unit load
is 0.6 mA sink current and20 µA source current.)
Control Logic.........................Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V)
for switch ON and Logic“1” (+2.0 to +5.0V) for
switch OFF.

POWER HANDLING CAPABILITY

Without Performance   Degradation
1W cw or peak
Survival Power	2W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)

POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
Driverless Units
For rated isolation...............+35 mA
For rated insertion loss.......–10V
Units With Integrated
Drivers................................+5V ±2%, 65 mA–12 to –15V, 20 mA

ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS AND
AVAILABLE OPTIONS
See page 350(1) Models prefixed with “F” are equipped with integrated TTL-compatible drivers; models without the “F” prefix are current-controlled units andare furnished without drivers.
(2) For driverless units, shaped current pulses must be provided by user.

DIMENSIONSAND
WEIGHT

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

341

Series 90
Millimeter Wave SP2T Switches
REFLECTIVE SP2T SWITCHES
Series 90 SP2T switches use an integrated assembly of
PIN diodes mounted in a microstrip transmission line ina series‑shunt arrangement as shown in Figure 1.
When applying positive current (by the driver), theassociated port is OFF since the corresponding shunt
diodes are biased to a low resistance and the series
diode to a high resistance. With negative current at thebias terminal converse conditions are established andthe port is ON. All models are supplied with integrated
drivers. Standard units are supplied with logic that turns
a port ON with the application of a logic “0” control
signal. Maximum rise and fall times are less than 10
nsec.

• 18 to 40 GHz frequency range• Rise and fall times less than 10 nsec
• Low VSWR and insertion loss
• Up to 65 dB isolation

Switch Model F9021(WITH INTEGRATEDDRIVER)

342

Series 90 SP2T Switches
Specifications
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSFREQUENCY (GHz)
MODEL NO.

CHARACTERISTIC

18-26.5

26.5-40

F9021

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

30
3.0
2.1

20
3.6
2.3

F9022

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

45
3.2
2.2

40
4.0
2.3

F9023

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON)

65
3.5
2.3

55
4.5
2.5

Switching Characteristics
Rise and Fall Times..............10 nsec max.
Switching Time.....................25 nsec max.
Repetition Rate.....................20 MHz max.
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance  Degradation.....................1W cw or peak
Survival Power.....................1W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)Power Supply
Requirements....................+5V ±2%, 75 mA–12 to –15V, 50 mA

CONTROL CHARACTERISTICS
Control Input
Impedance.........................TTL, advanced Schottky,
one unit load. (A unit load
is 0.6 mA sink current and20 µA source current.)
Control Logic.........................Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V)
for port ON and Logic “1”(+2.0 to +5.0V) for port
OFF.

ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS AND
AVAILABLE OPTIONS
See page 350

SERIES F90
Wt. 1 oz. (28 gr.) approx.
Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

343

Series 9043
Millimeter Wave SP4T Switches
NON-REFLECTIVE SP4T SWITCHES
Series 90 SP4T switches use an integrated assembly of
PIN diodes mounted in a microstrip transmission line in
an all shunt arrangement.

• 32 to 36 GHz frequency range• Low VSWR and insertion loss
• Non-Reflective

All models are supplied with integrated drivers.
Standard units are supplied with logic that turns a port
ON with the application of a logic “0” control signal.
Maximum On/Off times are less than 50 nsec.

• 55 dB isolation

Switch Model F9043-C79(WITH INTEGRATEDDRIVER)PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICSFREQUENCY (GHz)
MODEL NO.

CHARACTERISTIC

32-36

F9043-C79

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR (ON/OFF)

55
5.9
2.7:1

344

Series 9043 SP4T Switches
Specifications
CONTROL CHARACTERISTICS

Switching Speed
On Off Times.........................50 nsec max.
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance Degradation  “On” Port..........................1W cw or peak  Common Port..................1W cw or peak  “Off” Port..........................100 mW cw or peak
Survival Power“On” Port..............................1W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)
Common Port......................1W average, 75W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)“Off” Port..............................200 mW average, 5W peak
(1 µsec max. pulse width)

Control Input
Impedance.........................TTL, advanced Schottky,
one unit load. (A unitload is 0.6 mA sinkcurrent and 20 µA source
current.)
Control Logic.........................Logic “0” (–0.3 to +0.8V)
for port ON and Logic “1”(+2.0 to +5.0V) for port
OFF.

ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
See page 350

Power Supply
Requirements....................+5V ±5%, 120 mA–12V ±5%, 30 mA

Weight 1.16 oz. (33 gr.) approx.
Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008345

Series 9044
Millimeter Wave SP4T Switches
NON-REFLECTIVE SP4T SWITCHES• 26 to 40 GHz frequency range• Low VSWR and insertion loss

SP4T switch model F9044 use an integrated assemblyof PIN diodes mounted in a microstrip transmission
line.

• Designed for Amplitude & Phasematching• Non-Reflective

F9044 switch is supplied with integrated driver.
Standard unit is supplied with logic that turns a port
ON with the application of a logic “0” control signal.
Maximum On/Off times are less than 50 nsec.

• 55 dB isolation

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
MODEL

CHARACTERISTIC
Frequency Range (GHz)

F9044

26-33

33-37

37-40

Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)

55
6.0

55
6.5

55
8.5

Max. VSWR (ON/OFF)

2.5:1

2.5:1

2.5:1

Switching Speed
On Off Times.........................50 nsec max.
Power Handling Capability
Without Performance Degradation  “On” Port..........................1W cw or peak  Common Port..................1W cw or peak  “Off” Port..........................100 mW cw or peak
Survival Power“On” Port..............................1W average, 75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)
Common Port......................1W average, 75W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)“Off” Port..............................200 mW average, 5W peak (1 µsec max. pulse width)Power Supply
Requirements....................+5V ±5%, 375 mA max.
–12V ±5%, 250 mA max.

346

Series 9044 SP4T Switches
Specifications
CONTROL CHARACTERISTICS
Control Input
Impedance.........................TTL, advanced Schottky, one unit load. (A unit load is 0.6
mA sink current and 20 µA source current.)
Control Logic.........................Logic “0” (0 to +0.8V) for port ON and Logic “1” (+2.0 to+5.0V) for switch OFF.

ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
See page 350

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

Weight 2.79 oz. (79 gr.) approx.
Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008347

Model 7050 Millimeter Wave
3 dB Quadrature Coupler
The 3 dB Quadrature Coupler is a four port device
covering the frequency range of 18 to 40 GHz. The
coupler design is a single section Hopfer coupler
which has been optimized to perform in the millimeterfrequency range. See Fig. 1. It offers excellent
amplitude and phase balance as well as low loss andhigh isolation. The 3 dB Quadrature Coupler utilizes
removable connectors for easy integration into coaxial
millimeter wave systems.

• Frequency range: 18‑40 GHz• Low insertion loss
• High isolation• Removable connectors

Coupler Model 7050

SPECIFICATIONSFrequency (GHz)Min. Isolation (dB)Max. Insertion Loss (dB)Max. VSWR
Amplitude Balance (dB)
Phase Balance deg.
Power Handling, operating andsurvival, cw or peak
Environmental Ratings

348

18-40
14
1.75
1.8
±2.0
±10
2W
See page 350

Model 7050 Millimeter Wave
3 dB Quadrature Coupler

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.005

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G07	2.4 mm Female RF connectors
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings
G12
RoHS Compliant

349

Millimeter Wave Catalog Component
Catalog Specifications
OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating Temperature Range
Series 90  With Drivers............ –55°C to +110°C  Without Drivers....... –55°C to +110°C
Model 1959................ –54°C to +110°C
Model D1959............. –54°C to +110°C
Model 7050................ –55°C to +110°C
Non-Operating Temperature
Range......................... –65°C to +125°C

Humidity........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 103B,
Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
Shock............................. MIL-STD-202F, Method 213B,
Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
Vibration........................ MIL-STD-202F, Method 204D,
Cond. B (.06" double amplitude
or 15G, whichever is less)Altitude.......................... MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C,
Cond. B (50,000 ft.)Temp. Cycling............... MIL-STD-202F, Method 107D,
Cond. A, 5 cycles

AVAILABLE OPTIONSAVAILABLE OPTIONS
OptionNo.

Description

3

SMA female bias/control
connectors

7

Type K male RF connectors

7A

J1 type K male; J2 and J3
type K female

7B

J1 type K male; J2 and J3
type K male9(2)Inverse control logic; logic “0”for port OFF and logic “1” forport ON10

One type K male (J1) and one
type K female (J2) RF connector

27
33

MODEL(1)1959
D1959
9012, 9013, 9014
F9021, F9022
Current-Controlled Voltage-Controlled F9012, F9013, F9014
F9023
Attenuator
Attenuator
SPST Switches
SP2T Switches

Single-port toggle control;
logic “0” connects J1 to J2
EMI filter solder-typebias/control terminals

61

20 dB/volt transfer function
with 0 to +3V control signal
input

62

±15 volts operation

64

SMC male bias/control
connectors

64A

SMB male bias/control
connectors

G09

Guaranteed to meet
Environmental Ratings

G12

RoHS Compliant(1) See page 329 for Model 3499 digital attenuator.
(2) Not applicable for units without drivers.

350

Millimeter Wave Components
Custom Integrated Microwave Assemblies
CUSTOM MILLIMETER WAVE ASSEMBLIESKRATOS General Microwave has developed and produced various custom Millimeter Wave Integrated
Microwave Assemblies (IMAs). The following are some examples of products we have developed:
1. Attenuator (Fig. 1)
2. One to four Power Divider (Fig. 2)
3. Transmitter Assembly (Fig 3)
4. Receiver Assembly (Fig. 4)

Fig. 1 – Custom Millimeter Wave Attenuator

Fig. 2 – Millimeter Wave Power Divider

Fig. 3 –Millimeter Wave Transmitter Assembly

Fig. 4 –Millimeter Wave Receiver Assembly351

Microwave Sources
General Microwave Corporation has been a leader inthe field of microwave PIN diode control components formore than 30 years. A natural extension to its productline, microwave oscillators, was launched in 1989. It
began with the introduction of an extremely stable(1 PPM/ºC) free running Dielectric Resonator Oscillator
and has subsequently expanded to high performance
Voltage Controlled and Digitally Tuned Oscillators. In thisrelatively short time, General Microwave has once again
established itself as an industry leader. Its oscillator
engineering staff has been recognized as a dynamic,
innovative force who is willing and quite able to take on
and solve today’s most demanding problems.
General Microwave offers a broad line of General Purpose
Signal Generators, this includes high‑performance
voltage‑controlled oscillators (VCOs), digitally‑tuned
oscillators (DTOs), frequency locked oscillators (FLOs)
and synthesizers in the microwave frequency range.
The VCOs and DTOs feature fast‑settling time, lowpost‑tuning drift and low phase noise. In addition toGeneral Microwave’s standard catalog products, a wide

352

variety of custom oscillators have been developed for
demanding airborne receiver, jamming and simulator
applications.
This catalog is proof of General Microwave’s success.
It includes expanded versions of our general purpose
catalog oscillator products and highlights many of thecustom oscillators, both military and commercial, thathave been successfully developed and manufactured.
If your system requirements demand a device whichcannot be found in this catalog, do not hesitate tocontact General Microwave directly. A sales engineer will
be happy to discuss your specific needs.
Modern microwave oscillators utilize a solid state
device, such as a transistor or diode, together with aresonant circuit and matching network, to convert DC
power to microwave power at a specified frequency. By
appropriate choice of these elements, oscillators may
be designed for an extremely wide range of applications.
In addition, low frequency digital and analog control
circuitry may be incorporated to provide further flexibility.

Microwave Oscillators
By using the following approximate formula, the pulling
figure may be scaled as a function of the VSWR:

DEFINITION OF PARAMETERS
Frequency Settling/Post‑Tuning Drift: The maximum
deviation in frequency at a given time, following achange in tuning command, relative to the frequency
one second after the change in tuning command. The
worst‑case condition usually occurs for frequency
steps from one end of the band to the other. (Resultsof a typical measurement are shown in Fig. 1.) Settling
time usually refers to the response up to several
hundred microseconds, while post‑tuning‑drift
usually refers to the variation from several hundred
microseconds to as long as several hours.
Modulation Sensitivity Ratio: The ratio between the
maximum and minimum slopes of the frequency vs.
voltage tuning curve of a VCO over its frequency band.
(For a DTO, this is defined at the FM modulation port.)
Frequency Deviation Bandwidth: The peak‑to‑peakfrequency deviation obtained for a given peak‑to‑peakvoltage swing at the modulation port of a VCO or DTO.
Modulation Bandwidth: The modulation frequency
at which the frequency deviation bandwidth of a VCO
or DTO decreases by 3 dB relative to the deviation
bandwidth at low frequencies.
Phase Noise: The sideband noise level at a given
deviation, fm, from the oscillator frequency, relative tothe carrier power level and normalized to a bandwidthof I Hz. From 10 kHz to 100 kHz, the phase noiseof a VCO has a nominal 1/fm3 dependence. Thus, as
shown in the figure, the phase noise at 100 kHz isapproximately 30 dB lower than that at 10 kHz.
Residual FM: The peak‑to‑peak frequency deviationof an oscillator at its –3 dBc points, when measured
on a spectrum analyzer with a resolution bandwidth of
1 kHz. (See Fig. 2).
Temperature Stability: The total oscillator frequency
variation over the rated operating temperature, usually
expressed in ppm/ºC.
Pulling: The maximum variation in oscillator frequency
relative to its frequency when operating with a matchedload, when the output load is rotated through a full 360°
phase change. The peak‑to‑peak variation in oscillator
frequency is approximately twice the pulling figure
defined above.

  fO(S – 1/S)∆f peak‑to‑peak =    2 QEXT
where fO is the oscillator frequency, QEXT is the external
Q of the circuit, and S is the load VSWR.
Pushing: The incremental change in oscillator
frequency that results from an incremental change inpower supply voltage.

Fig 2–Residual FM

353

Synthesizers
Microwave Synthesizers
KRATOS General Microwave (KGMI) has developed
a broad line of General Purpose Synthesizers to be
used in various applications. KGMI has developed
a line of high performance, broadband Fast Indirect
Synthesizers (FIS) to provide a cost-effective solution
to the requirements of new systems. Its high speed(as fast as 1 µsec) provides an economical alternative
to direct synthesizers for many applications. Becauseof its low phase noise, it is an excellent alternate to
the much slower and generally less reliable YIG based
synthesizer.
To provide optimum solutions for different requirements,
KRATOS General Microwave has developed a variety of
Fast Indirect Synthesizers (FIS) with different parameter
trade-offs: The standard FIS line for fastest tuning
speed, the low phase noise line for ELINT applications
and the compact FIS line for airborne small size
applications.

SELECTION GUIDE SYNTHESIZERSFREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)
0.5

2

0.5

4

6

12

18

MODEL

40

PAGE

COMMENTS

355

1 µsecIndirect Synthesizer359

1 µsec Indirect Synthesizer
with frequency modulation

365

Compact Indirect Synthesizers

372

Narrow Frequency Band Indirect
Synthesizer

368

Frequency Extender375

Custom Synthesizers

SF6053

3
2SF621818

2SF6219

19

2
6

18

SM621818SM66182SM622020

0.5SW0580

8

1.25
2
6

20

SW012020SW0220
SW061818

SQ0580
0.25

40

0.5

20

0.5

20

FE0P240
FE0P520354

Series SF60 Low Phase Noise
1µsec Fast Indirect Synthesizer• High Speed: 1 µsec
• Wide Frequency Range: 0.5 to 19 GHz• Low Phase Noise• Small Size
• High Reliability• Severe Environmental Conditions

Series SF60 Low Phase Noise Fast Indirect
Synthesizer
KRATOS General Microwave has developed the series
SF60 fast, broadband, low phase noise and small size
synthesizer, to meet the needs of a general purpose fast
synthesizer for applications such as Signal Generators
and Automatic Test Equipment at an affordable price.
For military applications, this synthesizer requires option
G09 to comply with Military Standards. The specificenvironmental MIL STD requirements as well as the EMI/
RFI specifications should be provided by the customer.

Synthesizer Model SF6218

OUTPUT POWERSETTLING TIMESETTLING TIMEFROM 18 to 2 GHz

FROM 2 to 18 GHz

355

Series SF60
Specifications
SERIES SF60 SYNTHESIZER SPECIFICATIONSSPECIFICATIONPARAMETER
12

FREQUENCY AGING

4OUTPUT POWER

4.1

Min. (dBm) (1)

MODEL SF6218

MODEL SF6219

2 to 18 (1)2 to 19 (1)0.5 to 3 (1)Same (PPM) as of the reference crystal oscillator

FREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)ACCURACY

3

4.2

MODEL SF6053

Same (PPM) as of the reference crystal oscillator
10
± 2.5

Variation, over freq. and temp., max. (dB)

1

5

SETTLING TIME

6

SSB PHASE NOISE , max (dBc/Hz)

6.1   @ 100 Hz Offset

6.2@ 1 kHz Offset

-90

-90

-90 (4)

6.3@ 10 kHz Offset

-110

-100

-100 (4)6.4@ 100 kHz Offset

-115

-105

-105 (4)6.5@ 1 MHz Offset

-115

-105

-105 (4)

6.6@ 10 MHz Offset

-120

-110

-110 (4)(6), max. (µsec)
(2)

–77

7

HARMONICS, max (dBc)–20

8

SUB-HARMONICS, max (dBc)–50

9SPURIOUS, max (dBc)

10

PULLING @ VSWR 2 :1 max (kHz)<1

11

PUSHING, max (kHz/V)±1

12

FREQUENCY CONTROL (PARALLEL)

13
14
14.1
14.2

FREQ. STEP SIZE, nominal LSB (kHz)REFERENCE CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR - EXTERNAL (3)INPUT FREQUENCY, (MHz) (5)INPUT POWER, (dBm)

15

POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENT, (mA):

–50

–50

18 BITS(1)+12V ±5%–50 (4)21 BITS
10
100
0 ±2

	 
+5V ±5%

1,800
300
1,500

16

POWER CONSUMPTION, max (W)30

17

OPERATING TEMP. (°C) (1)18

OTHER ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS

19

6 x 6 x 1.1, (152.4 x 152.4 x 27.9)
DIMENSIONS, Inches (mm)(1) Other values are Optional(2) With an external reference oscillator with the following phase noise dBc/Hz:@ 100 Hz Offset: -125
@ 1 kHz Offset: -140
@ 10 kHz Offset: -155
@ >100 kHz Offset: -160
(3) Internal Reference Optional(4) Degraded by 3 dB @ 18 to 19 GHz(5) 10 MHz Optional(6) To within ±1 MHz from final frequency–12V ±5%-20 to +70
APPLICABLE FOR AIRBORNE APPLICATIONS

356

Series SF60
Specifications
OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONSAVAILABLE OPTIONS

1. Storage Temperature -400 to +1200C

Option No.	  Description

2. Mechanical ShockMIL-STD-810C, Method 516.2
Procedure I

3. Random Vibration

MIL-STD-810C, Method 514.2
Figure 514.2-5, Curve AG, 9.3 Grms

G02

4. Humidity

MIL-STD-810E, Method 507.3
Procedure III

G08

10 MHz Reference

G09

Guaranteed to meet

5. Altitude50,000 ft.

G01

Internal Reference Crystal
Oscillator
Operating Temperature-400 to +700C

Environmental Ratings

DIMENSIONS and WEIGHT

Weight (Approx.): 1,0 Kg (2.2 Pounds)

DIMENSIONS IN INCHES (mm)Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008357

Series SF60
Specifications
Pin Assignment for Connector J1
Pin Assignment for Connector J1:
Pin No.

Signal Name

Pin No.

Signal Name

1

Strobe

20

+12V

2

+12V

21

+12V

3

GND

22

GND

4

+5V

23

+5V

5

+5V

24

GND

6

GND

25

-12V

7

-12V

26

Frequency Bit 0

8Frequency Bit 1

27

Frequency Bit 2

9Frequency Bit 3

28

Frequency Bit 4

10Frequency Bit 5

29

Frequency Bit 6

11

Frequency Bit 7

30

Frequency Bit 8

12Frequency Bit 9

31

Frequency Bit 10

13

Frequency Bit 11

32

Frequency Bit 12

14

Frequency Bit 13

33

Frequency Bit 14

15

Frequency Bit 15

34

Frequency Bit 16

16

Frequency Bit 17

35

Frequency Bit 18 (2)17Frequency Bit 19 (2)36Frequency Bit 20 (2)18

N.C. (1)37

N.C. (1)19

Lock Indicator

Note:(1) For factory use only. All N.C. pins should
not be connected(2) For Model SF6053 - Not Connected358

Series SM60 1µsec Fast Indirect Synthesizer
With Frequency Modulation• High Speed: 1 µsec

Series SM60 Low Phase Noise Fast Indirect
Synthesizer• Wide Frequency Range: 2 to 18 GHz• Modulation Span: 1 GHz• Analog & Digital Modulation Input• Small Size
• High Reliability• Severe Environmental Conditions

KRATOS General Microwave has enhanced the the series
SF60 fast, broadband, indirect synthesizer by adding a
modulation function. With this function, the synthesizer iswell suited for use in various test systems where the signal
output of the signal generator needs to be modulated
rather than be just a CW signal.

The modulation input can be an analog voltage or a digital
signal. This provides the system designer with more
flexibility in his application and possibilities for complex
modulation options. Fig. 1 is the spectrum of the output
signal with a 1 MHz sine-wave modulation input.

Synthesizer Model SM6218

Of special importance is the fact, that this synthesizer
remains fully locked even during frequency modulation.
As a result of it, the high frequency accuracy and otherhigh performances of the synthesizer are kept all of thetime. For this reason, in this synthesizer there isn’t the“movement” of the center frequency nor the problem of
non linearized modulation.

APPLICATIONSThe Model SM6218 Fast Synthesizer, with Frequency
Modulation capability, has been developed as anenhancement to the existing Series SF60 1 usec, CW
Synthesizer family. It offers a higher performance andcost effective alternative to signal generators currently
used in various applications such as Electronic Warfare(EW), Simulators, Test Systems and especially thosewhich require improved frequency accuracy, phase noise
and frequency modulation capabilities. In addition, theModel SM6218 design allows the flexibility to customize.performance to specific application requirements359

Series SM60 Specifications
MODEL SM6218 – TYPICAL MODULATION SPECTRUMS

Fig. 1 - 1 GHz Modulation Spectrum using a Sine wave signal

Fig. 2 - 1 GHz Modulation Spectrum using a Triangle signal
360

Series SM60 Specifications
SERIES SM60 SYNTHESIZER SPECIFICATIONSSPECIFICATION - MODELPARAMETER
1

SM6218SM6618SM62202

FREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)ACCURACY

2 to 18
6 to 18
2 to 20 (1)Same (PPM) as of the reference crystal oscillator

3

FREQUENCY AGING

Same (PPM) as of the reference crystal oscillator

4

OUTPUT POWER

4.1

Min. (dBm) (1)

(1)

(1)

10

4.2

Variation, over freq. at a given temp., max. (dB)

± 1.5

4.3

Variation, over temperature, max. (dB)

± 2.5
1

5

SETTLING TIME (6) , max. (µsec)

6

SSB PHASE NOISE , max (dBc/Hz)

6.1   @ 100 Hz Offset

–75

-74

6.2

@ 1 kHz Offset

-90

-89

6.3

@ 10 kHz Offset

-97

-96

6.4

@ 100 kHz Offset

-97

-96

6.5

@ 1 MHz Offset

-97

-96

6.6

@ 10 MHz Offset

-100

-99

7

HARMONICS, max (dBc)

8

SUB-HARMONICS, max (dBc)

9

SPURIOUS, max (dBc)

10

FREQUENCY CONTROL (PARALLEL)

11
12
12.1
12.2

FREQ. STEP SIZE, nominal LSB (kHz)REFERENCE CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR - EXTERNAL (3)INPUT FREQUENCY, (MHz) (5)INPUT POWER, (dBm)

13

MODULATION(4)–30 up to 24 GHz-40 from 24 GHz to 40 GHz
NA
–55

(2)

-54
18 BITS

(1)

100
100
0 ±2

13.1

Bandwidth, (MHz)Dc to 10

13.2

Frequency Deviation, min. (MHz)

± 500

13.3

Sensitivity control (3 levels plus Mod. OFF)

2 BITS

13.4

Digital Modulation Control

10 BITS

13.4

Digital Sensitivity, nominal (MHz/bit)

13.5

Analog Control, (V)

13.6

Analog Sensitivity, nominal (MHz/V)

1, 1/4, 1/16, Mod. OFF±1512, 128, 32, Mod. OFF(1) Other values are available. Please contact Sales.
(2) Spurious level is guaranteed during modulation at OFF state. When modulation is set to ON, the spurious
level is -50 dBc typical.
(3) Internal Reference Oscillator is optional(4) With an external reference oscillator with the following phase noise dBc/Hz@ 100 Hz Offset: -125
@ 1 kHz Offset: -140
@ 10 kHz Offset: -155
@ >100 kHz Offset: -160
(5) 10 MHz Optiona(6) To within ±1 MHz from the final frequency
361

Series SM60 Specifications
SERIES SF60 SYNTHESIZER SPECIFICATIONSSPECIFICATION - MODELPARAMETER
14

SM6218SM6618SM6220POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENT, max. (A)

14.1+12V to +15V

3.2

14.2

-12V to -15V

0.45

14.3

+5V ±5%

2.1

15

OPERATING TEMP. (°C)

16

OTHER ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS

17

DIMENSIONS, Inches (mm)-20 to +70(1)

APPLICABLE FOR AIRBORNE APPLICATIONS
6.48 (164.6) x 6.23 (158.2) x 1.24 (31.5)(1) Other Parameters are Optional

OPTION (G09) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1. Storage Temperature -400 to +1200C
2. Mechanical ShockMIL STD-202F, Method
213B, Cond. B (75G, 6 msec)
3. Vibration
MIL STD-202F, Method
204D, Cond. B (.06” double amplitude
or 15G, whitchever is less)
4. Humidity
MIL STD-202F, Method
103B, Cond. B (96 hrs. at 95%)
5. Altitude
MIL-STD-202F, Method 105C, Cond. B(50,000 ft.)

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G01	Internal Reference Crystal Oscillator
G02

Operating Temperature-400 to +700C

G08

10 MHz Reference

G09

Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings362

Series SM60 Specifications
DIMENSIONS and WEIGHT MODELS SM6218, SM6220 & SM6618

DIMENSIONS IN INCHES (mm)Weight (Approx.): 1,4 Kg (3.1 Pounds)

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008363

Series SM60 Specifications
Pin Assignment - Model SM6218

364

Series SW Compact Wide Frequency Band
Indirect Synthesizer
Series SW Compact Wide Frequency
Band Indirect Synthesizer• Small Size: 3 x 3 x 1.28”• Wide Frequency Range: 2 to 20 GHz• High Resolution: 100 Hz• Low Cost

Kratos General Microwave introduces theSynthesizer General Purpose Series SW Compact,
Wide Band, Indirect Synthesizers offering
exceptionally high performance at a low cost.

• Internal Reference

APPLICATIONSThe Series SW synthesizer has been designed to be
used in applications where small size, low cost andwideband operation are important requirements. It
can be used as a Signal Generator in Portable Test
Equipment, as microwave source in Built In Test (BIT)subassembly or in a broad frequency range electronicsystem.
For military applications, this synthesizer requires
option G09 to comply with Military Standards. The
aaaaa
specific environmental MIL STD requirements as well as
the EMI/RFI specifications should be provided by thecustomer.

Synthesizer Model SW0120

365

Series SW Compact Synthesizer
SERIES SW SYNTHESIZER SPECIFICATIONSSPECIFICATION - MODELPARAMETER
1

SW0580

SW0120SW0220

SW0618

0.5 to 8

1.25 to 20
2 to 20±1

6 to 18

2

FREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)ACCURACY at 25OC , (ppm) (2)3FREQUENCY AGING, (ppm/Year) (2)±1

4FREQUENCY STABILITY OVER TEMP., ppm (2)

±1

5.1

OUTPUT POWER min. , (dBm)

+7

5.2

Peak to Peak Variation Over frequency andtemperature (dB)

6

SETTLING TIME , (µsec) (3)7SSB PHASE NOISE , max (dBc/Hz)

(1)

(1)

120±15(2)

7.1    @ 100 Hz Offset
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
8
9
10
11
12
13
13.1
13.2
14
14.1
14.2

6

@ 1 kHz Offset@ 10 kHz Offset@ 100 kHz Offset@ 1 MHz Offset@ 10 MHz Offset
HARMONICS, Typ. (dBc)
LOCK DETECTSPURIOUS, max (dBc)
FREQUENCY CONTROL
FREQ. STEP SIZE, nominal LSB (kHz) (1)
REFERENCE OSCILLATOR, External(2)INPUT FREQUENCY (MHz)INPUT POWER (dBm)
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
VDC, mA
VDC, mA

–65

–57

-57

-86
-93
-93
-93
-130

-78
-87
-87
-87
-125
–20
TTL High-60
Serial Control
0.1

-78
-87
-87
-87
-125

–65

100
0 ±2
+12 ±5%, 700-12 ±5%, 250

15

DIMENSIONS, Inch (mm)~ 3 x 3 x 1 (76.2 x 76.2 x 25.4)

16

RF IN/OUT CONNECTORSSMA Female

17

CONTROL CONNECTOR

18

OPERATING TEMPERATURE, ( C)MDM
-20 to +70

o(1) Other Parameters are Optional(2) Specification is for internal reference. The unit canbe configured to work with the internal reference orwith an external reference.
(1) For 50 µsec settling time, order option G17.

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings

366-60

Series SW Compact Synthesizer
DIMENSIONS and WEIGHT

J3 - Pin Assignment
PIN
No.
1

DIMENSIONS and WEIGHTSDI (Serial Com.)

3

SCLK (Serial Com.)

4

STROBE (Serial Com.)

5

Lock Detect

6

VIN negative -12V ±10%7For Factory Use - Do notconnect
For Factory Use - Do notconnect
GND

9

DIMENSIONS IN INCHES (mm)Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.010

367

VIN positive +12V ±10%28Weight (Approx.): 250 Gr. (8.8 Oz)

FUNCTION

Frequency Extender Series FE
Series FE Frequency Extender• Input Frequency within 2 to 20 GHz
Kratos General Microwave introduces the series FE
Frequency Extender to complement the Fast Indirect
Synthesizer product line

• Output Frequency 2 to 40 GHz
Optional 0.5 to 40 GHz
Optional 0.250 to 40 GHz

The series FE Frequency Extender has been designed
to extend, at a low cost, the frequency range of thehigh performance Fast Indirect Synthesizers enabling
operation from 0.5 to 40 GHz.

• Compact Size
• Airborne• Low Cost

The following product families may be used as an
input source for the FE Frequency Extender: SW0120,
SF6219, SM6220, D6218.
The SM6220 synthesizer is capable of wideband
frequency modulation with a span of 1 GHz. The FE
is supporting this capability through millimeter wave.
The result of combining the SM6220 with the FE is a
wideband synthesizer capable of wideband frequency
modulation with a span of 1 GHz up to 40 GHz.

Frequency Extender
Model FE0P240

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental
Ratings368

Frequency Extender Series FE
SERIES FE - SPECIFICATIONSPARAMETER
Model

SPECIFICATIONFE0P540

FE0240FE0P520

FE0P240

1

INPUT FREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)

2 to 20

2 to 20

2 to 20

2 to 202

OUTPUT FREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)J2

0.5 to 40
2 to 20

2 to 40
2 to 20

0.5 to 20
2 to 20

0.25 to 40
2 to 20

2.1
2.2

J3

18 to 40

18 to 40NA

18 to 402.3

J4

0.5 to 2

N/A

0.5 to 2

0.25 to 2+8 to +12

+8 to +12

+8 to +12

+8 to +12

3

INPUT POWER (dBm)

4

OUTPUT POWE (dBm)

4.1

2 to 20 GHz @ J2 min.

4.2

18 to 40 GHz @ J3 typ.

+10 to +15+10 to +15NA+10 to +15

4.3

0.5 to 2 GHz @ J4 typ.

0

N/A

0

0

2.0:1

2.0:1

2.0:1

2.0:1

5

INPUT VSWR, max.

6

OUTPUT VSWR=(Input Power-4dB)

6.1

0.5 to 2 GHz @J4 max.

2.0:1

N/A

2.0:1

2.0:1

6.2

2 to 18 GHz @J2 max.

2.0:1

2.0:1

2.0:1

2.0:1

18 to 40 GHz @J3 max.

2.5:1

2.5:1

NA

2.5:1

6.3
7

2 HARMONICS & SPURIOUS (dBc)
nd

7.1

2.0 to 20 GHz, min.

-50

-50

-50

-50

7.2

18 to 40 GHz, min. (dBc)

-50

-50

NA

-50

8

SWITCHING TIME, max (nSec)

250

250

250

250

9

SUPPLY VOLTAGE (A)9.1

12 to 15 VDC (A)

1.5

1.5

0.85

1.5

0.25
1
7
-40 to +85

0.25
1
7
-40 to +85

0.25
NA
NA
-40 to +85

0.25
1
7
-40 to +85

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

9.2
10
11
12
13
14
15
15.1
15.2
16
17
17.1

-12 to -15 VDC max.
FILTER OVERLAP, min. (GHz)FILTER CONTROL, TTL, Logic 1, BITS
OPERATING TEMPERATURE, (oC)AIRBORNE ENVIRONMENT (Option
G09)
LASER SEALING
RF CONNECTORS
J1, J2, J4
J3 OUTPUT
CONTROL CONNECTORDIMENSIONS, (mm)DIMENSIONS, (Inches)

K FEMALE

NOTES
1. With Option G09 -40 to +85 oC
2. Requires Option G09

369

SMA FEMALE
NA
MDM 15 PINS
76.2 x 76.2 x 20.32
3.0 x 3.0 x 0.8

K FEMALE

Frequency Extender Series FE
DIMENSIONS and WEIGHTDIMENSIONS IN INCHES (mm)Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

370

Frequency Extender Series FE
LOGIC TABLEPINOUT TABLE
S0

S1

S2

Shunt-Down Mode002 to 20 GHz (J2)0

18 to 20 GHz (J3)

FUNCTION

0

J5 PIN
No.

0

1

1

+12 V

0

1

0

2

+12 V

19 to 24 GHz (J3)

0

1

1

3

GND

23 to 28 GHz (J3)

1

0

0

4

S0

27 to 34 GHz (J3)

1

0

1

5

S1

33 to 40 GHz (J3)

1

1

0

6

S2

1

7

N/C

8

GND

9

-12 V

10

GND

11

N/C

12

GND

13

N/C

14

N/C

15

GND

0.5 to 2 GHz (J4)

1

1

NOTES:
TTL Logic Levels:“0” - -0.3 to +0.8 V“1” - +2 to +5 V

CONTROL COMMAND• Switch control logic signals shall be 3 line binary coded TTL logic,

as described in the Logic Table.
• Shut-Down Mode – the unit is set to J4 and there is no

current to the frequency divider.

371

Series SQ0580 Narrow Frequency Band
Synthesizer
Series SQ0580 Narrow Frequency Band
Synthesizer• Operating Frequency within 0.5 to 8 GHz• High Frequency Accuracy

Kratos General Microwave introduces the Series SQ
Narrow Band Synthesizer as a high performance, lowcost alternative to a fixed frequency source.

• High Frequency Stability• Low Cost
• Compact SizeAPPLICATIONSThe Series SQ synthesizer has been designed to be usedas the L.O. in various up and down frequency converters.
It can be used as a replacement of a DRO, in applications
that require high frequency stability over temperature andin operation under vibrations.

• High Reliability

Synthesizer Model SQ

SERIES SQ - SPECIFICATIONSPARAMETERSPECIFICATIONMODEL SQ0580

0.5 to 8

1

FREQUENCY RANGE (GHz) (1)2

RF BANDWIDTH, up to (%)

3

ACCURACY, (ppm)Same as of the ref. crystal

4

FREQUENCY AGING, (ppm)Same as of the ref. crystal

5

FREQUENCY STABILITY, (ppm)Same as of the ref. crystal

6

OUTPUT POWER, (dBm)

7

SETTLING TIME, max. (µsec)

0.3+10 to +1450

8 SSB PHASE NOISE , max (dBc/Hz) (2)@ 100 Hz Offset
8.1@ 1 kHz Offset
8.2@ 10 kHz Offset
8.3@ 100 kHz Offset
8.4@ 1 MHz Offset
8.5

372

@ 8 GHz
-70
-90
-99
-125
-142

Series SQ0580 Synthesizer
SERIES SQ - SPECIFICATIONSSPECIFICATIONPARAMETER

MODEL SQ0580

9

HARMONICS, (dBc) typ

-60

10

SUB-HARMONICS, max (dBc)-60

11 SPURIOUS, max (dBc)

-80

12

CONTROL

Serial Control

13

FREQ. STEP SIZE, nominal LSB (Hz) (1)14

EXTERNAL REFERENCE OSCILLATOR

100
(2)

14.1

INPUT FREQUENCY (MHz)

100

14.2

INPUT POWER (dBm)

0±2

15

SUPPLY VOLTAGE , (VDC)

12 ±0.4V @ 290 mA

16

DIMENSIONS, Inch (mm)2.25 (57.2) x 2.25 (57.2) x 1.28 (32.5)

17

RF OUTPUT & REF INPUT CONNECTORSSMA Female

18

CONTROL CONNECTOR

MDM (9 PINS)

19

OPERATING TEMPERATURE, (°C)

-40 to +85

20

STORAGE TEMPERATURE, (°C)

-65 to +125

21

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONSAirborne

22

LOCK DETECT OUTPUT

TTL High(1) Other Parameters are Optional(2) For internal Reference Oscillator (option G01) or external reference oscillator with the following
specs (100MHz output):• 100Hz offset: - 120 dBc/Hz• 1KHz offset: -137 dBc/Hz• 10KHz offset: -145 dBc/Hz

AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
G09
Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings373

Series SQ Synthesizer
DIMENSIONS and WEIGHTDIMENSIONS IN INCHES (mm)Weight (Approx.): Gr. ( Oz)
Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

374

CUSTOM SYNTHESIZERSCUSTOM SYNTHESIZERS
Kratos General Microwave has delivered a large number of custom synthesizers for various applications. Mostof these custom synthesizers were for airborne Electronic Warfare systems. Following is a sample of custom
synthesizers we delivered to our customers.

VME CONTROLLED SYNTHESIZERFEATURES• Wide Frequency Range• Fast Settling Time
• Low Power Consumption• VME mechanical and control Interface

375

CUSTOM SYNTHESIZERSDIRECT SYNTHESIZER• Broad Frequency Range• Settling Time: 40 nsec.
• Phase Noise@ 1 kHz: -91 dBc/Hz@ 100 kHz: -114 dBc/Hz@ 1 MHz: -116 dBc/Hz• Coherency Guaranteed

BANK OF SYNTHESIZERSFEATURES• Low Spurious• Wide Frequency Range• High Reliability

376

CUSTOM SYNTHESIZERSSYNTHESIZER - FORM FIT REPLACEMENT• Low Spurious• Wide Frequency Range• High Reliability• Replacement for YIG

377

Digitally Tuned Oscillators (DTOs)
General Microwave offers a line of DTOs covering the
2‑18 GHz frequency range based upon its catalog lineof broadband VCOs. The DTO provides the desired
output frequency in response to a digital control signal.
A block diagram of the DTO is shown in Fig. 1. By
appropriate design of the electronic circuitry, settling
times of less than 300 nanoseconds are achieved.
To obtain a frequency accuracy of the order of ±1%,
including the effects of temperature, a proportionallycontrolled heater is required for the VCO and theelectronic circuitry is temperature‑compensated. A latchmode is provided as a standard feature.

To enable analog frequency modulation of the DTO, a
separate frequency modulation port is provided. Since
the slope of the frequency vs. voltage curve of the
VCO varies over the frequency band, compensationis required to obtain a relatively constant deviation
bandwidth. Compensation to within ±5% is achieved(Option 2) by utilizing a PROM to vary the attenuation
applied to the modulating signal. The DTO may befrequency modulated at rates of greater than 15 MHz.




  





 


Fig. 1–DTO Block Diagram

378

 


DTO
Selection Guide
SELECTION GUIDE DIGITALLY TUNED OSCILLATORS (DTO)
0.5

FREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)
4
6
8
12
18

2

1

COMMENTS

380

Single Band Digitally Tuned
Oscillators

383

Multi-Band Digitally
Tuned Oscillators

D6020C4

2.6

D6026C

5.2
4

D6040C

8
8

D6080C

12
12

0.5

PAGE

D6010C2
2

D6120C

18

D6052

2
2

D6206

6
6

2
2

18

D6618

18

D6218

18

DC6206
DC6618388

Compact Airborne DTO

18------

393

Custom Multi-Band
Digitally Tuned Oscillators

6
6

0.5

MODEL

19

379

Series D60
Single-Band DTOs
• 1 to 18 GHZ in Various Sub-Band• Fast Settling Time• Modulation Capabilities• High Reliability

The Series D60 single-band DTO covers the frequency
range of 0.5 to 18 GHz in 6 DTOs. Fig. 2 is the basic
block diagram of the single band DTO.
When constant deviation bandwidth is required acrossthe entire frequency band of the DTO, Option 2 should
be used.
For military applications, these DTOs require option
G09 to comply with Military Standards. The specificenvironmental MIL STD requirements as well as the
EMI/RFI specifications should be provided by thecustomer.

DTO Model D6040C

380

Series D60 Single Band DTOs
Specifications
SINGLE BAND DTO SPECIFICATIONS
MODELPARAMETERFREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)ACCURACY, Incl. temp. (MHz)FREQUENCY SETTING (1), (MHz)  within 1 µsec

D6010C
1-2±2

D6020C
2-4±2

D6026C
2.6-5.2±3

D6040C
4-8±2

D6080C
8-12±4D6120C
12-18
±6

±3

±4

400

600

MODULATION(2)  Band Width    Standard unit, min (MHz)DC to 15    With Option G4(6), min (MHz)DC to 30  Sensitivity variation    Standard unit, typ    With Option 2, max  Frequency deviation bandwidth, min  @ 2v P-P (MHz)RF POWER  Output, min (dBm)  Variation, incl. temp. and freq. max (dB)RESIDUAL FM, P-P @ –3 dBc, typ (kHz)HARMONICS, max (dBc)  f/2, 3f/2,max (dBc)
SPURIOUS, max (dBc)
PULLING VSWR 2 :1 max (MHz)PUSHING, max (kHz/V)
NOMINAL LSB    Sta (MHz)3:1
1.1 :1
100

200

+10
±2

± 1.5
50

± 2.0
75

100

–15

– 40
N/A

150
– 20
–20

–60
1
250
0.5

1.0

1.5

Guaranteed

MONOTONICITYTURN ON TIME, (minutes)  to specified accuracy @ +25°
CONNECTORS  Control/Power  RF output  FM input

2
25 pin, D type male(4)SMA female
SMC male

POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENT  Voltage @ Current+15V ± 0.5V @ 375 mA max–15V ± 0.5V @ 200 mA max+5V ± 0.5V @ 100 mA max+28V –4V, +2V@ 1,000 mA max
3 amps max  Turn-On Current @ 28 volts
ENVIRONMENTAL (5)  Operating temperature (°C)  Storage temperature (°C)
MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS  Inches

0 to +70–54 to +100
5.67 x 3.55 x 1.69
144,0 x 90,2 x 42,9  Millimeters

AVAILABLE OPTIONS

260(1) D f relative to f after 1 sec.

(2) 50 Ohm input impedance.
Option No.	  Description(3) 12 Bit TTL input.
2	Reduced Modulation(4) Mating connector furnishedSensitivity Variation(5) RF section and driver components hermetically sealed)
G4Modulation Band Width:(6) Please consult us for further Modulation Band Width improvement:
DC to 30 MHz (6)G09Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings381

Series D60 Single Band DTO
Specifications
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTMODELS D6010C, D6020C, D6026C, D6040C, D6080C, D6120C DTOs
Wt. 23.1 oz. (655 gr) approx.

CONTROL/POWER CONNECTORCONTROL/POWER CONNECTOR

Pin No.

Pin No.

Function

1

+28V

14

+28V (return)

2
3

15
16

+28V (return)4+28V
Temp. monitor thermistor(VCO)
Tuning Word Bit 1 (LSB)

17

Tuning Word Bit 2

5Tuning Word Bit 3

18

Tuning Word Bit 4

6

Tuning Word Bit 5

19

Tuning Word Bit 6

Tuning Word Bit 7

20

Tuning Word Bit 8

8Tuning Word Bit 921

Tuning Word Bit 10

9

Tuning Word Bit 11

22

Tuning Word Bit 12 (MSB)10

Not used

23

Latch(1)11+5V (digital)

24

Digital ground

12+15V (analog)

25–15V (analog)

13

Analog ground

7

Function

Not used(1) Logic “0” to latch input word.
Logic “1” to unlatch input word.

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008382

Series D60
Multi-Band DTOs
MULTI-BAND DTOs
Simulator and other Test Systems
Applications• 0.5 to 18 GHZ in Various Sub-Band• Wide Frequency Range• Fast Settling Time
• Wide Modulation Capabilities• High Reliability

To obtain broadband frequency coverage, as wellas to improve settling speed, two or more VCOs are
combined, as shown in Fig. 1. A high‑isolation RF
switch is required to suppress all but the desired VCO.
A switched lowpass filter is included in the output toreduce harmonic levels. The harmonic level for catalog
units is specified at –20 dBc. However, –55 dBc
suppression is available as an option.
General Microwave offers multi‑band DTOs covering the0.5‑2, 2‑6, 6‑18 and 2‑18 GHz frequency ranges. The
units feature high speed, high accuracy and low phasenoise. The specifications are summarized on page 190.
The modular design of the DTOs enables the user toselect narrower frequency coverage if desired. Please
consult the factory for individual requirements.
For military applications, these DTOs require option
G09 to comply with Military Standards. The specificenvironmental MIL STD requirements as well as the
EMI/RFI specifications should be provided by thecustomer.

DTO Model D6218

Fig. 1–Multi-Band DTO Block Diagram383

Series D60 Multi-Band DTOs
Specifications
MULTI-BAND DTO SPECIFICATIONS
MODELPARAMETERFREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)ACCURACY @+25°C, max (MHz)FREQUENCY DRIFT, max (MHz/°C)
FREQUENCY SETTLING (1), max (MHz) within 1 µsec

D6052
0.5-2

D6206
2-6

D6618
6-18

D6218
2-18

±2
± 0.1
± 3 (6-12 GHz)
± 4 (12-18 GHz)±2± 2 (2-6 GHz)
± 3 (6-12 GHz)
± 4 (12-18 GHz)

MODULATION(2)  Bandwidth    Standard unit, min (MHz)DC to 10    With Option G4 , min (MHz)DC to 30

(5)   Sensitivity variation     Standard unit, typ     Option 2 Unit, max  Frequency deviation bandwidth, min  @ 2v P-P (MHz) – with option 2
RF POWER  Output, min (dBm)  Variation, incl. temp. and freq., max (dB)
PHASE NOISE, typ (dBc/Hz)  @ 100 kHz offset
RESIDUAL FM, P-P @ –3 dBc, typ (kHz)HARMONICS, max (dBc)  Standard Unit  Option 3 Unit  f/2, 3f/2,max (dBc)
SPURIOUS, max (dBc)
PULLING VSWR 2 :1 max (MHz)PUSHING, max (kHz/V)
NOMINAL LSB(3) (MHz)MONOTONICITYCONNECTORS  Power  Control  RF output  Modulation Input
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENT  Voltage @ Current+15V ± 0.5V
–15V ± 0.5V
+5V ± 0.5V
+28V ±2V

4:1
1.1:1
100
+10
±2

  Millimeters(1) ∆f relative to f after 1 sec.
(2) 50 Ohm input impedance.
(3) 1
 6 Bit TTL input, including VCO control.

± 2.5
–65

50

75

N/A

-55

150
–20
–55
–55

N/A
–60
1
± 125

± 500

±250

0.5
Guaranteed
9 pin, D type male(4)37 pin, D type male(4)SMA female
SMC male
450
250
150
1,000

700
250
150
1,000

1,000
300
500
3,000

3 amps max  Turn-ON Current @ 28 volts
ENVIRONMENTAL  Operating temperature (°C)  Storage temperature (°C)
MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS  Inches

500

6 amps max
0 to +70– 20 to +100

5.70 x 4.80 x 2.50
144,8 x 121,9 x
63,56.48 x 6.23 x 2.00
164,6 x 158,2 x 50,8(4) Mating connector furnished(5) Please consult us for further Modulation Band Width improvement:

384

1,250
300
500
3,000

Series D60 Multi-Band DTOs
Specifications
AVAILABLE OPTIONS
Option No.	  Description
2	Reduced Modulation Sensitivity Variation
3
Improved Harmonic Suppression
4
SMA Female Modulation Connector
B09
13 to 20 GHz Operation
B11
Operating Temp. range -5 (°C) to +70 (°C)
B12With options 2 & 3. Operating Temp.
range -10 (°C) to +70 (°C)
G09

Guaranteed to meet Environmental Ratings

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT – MODEL D6052
MODELS D6052
Control Connector (J4)PIN NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

FUNCTION
A13 Tuning Word (MSB)
A11 Tuning Word
A9 Tuning Word
A7 Tuning Word
A5 Tuning Word
A3 Tuning Word
A1 Tuning Word
V1 VCO Control (MSB)
L1 Latch 1 (Strobe)
L3 Latch 3
OE Memory Output Enable
D1 Data Bus
D3 Data Bus
D5 Data Bus
D7 Data Bus
W2 Write 2
OET2 Output Enable Transceiver 2
G GroundWE Write Enable
A12 Tuning Word
A10 Tuning Word
A8 Tuning Word
A6 Tuning Word
A4 Tuning Word
A2 Tuning Word
A0 Tuning Word
V0 VCO Control (LSB)
L2 Latch 2
G Ground
D0 Data Bus
D2 Data Bus
D4 Data Bus
D6 Data Bus
W1 Write 1
OET1 Output Enable Transceiver 1
OET3 Output Enable Transceiver 3
G GroundDimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

385

Series D60 Multi-Band DTOs
Specifications
MODELS D6052
Power Connector (J3)
PIN NO. FUNCTIONPIN NO. FUNCTION

1

+5V

6

Return for:+5V, -15V, +15V

2

–15V

7

Return for:+5V, -15V, +15V

3

+15V

8

+28V (return)4+28V (return)

9

+28V

5

+28V

NOTES: For Normal Operation of the DTO
1) PIN nos. 9, 10 and 28 should be connected together.
2) PIN no. 11 should be grounded.
3) PIN nos. 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 19, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34,
35 and 36 are for FACTORY PROGRAMMING ONLY
and should not be connected.

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT – MODELS D6206, D6218 and D6618

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

386

Series D60 Multi-Band DTOs
Specifications
MODELS D6206, D6218 and D6618
Control Connector (J2)

MODELS D6206, D6218 and D6618
Power Connector (J3)
PIN NO. FUNCTIONPIN NO. FUNCTION

1

+5V

6

Return for:+5V, -15V, +15V

2

–15V

7

Return for:+5V, -15V, +15V

3

+15V

8

+28V (return)4+28V (return)

9

+28V

5

+28V

NOTES: For Normal Operation of the DTO
1) PIN nos. 9, 10 and 28 should be connected together (Latch enable).
2) PIN no. 11 should be grounded.
3) PIN nos. 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 19, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35 and 36 are for
FACTORY PROGRAMMING ONLY and should not be connected.

387

PIN NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

FUNCTION
A14
Tuning Word (MSB)
A12
Tuning Word
A10
Tuning Word
A8
Tuning Word
A6
Tuning Word
A4
Tuning Word
A2
Tuning WordV0
VCO Control Bit
L1
Latch 1 of 3 (Strobe)
L3
Latch 3 of 3 (Strobe)
OE
Memory Output Enable
D1
Data Bus
D3
Data Bus
D5
Data Bus
D7
Data BusW2
Write select 2
OET2 Output Enable Transceiver 2
GND Ground
WE
Write Enable
A13
Tuning Word
A11
Tuning Word
A9
Tuning Word
A7
Tuning Word
A5
Tuning Word
A3
Tuning Word
A1
Tuning Word
A0
Tuning Word (LSB)
L2Latch 2 of 3 (Strobe)G
GroundD0
Data Bus
D2
Data Bus
D4
Data Bus
D6
Data BusW1
Write select 1
OET1 Output Enable Transceiver 1
OET3 Output Enable Transceiver 3
GND GroundSeries DC60
Compact Airborne DTOs
FOR RWR, ESM AND OTHERAPPLICATIONS• Fast Settling Time• 2 to 18 GHz in Various Sub-Bands• Small Size• For Airborne Applications

KRATOS General Microwave offers a compact multiband DTOs for various airborne and other applications,covering the 2-6 and 6-18 GHz frequency ranges. The
units feature high speed, high accuracy and low phasenoise. The modular design of the DTOs enables theuser to select narrower frequency coverage if desired.
Please consult the factory for individual requirements.

DTO Model DC6618

388

Series DC60 Compact Airborne DTOs
Specifications
COMPACT AIRBORNE DTO SPECIFICATIONS
MODELPARAMETERFREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)DC6206

DC66182 to 6

6 to 18

ACCURACY @ +25°C, max (MHz)±2

FREQUENCY DRIFT, max (MHz/°C)± 0.1

FREQUENCY SETTLING within 1 µsec, max (MHz)±2±3

DC to 15

DC to 10

MODULATION(1)  Bandwidth  min (MHz)

1.1 :1   Sensitivity variation, max   Frequency deviation (MHz/V) max± 250 @ 5vPTP± 250 @ 2vPTP

RF POWER   Output, min (dBm)

2-8

+10

   Variation, incl. temp. and frequency, max (dB)

±2

± 2.5

PHASE NOISE, max (dBc/Hz)   @ 100 kHz offset

–70

–65

RESIDUAL FM, p-p @ –3 dBc, max (kHz)

200

150

HARMONICS, max (dBc)

–45

–55

SUB-HARMONICS, max (dBc)

–45

–55

SPURIOUS, max (dBc)– 60

PULLING @ VSWR 2:1, max (MHz)±2±1

PUSHING, max (MHz/V)

± 2.5

± 0.5

1

0.5

FREQUENCY STEP per LSB, (MHz) Nominal
MONOTONICITY

Guaranteed

OPERATING TEMPERATURE (°C)

0 to +70(2)

CONNECTORS  Power

9 Pin MDM Male  Control

37 Pin MDM Male   RF output

SMA female   Modulation Input

SMA female

POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENT (V)+15, –15, +5 & +28

MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS  Inches

4.0 x 3.5 x 1.5  Millimeters102.0 x 90.0 x 38.6

(1) Option(2) Other operating temperature option389

Series DC60 Compact Airborne DTOs
Specifications

COMPACT AIRBORNE DTO DIMENSIONS


 





 
















CONNECTORS TABLE
Sym

Description

Function

J1

COAX. CONN., SMA FEMALE

RF OUT

J2

COAX. CONN., SMA FEMALE

MODULATION

J3“ITT CANNON” CONN. MDM-37SH003P OR EQUIV.

CONTROL

J4“ITT CANNON” CONN. MDM-9SH003P OR EQUIV.

POWER

MODELS DC6206, DC6618

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

390Series DC60 Compact Airborne DTOs
Specifications
J3 CONTROL CONNECTOR – PIN ASSIGNMENT
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

Function
DC6206
N.C.
A11
A9
A7
A5
A3
A1
V1
LE\
N.C.
OE\
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
GND
N.C.
A12
A10
A8
A6
A4
A2
A0
V0
N.C.
GND
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
GND

DC6218
A14
A12
A10
A8
A6
A4
A2
V0
LE\
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
GND
A13
A11
A9
A7
A5
A3
A1
A0
GND
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
GND

Description
Tuning Word (MSB)
Tuning Word
Tuning Word
Tuning Word
Tuning Word
Tuning Word
Tuning Word
VCO Control Bit
Latch
N.C.
OE
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Ground/N.C.
GroundTuning Word
Tuning Word
Tuning Word
Tuning Word
Tuning Word
Tuning Word
Tuning Word
VCO Control/Tuning Word (LSB)
GroundGround/N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
GroundNotes:
A. For Model DC6218
1. Pins 19, 28 and 37 should be grounded.
2. P ins 10 through 18 and 29 through 36 should not be connected (for factoryuse only).
B. For Model DC6206
1. Pins 11, 18, 29 and 37 should be grounded.
2. P ins 1, 10, 12 through 17, 19, 28 and 30 through 36 should not be connected(for factory use only).
391

Logic Level“0”“1”

Input Level–0.3 to 0.8V
2.0 to 5.0V

Series DC60 Compact Airborne DTOs
Specifications
J4 POWER CONNECTOR – PIN ASSIGNMENT
Notes

Max. Current
Consumption(mA)

Pin No.

Function

Description

1

5V

Digital Supply

500

2

–15V

Analog Supply

500

3

+15V

Analog Supply

1,000

4

28V Return

Negative Heater Supply

528V

Positive Heater Supply

6

Return for:+5V, -15V, +15V

Ground1–

7

Return for:+5V, -15V, +15V

Ground1–

8

28V Return

Negative Heater Supply

928V

Positive Heater Supply

1,000(2)Notes:
1. GND is the DTOs analog ground for the +15V, –15V and +5V supplies and not the heater’s ground.
2. Warm up 3,000 mA, steady state 1,000 mA max.

392

CUSTOM DTOs
CUSTOM MULTI-BAND DTOs
Multi-Band DTO For
EW and ESM Applications

photographs. The key requirements for the EW
Multi‑Band DTO , as seen in Figs. 1 and 2, are compact
size, low spurious and harmonic levels, and 45g rms
endurance vibration levels. The unit includes 3 VCOs,
3 MMIC amplifiers, a switched lowpass filter, a custom
hybrid electronic circuit, and RFI/EMI filtering.

General Microwave has developed numerous
multi‑band DTOs for demanding EW and ESM
high‑reliability applications, as shown in theFig. 2 - Multi-Band DTO (Driver side view)Fig. 1 - Multi-Band DTO (RF side view)

The C-Ku band DTO (Fig. 3) includes 3 fundamental
mode VCOs and 1 push-push VCO, 4 MMIC amplifiers,a SP4T switch, a switched lowpass filter, andassociated electronic circuitry. The key requirements

are suppression of the unused VCOs and fast settling
tuning. The S-C band DTO (Fig. 4) meets similar
requirements

Fig. 3 - C-Ku Band DTO RF Assembly

Fig. 4 - S-C Band DTO RF Assembly

393

Multi-Band Frequency Locked
Oscillator (FLO)
MULTI-BAND FREQUENCY LOCKED
OSCILLATOR (FLO)• Fast Settling (1MHz in 1 µsec)• Wideband (2-18 GHz)• High Accuracy• Low Phase Noise

KRATOS General Microwave has developed a new
product line of Multi-Band Frequency Locked
Oscillators (FLO). This product line is an enhancement
to our free running Digitally Tuned Oscillator (DTO)
products. This FLO combines the high speed of DTO
with the high accuracy and long-term stability of afrequency locked source. The key specification featureof the FLO is a timing speed of less than 1 µsec tosettle within 1 MHz of the desired frequency.

SIMULATOR AND TEST SYSTEMSAPPLICATIONSThe FLO was specifically designed for test systems andsimulator applications. It is a low cost replacement forhigh cost direct synthesizers, in applications that thefrequency setting time of 1 msec is meeting the system
requirements.
FLO Model FL6618

UCT
PROD
R
ING–
E
D
OR
RDER
L
O
A
I
E
C
R
O
SPE
Y BEF
CTOR
A
F
T
NSUL

–­ CO

SELECTION GUIDE FREQUENCY LOCKED OSCILLATORS
0.5

2

FREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)
4
6
8
12.0

2
6

18.0

MODEL

18

FL621818

FL6618394

PAGE

COMMENTS

394

Frequency Locked Oscillator

Multi-Band Frequency Locked Oscillator(FLO) Specifications
Multi-Band Frequency Locked Oscillator Specifications

PARAMETERFREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)ACCURACY OVER TEMPERATURE (MHz)SETTLING TIME within 1 µsec (MHz)RESIDUAL FM, max (kHz)

1
2
3
4
5
6
6.1
6.2
7
8
8.1
8.2
9
10
11
12
12.1
12.2

SPURIOUS, max (dBc)
PULLING, VSWR 2 :1, max (MHz)PUSHING, max (kHz/V)
TUNING CONTROL   Nominal LSB (kHz)   Tuning (bits)

13

CONNECTORS

13.1
13.2
13.3

  Power  Control   RF Output, FM Input

14

15
16

SPECIFICATION
FL6218
FL66182 to 18
6 to 18±1±1
10

MODULATION(1)
RF POWER   Output, min (dBm)
Variation, incl. temp. and freq., max (dB)
PHASE NOISE, max (dBc/Hz) @ 100 kHz offset
HARMONICS, max (dBc)  Integer   f/2, 3f/2

+10
± 2.5
-80
– 55
– 55
– 60
±1
± 500
250
17
15-Pin, D type
37-Pin, D type
SMA female

POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENT max (mA):
+15V
–15V
	 
+5V
28V, start upo
28V, steady state @25 C
OPERATING TEMPERATURE (°C)
MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS  Inches  Millimeters(1) In DTO mode. Consult factory for specifications

395

2,000
580
300
6,500
2,000
0 to +55
9.20 x 6.2 x 2.00
234.6 x 158.1 x 51.0

Multi-Band Frequency Locked Oscillator(FLO) Specifications
DIMENSIONS & WEIGHTCONNECTOR DATA

Wt. 4.63 lb. (2.1 kg) approx.

SYM

FUNCTIONDESCRIPTIONJ1RF OUTPUT

COAX, CONN, SMA FEMALE

J2DIGITALCONTROL

DC-37PJ3

SUPPLY

DA-15P

J4

MODULATIONINPUTSMA FEMALE

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

396

Multi-Band Frequency Locked Oscillator(FLO) Specifications
CONNECTOR J2
PINNo.

FUNCTION

1

A14

2

A12

3

A10

4

A8

5

A6

6

A4

7

A2

8

V0

9

LATCH

CONNECTOR J3
PIN No.

NOTES

10

D2

1

11

GND

12

D1

1

13

D0

1

14

CL

1

15

FE\

1

16

N.C.

17

N.C.

18

A15

19

N.C.

20

A13

21

A11

22

A9

23

A7

24

A5

25

A3

26

A1

27

A0

28

WR_RD

29

GND

30

TR_REAL

1

31

FL_DTO

132

LD_IND

33

GND

34

GND

35

GND

36

S_H_DIS

37

GND

1

Note:
1. For factory only use, should not be connected.

397

FUNCTION

1

+5V

2

–15V

3

+15V

4

N.U.

5

28V

6

28V

7

28V

8

28V

9

GND

10

GND

11

N.U.

12

28V Return

13

28V Return

14

28V Return

15

28V Return

Voltage Controlled Oscillators (VCOs)
Broadband VCOs
General Microwave's catalog line of broadband VCOs
covers the 2‑18 GHz frequency range in octave (2‑4,
2.6‑5.2 and 4‑8 GHz) and half‑octave (8‑12 and 12‑18)
GHz bands. The major features of the VCOs are fast
settling time, low phase noise and excellent frequency
stability.
A simplified block diagram is shown in Fig. 3. For
optimum performance, the active element used is asilicon bipolar transistor. (This is in lieu of GaAs FETs
which typically exhibit 10‑20 dB poorer phase noise
performance. Although GaAs FETs have extremely low
noise in amplifier applications, they suffer from high 1/f
noise, which is upconverted in the nonlinear oscillator
to phase noise near the carrier.) To vary the frequencyof the oscillator, a high‑Q silicon hyperabrupt varactor
is utilized. The capacitance‑voltage characteristic is
specified to provide as nearly linear frequency vs.
voltage tuning curve as possible. In practice, good
linearity can only be realized over a small portion of thetuning range because of parasitic reactances present
in the physical circuit and the bipolar transistor. Typicalratios of maximum to minimum frequency vs. voltage
sensitivity for an octave band are 2:1 and are specified
at 3 :1. GaAs varactors, although having higher Q's
than silicon varactors, suffer from long‑term charging
effects as well as relatively poor thermal conductivity.
Silicon varactors are therefore mandatory in high‑speed
applications requiring settling times of the order ofseveral hundred nanoseconds and low post‑tuning drift.
To minimize pulling effects on the oscillator frequency
due to variations in the external load, attenuator pads
followed by buffer amplifiers are incorporated at theoscillator output. Voltage regulators are also included
to minimize the effect of variations in the power supply
voltage on both oscillator frequency and power level.

Finally, filtering is provided to reduce the harmonic
content of the output signal.
Of particular note is General Microwave's 8‑12 GHz
VCO, which utilizes a high performance transistor
operating in the fundamental, rather than the doubling
push‑push mode. This mode of operation eliminates
all (2n + 1) fO /2 frequencies in the output spectrum.
The second harmonic signal is specified at –40 dBc
maximum but is typically less than –50 dBc.
Because fundamental mode oscillation is not currently
achievable with available silicon devices in the 12‑18
GHz band, the doubling push‑push approach, shown
schematically in Fig. 4, is used. Thus, for example, fora 12 GHz output frequency, each oscillator is designed
to operate at 6 GHz. If the structure were perfectly
symmetrical, all odd harmonics of 6 GHz would be
suppressed, and only even harmonics would bepresent in the output spectrum. By suitable filtering,an essentially pure 12 GHz output signal could beobtained. In practice, imperfect symmetry results infO /2 and 3fO /2 signals, which are filtered to the extent
possible. (For the case of a 12 GHz output signal, theundesired 3fO /2 signal at 18 GHz cannot be filteredsince it is within the 12‑18 GHz frequency range of the
VCO.)

Fig 3–Simplified VCO Block diagram

Fig 4–Schematic diagram of Push-Push Oscillator

398

VCOs
Selection Guide
VOLTAGE CONTROLLED OSCILLATORS (VCO) SELECTION GUIDEFREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)
MODEL
0.5

2

4

2

4

6

8

12.0

4

V6040

8
8

Octave Band Voltage
Controlled Oscillators

302

Miniaturized Voltage
Controlled Oscillators

397

Custom Military and Commercial
Voltage Controlled Oscillators

V6080

12
12

18

V6120A
V6020-952C

2.8

V6020-953C

3.8
3.8

V6020-954C

4.9
4.9

1

399

V6026

5.2

2.8

COMMENTS

V6020

2.6

2

PAGE

18.0

V6020-955C

6.1

18

------

399

Series V60
Octave Band VCOs
OCTAVE BAND VCO SPECIFICATIONSPARAMETERFREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)FREQUENCY SETTLING(1), max (MHz)  within 50 nsec , Typical  within 200 nsec, Typical  within 1 µsec
MODULATION  Bandwidth, min (MHz)  Sensitivity ratio, max
RF POWER  Output, min (dBm)  Variation, Incl. temp. and freq. max (dB)
PHASE NOISE, max (dBc/Hz)  @ 100 kHz offset
HARMONICS, max (dBc)  f/2, 3f/2,max (dBc)
SPURIOUS, max (dBc)
TEMPERATURE STABILITY, typ (PPM/°C)
PULLING VSWR 2:1 max (MHz)PUSHING, max (kHz/V)
CONNECTORS  Power supply  Tuning voltage  RF output
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENT  Voltage (VDC)  Current, max (mA)  Tuning voltage (VDC)
INPUT CAPACITANCE, nominal
ENVIRONMENTAL(2)  Operating temperature (°C)  Storage temperature (°C)
MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS  Inches

V6020
2-4

V6026
2.6-5.2

V6120A
12-18

±8

± 10

±3
± 1.5

±4
±3

±5
±4

100
3:1
+10
± 2.5

± 3.0

–95

–90
–15

–80

–80

–40

–20
–20

N/A
–60
100
1
250
Solder terminal
SMA female
SMA female+15 ±0.5
150

300

0 to + 20

0 to +15
25 pF, 10 kΩ–54 to + 85
–54 to +125  Millimeters1.79 x 1.10 x 0.45

2.19 x 1.10 x 0.45

45,5 x 27,9 x 11,4

55,6 x 27,9 x 11,4

AVAILABLE OPTIONS(1) ∆f relative to f after 1 sec.
(2) Hermetically sealed.

Option No.	  Description
49	High Rel screening(see Table 1)
G09
Meeting Environmental Ratings

Table 1. Option 49 High Rel Screening
TEST

MODEL
V6040
V6080
4-8
8-12

MIL-STD-883

Internal Visual

METHODE2017

Temperature Cycle

METHODE 1010

Mechanical ShockBurn-InLeak

METHODE 2002, COND. B
METHODE 1015, COND. B
METHODE 1014 COND. A1

NOTES–-55 °C to +95 °C, 10 CYCLES

Dewll time at temperature 20 minutes
min. temp. rise time 3°C/MIN
1,500g 0.5ms
48 hours, at +110 °C
5X10-8400

Series V60
Broad Band VCOs
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

401Series V60-95
Miniaturized VCOs
General Microwave has developed a family of highspeed, miniaturized VCOs covering the 2‑6 GHz
frequency range. These VCOs have been utilized inairborne EW applications, as well as in ground‑based
simulators. The specifications are summarized below.

Series V6020-95X Miniaturized VCO

MINIATURIZED VCO SPECIFICATIONSPARAMETERFREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)FREQUENCY SETTLING(1), max (MHz)  within 1 µsec
RF POWER   Output, min (dBm)   Variation, max (dB)
PHASE NOISE, max (dBc/Hz)@ 100 kHz offset
HARMONICS, max (dBc)
SPURIOUS, max (dBc)

MODEL
V6020-953C/J
V6020-954C/J
2.8-3.8
3.8-4.9

V6020-952C/J
2.0-2.8

V6020-955C/J
4.9-6-1

±1
+13
±2
–105

–100
–20
–60

–0.6
2

TEMPERATURE STABILITY, typ (MHz/°C)
PULLING VSWR 3:1 typ (MHz)PUSHING, typ (MHz/V)

–1.0
3

6

POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENT  Voltage (VDC)  Current, max (mA)  Tuning (VDC)
TUNING PORT CAPACITANCE, max (pF)
ENVIRONMENTAL  Operating temperature (°C)  Storage temperature (°C)
MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS
Inches

0.97 x 0.50 x 0.20  Millimeters

24,6 x 12,7 x 5,1+12 ±0.5
125
0 to + 28
50
0 to +85–54 to +125(1) ∆f relative to f after 1 millisec

402

5
10

DIMENSIONS and WEIGHTS
Model V6020-95xC

Model V6020-95xJ

Dimensional Tolerances, unless otherwise indicated: .XX ±.02; .XXX ±.008

All Models: 0.15 oz.; (4.34 grams) approx.
403

VCOs
CUSTOM VCOs
Linear VCOs
For narrowband (<5%) applications, General Microwave has developed
proprietary techniques to achieve a high degree of linearity without theuse of external linearizers.

Linear X band

Linear Ku band

An X‑band VCO assembly with linearity of less than
±1% is shown in the photo. The assembly includes two
MMIC amplifiers, a medium power MIC amplifier, twofilters, a phase shifter and a MMIC SP2T switch. For
specific requirements, please consult the factory.

The photo shows a Ku‑band VCO with a typicallinearity of better than ±5% for an airborne jamming
application. The unit is designed for high speed
modulation and also includes RFI/EMI filtering.

Commercial GaAs FET X band
For X‑ and Ku‑band applications where very low post‑tuning drift andphase noise are not required, VCOs based upon GaAs FETs provide
a cost‑effective solution. In the photo, a GaAs FET X‑band VCO,
developed for a commercial radar application, is shown.

404

APPENDIX
dBm - Volts - Watts Conversion Tables (50 Ohms system)dBm

V (RMS)PdBm

V (RMS)

P

+53

100.0

200W

+19

2.00

80mW

-13

50

+50

70.7

100W

+18

1.80

64mW

-14

45

+49

64.0

80W

+17

1.60

50mW

-15

40

+48

58.0

64W

+16

1.41

40mW

-16

35.5

+47

50.0

50W

+15

1.25

32mW

-17

31.5

+46

44.5

40W

+14

1.15

25mW

-18

28.5

+45

40.0

32W

+13

1.00

20mW

-19

25.1

+44

32.5

25W

+12

.90

16mW

-20

22.5

+43

32.0

20W

+11

.80

12.5mW

-21

20.0

+42

26.0

16W

+10

.71

10mW

-22

17.9

+41

26.2

12.5W

+9

.64

8mW

-23

15.9

+40

22.5

10W

+8

.56

6.4mW

-24

14.1

+39

20.0

8W

+7

.500

5mW

-25

12.8

+38

18.0

4W

+6

.445

4mW

-26

11.5

+37

16.0

5W

+5

.400

3.2mW

-27

10.0

+36

14.1

4W

+4

.355

2.5mW

-28

8.9

+35

12.5

3.2W

+3

.320

2.0mW

-29

8.0

+34

11.5

2.5W

+2

.280

1.6mW

-30

7.1

+33

10.0

2W

+1

.252

1.25mW

-31

6.25

+32

9.0

1.6W

0

.225

1.0mW

-32

5.8

+31

8.0

1.25W

-1

.200

.80mW

-33

5.0

+30

7.10

1.0W

-2

.180

.64mW

-34

4.5

+29

6.40

800mW

-3

.160

.50mW

-35

4.0

+28

5.80

640mW

-4

.141

.40mW

-36

3.5

+27

5.00

500mW

-5

.125

.32mW

-37

3.2

+26

4.45

400mW

-6

.115

.25mW

-38

2.85

+25

4.00

320mW

-7

.100

.20mW

-39

2.5

+24

3.55

250mW

-8

.090

.16mW

-40

2.25

.1µW

+23

3.20

200mW

-9

.080

.125mW

-50

0.71

.01µW

+22

2.80

1680mW

-10

.071

.10mW

-60

0.225

.001µW

+21

2.52

125mW

-11

.064

.08mW

-70

71µV

.1nW

+20

2.25

100mW

-12

.058

.06mW

-80

22.5µV.01nW

405

dBm mV (RMS)

P

.01mW

.001mW

APPENDIXVSWR Conversion Tables

1) K= VSWR-1 = Reflection Coefficient (r)24) 1- K =Ratio of Power Transmitted

VSWR+15). -{1-K2} (dB) = 10 LOG10 {1-K2} = Loss Due to VSWR )2) -K (dB) = 20 LOG10 K = Return Loss
3) VSWR (dB) = 20 LOG10 VSWR = VSWR in Decibels

-K
VSWR
(dB)

K

VSWR
(dB)

1-K

2

2
-{1-K }
(dB)

VSWR

-K
(dB)

K

VSWR
(dB)

1-K

2

{1-k 2 }
(dB)

1.00

∞

.0000

.000

1.00000

.0000

1.25

19.08

.1111

1.938

.98765

.0540

1.01

46.06

.0050

.086

.99998

.0001

1.26

18.78

.1150

2.007

.98676

.0579

1.02

40.09

.0099

.172

.99990

.0004

1.27

18.49

.1189

2.076

.98585

.0619

1.03

36.61

.0148

.257

.99978

.0009

1.28

18.22

.1228

2.144

.98492

.0660

1.04

34.15

.0196

.341

.99962

.0017

1.29

17.95

.1266

2.212

.98396

.0702

1.05

32.26

.0244

.424

.99941

.0026

1.30

17.69

.1304

2.279

.98299

.0745

1.06

30.71

.0291

.506

.99915

.0037

1.31

17.45

.1342

2.345

.98199

.0789

1.07

29.42

.0338

.583

.99886

.0050

1.32

17.21

.1379

2.411

.98098.0834.

1.08

28.30

.0385

.668

.99852

.0064

1.33

16.98

.1416

2.477

.97994

.0880

1.09

27.32

.0431

.749

.99815

.0081

1.34

16.75

.1453

2.542

.97889

.0927

1.10

26.44

.0476

.828

.99773

.0099

1.35

16.54

.1489

2.607

.97782

.0974

1.11

25.66

.0521

.906

.99728

.0118

1.36

16.33

.1525

2.671

.97673

.1023

1.12

24.94

.0566

.984

.99680

.0139

1.37

16.13

.1561

2.734

.97563

.1072

1.13

24.29

.0610

1.062

.99627

.0162

1.38

15.94

1597

2.798

.97451

.1121

1.14

23.69

.0654

1.138

.99572

.0186

1.39

15.75

.1632

2.860

.97337

.1172

1.15

23.13

.0698

1.214

.99513

.0212

1.40

15.56

.1667

2.923

.97222

.1223

1.16

22.61

.0741

1.289

.99451

.0239

1.41

15.38

.1701

2.984

.97106

.1275

1.17

22.12

.0783

1.364

.99386

.0267

1.42

15.21

.1736

3.046

.96988

.1328

1.18

21.66

.0826

1.438

.99318

.0297

1.43

15.04

.1770

3.107

.96869

.1382

1.19

21.23

.0868

1.511

.99247

.0328

1.44

14.88

.1803

3.167

.96748

.1436

1.20

20.83

.0909

1.584

.99174

.0360

1.45

14.72

.1837

3.227

.96626

.1490

1.21

20.44

.0950

1.656

.99097

.0394

1.46

14.56

1870

3.287

.96503

.1546

1.22

20.08

.0991

1.727

.99018

.0429

1.47

14.41

.1903

3.346

.96379

.1602

1.23

19.73

.1031

1.798

.98936

.0464

1.48

14.26

.1935

3.405

.96254

.1658

1.24

19.40

.1071

1.868

.98852

.0501

1.49

14.12

.1968

3.464

.96127.1715

406

APPENDIXVSWR Conversion Tables

-K
VSWR
(dB)

K

VSWR
(dB)

1-K

2

2
-{1-K }
(dB)

VSWR

-K
(dB)

K

VSWR
(dB)

1-K

2

{1-k 2 }
(dB)

1.50

13.98

.2000

3.522

.96000

.1773

2.80

6.49

.4737

8.943

.77562

1.1035

1.55

13.32

.2157

3.807

.95348

.2069

2.85

6.37

.4805

9.097

.769101.1402

1.60

12.74

.2308

4.082

.94675

.2377

2.90

6.25

.4872

9.248

.76266

1.1767

1.65

12.21

.2453

4.350

.93984

.2696

2.95

6.13

.4937

9.396

.756291.2131

1.70

11.73

.2593

4.609

.93278

.3022

3.00

6.02

.5000

9.542

.750001.2494

1.75

11.29

.2727

4.861

.92562

.3357

3.05

5.91

.5062

9.686

.743791.2855

1.80

10.88

.2857

5.105

.91837

.3698

3.10

5.81

.5122

9.827

.737661.3215

1.85

10.51

.2982

5.343

.91105

.4046

3.15

5.71

.5181

9.966

.731601.3573

1.90

10.16

.3103

5.575

.90369

.4398

3.20

5.62

.5238

10.103.72562

1.3929

1.95

9.84

.3220

5.801

.89629

.4755

3.25

5.52

.5294

10.238.71972

1.4283

2.00

9.54

.3333

6.021

.88889

.5115

3.30

5.43

.5349

10.370.713901.4636

2.05

9.26

.3443

6.235

.88148

.5479

3.35

5.35

.5402

10.501.70815

1.4987

2.10

9.00

.3548

6.444

.87409

.5844

3.40

5.26

.5455

10.630.702481.5337

2.15

8.75

.3651

6.649

.86672

.6212

3.45

5.18

.5506

10.756.696881.5684

2.20

8.52

.3750

6.848

.85938

.6582

3.50

5.11

.5556

10.881.691361.6030

2.25

8.30

.3846

7.044

.85207

.6952

3.55

5.03

.5604

11.005.68591

1.6373

2.30

8.09

.3939

7.235

.84481

.7324

3.60

4.96

.5652

11.126.68053

1.6715

2.35

7.89

.4030

7.421

.83760

.7696

3.65

4.88

.5699

11.246.675221.7055

2.40

7.71

.4118

7.604

.83045

.8069

3.70

4.81

.5745

11.364.669991.7393

2.45

7.53

.4203

7.783

.82336

.8441

3.75

4.75

.5789

11.481.66482

1.7730

2.50

7.36

.4286

7.959

.81633

.8814

3.80

4.68

.5833

11.596.659721.8064

2.55

7.20

.4366

8.131

.80936

.9186

3.85

4.62

.5876

11.709.654691.8396

2.60

7.04

.4444

8.299

.80247

.9557

3.90

4.56

.5918

11.821.649731.8727

2.65

6.90

.4521

8.465

.79565

.9928

3.95

4.50

.5960

11.932.644831.9055

2.70

6.76

.4595

8.627

.788901.0298

4.00

4.44

.6000

12.041.640001.9382

2.75

6.62

.4667

8.787

.78222

1.0667407

KRATOS General Microwave
Terms and Conditions of Sale
1. CONTROLLING PROVISIONS: Seller is the division/subsidiary of KRATOS. that accepts the order of theBuyer. ALL SALES ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO AND THE RIGHTS OF THE PARTIES SHALL BE GOVERNED EXCLUSIVELY BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS STATED HEREIN WHETHER THIS CONTRACT,OF WHICH THIS CONDITIONS OF SALE IS A PART, REPRESENTS AN OFFER BY SELLER OR SELLER’SCONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE OF BUYER’S OFFER. SELLER’S OFFER IS EXPRESSLY CONDITIONED ON
BUYER’S ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS CONTRACT. SELLER’S ACCEPTANCE
OF BUYER’S OFFER IS EXPRESSLY CONDITIONED ON BUYER’S ASSENT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS CONTRACT No addition to, waiver or modification of these terms and conditions shall bebinding on Seller unless expressly agreed to in writing by Seller. All quotations or resulting contracts shallbe interpreted under the laws of the State of Delaware and exclude the provisions of the 1980 United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods and the U. N. Convention on the Limitation Period
in the International Sale of Goods, as amended by Protocol. No sale shall be final until acknowledged in writing by Seller. All offers involving the export of goods are contingent upon the ability of Seller to get required
export license(s).
2. TERMS, TAXES AND PRICES: (a) Terms of payment are subject to the approval of Seller’s credit department. Unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Seller, all payments are due net thirty (30) days from the dateof invoice. In the event that the Buyer his failed to pay Seller for products or services ordered under different
contracts or under this Contract as required by the terms and conditions of said contracts or Contract Seller,
at its option shall have the right to make any delivery under this Contract payable on a cash before shipment basis. In the case of export sales, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Seller, all payments are to
be by means of a confirmed irrevocable letter of credit. (b) In addition to the prices specified in the Contract
between the parties, (referred to in this Conditions of Sale as “Contract”), Buyer shall pay Seller the amountof any excise, sales, privilege, use or any other taxes or government charges, local, state or federal, whicharise from the sale or delivery of the products, or in lieu thereof, Buyer shall provide Seller with a tax exemption certificate acceptable to the appropriate taxing authorities. (c) Prices and deliveries are F.O.B.. Ex Works
Seller’s plant. Prices on accepted orders and covering Seller-manufactured products are firm for a period of
six months from date of acceptance. Seller reserves the right to increase the prices at the time of shipment
to the extent of any increase in cost to it of any item not of Sellers manufacture on which firm prices were notavailable on the date of acceptance.
3. SHIPMENT: Deliveries are F.O.B. Ex Works Seller’s plant. Risk of loss shall pass to the Buyer upon delivery
to the carrier. Any claims for damage or loss in shipment are between the carrier and Buyer. Seller shall not be
involved in such claims beyond Seller’s assistance is processing and securing information pertaining to suchdamage claims.
4. DELAYS: The delivery date(s) under the Contract is only an estimate and is based upon prompt receipt of allnecessary information from Buyer. The delivery date(s) is subject to and shall be extended by delays causedby strikes. fires, accidents, shortages of labor or materials, embargoes. or delays in transportation, compliance with government agency or official requests, or any other similar or dissimilar cause beyond the reasonable control of Seller. FAILURE TO DELIVER WITHIN THE TIME ESTIMATED SHALL: NOT BE A BREACH OF
CONTRACT ON SELLER’S PART AND IN NO EVENT WHATSOEVER WILL SELLER BE RESPONSIBLE OR
BUYER ENTITLED TO ANY DIRECT OR INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISINGOUT OR OF OR RELATING TO ANY DELAY IN DELIVERY. If Buyer causes Seller to delay shipment or completion of work, Seller shall be entitled to any and all extra cost and expenses resulting from such delay.
5. CANCELLATIONS AND ALTERATIONS: (a) Accepted orders may by cancelled by Buyer only with Seller’s
express written consent. If cancellation is allowed, Buyer agrees to pay to Seller all expenses incurred anddamage sustained by Seller on account of such cancellation, plus a reasonable profit. (b) The delivery date(s)or specifications of accepted orders, whether completed or in process, cannot be altered except by Seller’s
express written consent and upon terms which will indemnify Seller for all expenses incurred and damages
sustained by Seller on account of such alteration, plus a reasonable profit

408

KRATOS General Microwave
Terms and Conditions of Sale
3. SHIPMENT: Deliveries are F.O.B. Ex Works Seller’s plant. Risk of loss shall pass to the Buyer upon delivery
to the carrier. Any claims for damage or loss in shipment are between the carrier and Buyer. Seller shall not be
involved in such claims beyond Seller’s assistance is processing and securing information pertaining to suchdamage claims.
4. DELAYS: The delivery date(s) under the Contract is only an estimate and is based upon prompt receipt of allnecessary information from Buyer. The delivery date(s) is subject to and shall be extended by delays causedby strikes. fires, accidents, shortages of labor or materials, embargoes. or delays in transportation, compliance with government agency or official requests, or any other similar or dissimilar cause beyond the reasonable control of Seller. FAILURE TO DELIVER WITHIN THE TIME ESTIMATED SHALL: NOT BE A BREACH OF
CONTRACT ON SELLER’S PART AND IN NO EVENT WHATSOEVER WILL SELLER BE RESPONSIBLE OR
BUYER ENTITLED TO ANY DIRECT OR INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISINGOUT OR OF OR RELATING TO ANY DELAY IN DELIVERY. If Buyer causes Seller to delay shipment or completion of work, Seller shall be entitled to any and all extra cost and expenses resulting from such delay.
5. CANCELLATIONS AND ALTERATIONS: (a) Accepted orders may by cancelled by Buyer only with Seller’s
express written consent. If cancellation is allowed, Buyer agrees to pay to Seller all expenses incurred anddamage sustained by Seller on account of such cancellation, plus a reasonable profit. (b) The delivery date(s)or specifications of accepted orders, whether completed or in process, cannot be altered except by Seller’s
express written consent and upon terms which will indemnify Seller for all expenses incurred and damages
sustained by Seller on account of such alteration, plus a reasonable profit
6 WARRANTY: Subject to the terms, conditions and limitations hereinafter set forth, Seller warrants, to theoriginal Buyer only, each new product manufactured by seller to be free from defects in material and workmanship. Seller’s entire and exclusive obligation and liability, and Buyer’s sole and exclusive remedy, under
the warranty is limited to repairing or replacing at Sellers option, free of charge; F.O.B. Ex Works Seller’s plant,
any part proving defective during the duration of this express warranty. The obligations of Seller under thiswarranty shall not include any transportation cost, labor costs,. installation costs. or other costs or charges
associated with the repair or replacement This warranty shall not be enforceable if the Buyer is in default inmaking any contract payment The duration of this express warranty (a) for new equipment is one year from thedate of shipment and (b) for any SELLER replacement part is 90 days after the date of installation, but no morethan 6 months after shipment. This warranty does not cover failures caused in whole or in part by (1) improper
installation, by other than SELLER, or maintenance; (2) improper use or application; (3) corrosion; (4) normal
deterioration; (5) operation beyond rated capacity, (6) the use of replacement parts or lubricants which do notmeet or exceed Seller’s specifications, or (7) improper repairs. Products furnished, but not manufactured bySeller, are not covered by this warranty, but by only such warranties as are given by the said manufacturers toSeller. To qualify for warranty consideration at the earlier of the Buyer’s discovery of the defect or the time atwhich the Buyer should have discovered the defect; Buyer must immediately notify Seller and must promptly
thereafter return to Seller (freight prepaid) all defective parts. THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU
OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTYOR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WHICH ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMEDTHE OBLIGATION AND LIABILITY OF SELLER UNDER THE EXPRESS WARRANTY STATED SHALL NOTINCLUDE LIABILITY FOR LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF PROFITS OR ANY OTHER DIRECT OR INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE FAILURE OF ITS PRODUCT OR ANY DEFECT
IN THAT PRODUCT OR DELAY IN REMEDYING THE SAME.
7. LIABILITY: Seller shall not be liable to Buyer for (a) any losses; (b) any direct or indirect incidental or consequential damages or (c) any delays, caused by the failure of its product or any defect in that product, except to
repair or replace defective parts as provided for in the Warranty provision. Seller’s warranty runs only to Buyerand does not extend expressly or by implications, to any other person. Buyer agrees that Seller’s fulfillmentof its obligations under the Warranty provision shall constitute a fulfillment of all Seller’s liabilities. whether incontract or in tort, with respect to the Contract. Buyer also agrees that Seller shall not be liable for any damages to Buyer or to a third person arising out of the presence of the installed products on Buyer’s or third
person’s premises or out of the use or operation thereof. In no event whatsoever, shall Seller be held liable toBuyer for any direct or indirect incidental, exemplary, or consequential damages

409

KRATOS General Microwave
Terms and Conditions of Sale
8. PATENTS: Seller agrees to indemnify. Buyer against all damages and costs recovered in any patent litigation upon Buyer’s use of Seller’s products in the manner intended by Seller in an amount not exceeding thesum paid for the infringing products provided (a) Buyer immediately notifies the Seller in writing of any suchclaim of infringement (b) Buyer allows Seller to employ counsel, conduct the defense to a finality and assist
Seller with the defense; and (c) Buyer shall have paid for all the products or shall not be in default in any of
the required payments. Seller assumes no liability as to possible patent infringement by virtue of the use of
its products in combination with other elements or structures or the use of products manufactured to Buyer
specifications. If any of its products should be held in any such suit to constitute infringement and its use
enjoined Seller shall have the right, at Seller’s option, at its own expense, either to procure for Buyer the rightto continue such use or to substitute, other non infringing or to remove such infringing products and refund to
Buyer all money paid to Seller. Except as herein specifically provided, Seller shall not be liable to Buyer for any
patent infringement by said products or any part thereof.
9. EQUIPMENT NOT SPECIFIED: Machinery, equipment, materials and labor services, including engineeringor mechanical services. not specified in the Contract, are to be furnished in all cases by Buyer.
10. CHANGES OF CONSTRUCTION AND DESIGN: Seller reserves the right to change or revise the construction and design of the products purchased by Buyer, if in its judgment it is to its own or Buyer’s best interest
to do so. Buyer agrees to bear the expense of meeting any changes or modifications in regulatory or code
requirements which become effective after Seller has accepted Buyer’s order.
11. MATERIAL SPECIFIED BY CONTRACT: The Contract specifies the products supplied by Seller. The
amount or the kind of such products is not changed nor increased by anything shown upon drawings furnished by Seller which are not a part of the Contract documents.
12. RETURNED PRODUCTS AND RESTOCKING: Including Products covered in paragraph 6, Products may
not be returned without the express written consent of Seller and in accordance with shipping instructions
from Seller. All transportation charges to and from Seller’s factory are to be paid by Buyer. Products madeto special order are not returnable. A restocking charge of not less than twenty percent (20%) will apply on
standard products accepted by Seller for a return and credit. Seller will not be responsible for the dispositionof returned products unless the terms of this provision are complied with.
13. ENTIRE AGREEMENT: The parties agree that there an no agreements or representations express or
implied, between the parties other than what is contained in this Contract of which this Conditions of Sale isa part. which represents the entire agreement between Seller and Buyer with the exception of those agreements, if any. expressly agreed to in writing by Seller. No course of prior dealings and no usage of the tradeshall be relevant to supplement or explain any terms used in this Contract. The Contract between the parties
may be modified or rescinded only by a writing signed by both Seller’s contracts representative and Buyer’s
procurement representative.
14. CHARACTER OF PRODUCT AND SECURITY INTEREST: The products delivered by Seller under the termsof the Contract shall remain personal property and retain its character as such no matter in what manner affixed or attached to any structure or property. Buyer grants Seller a security interest in said products, including any proceeds there from, with remedy of self help until all sums due Seller have bean paid to it in cash.
15. FORCE MAJEURE: Neither party shall be liable in damages or have the right to terminate this Agreement
for any delay or default in performing hereunder if such delay or default is caused by conditions beyond its
control including, but not limited to Acts of God, Government restrictions (including the denial or cancellationof any export or other necessary license), wars, insurrections and/or any other cause beyond the reasonable
control of the party whose performance is affected.

410

KRATOS General Microwave
Terms and Conditions of Sale
16. INSTALLATION: If installation by the Seller is included within this quotation, Purchaser shall provide all of
the following at its own expense and at all times pertinent to the installation :(a) Free, dry, unrestricted and continuous access to Purchaser’s premises.
(b) Proper foundations, lighting, power, water and storage facilities
reasonably required.

411

The information contained in this data sheet is basic
marketing information and does not contain any
export controlled information.

430

SWITCHES
www.kratosmed.com
ISRAEL
JERUSALEM SITE:
20 Pierre Koenig
Jerusalem 9153102
sales@kratos-med.com
Tel: +972-2-568-9444

ISRAELEYAL SITE:
Kibbutz Eyal
Hasharon Hatichon 4584000
sales-eyal@kratos-med.com
Tel: +972-9-749-9100

431

USA
NEW YORK SITE:
227A Michael Drive
Syosset, New York 11731
kratos-gmc@kratosdefense.com
Tel: +1 516 802 0900